JP6750896B2 - Amusement machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

Parts (parts) are attached to the gaming machine for production and decoration (for example, Patent Document 1).

JP, 2011-229619, A

However, in conventional game machines, parts were changed as a part (model element) of the frame decoration device as a device to provide the game machine at low cost. If the parts are not correct, it may cause a malfunction. In addition, the frame decoration device could be used incorrectly.

The present invention, when the mounting component is wrong, an object of the notification to Turkey.

In a typical form of the present invention, in a gaming machine provided with effect control means capable of executing effects related to the game, and a decoration device for performing light emission effect, the game machine is configured as a part of the decoration device, The effect control means includes a detachable part, and the effect control means displays a variable display game in a predetermined manner by variably displaying the first identification information and the second identification information displayed in a size smaller than the first identification information. It can be displayed on the device, and if it is determined whether the parts are standard products of the game machine and it is determined that they are not standard products of the game machine, it can be specified that they are not standard products of the game machine. It is possible to display various component abnormality notification images on the display device, and when the game machine is initialized, display an initialization notification image on the display device that can specify that the game machine has been initialized. It is possible to display the component abnormality notification image with priority over the initialization notification image and at a position that does not overlap the second identification information .

According to one aspect of the present invention, it is possible to notify when the attached component is wrong.

It is the perspective view which looked at the game machine from the front side. It is a front view of a game board. It is a figure which shows the structure of a batch display device. It is a block diagram showing a configuration example of a game control system of the gaming machine. It is the block diagram which shows the constitution example of the production control system of the game machine. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of the first half part of main processing. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of the latter half part of main processing. It is a figure which shows the structure of RAM of the game microcomputer of a game control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a timer interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of an output process. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of winning a prize switch / state monitoring processing. It is the flowchart which shows the procedure of game state check processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a probability setting value change process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a probability setting value confirmation process. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of special figure game processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the starting opening switch monitoring process. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of special processing starting switch common processing. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of special figure reservation information judgment processing. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of the special winning opening switch monitoring processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a special figure normal process. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of special figure 1 fluctuation start processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a special figure 2 fluctuation start process. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of big hit flag 1 setting processing. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of big hit flag 2 setting processing. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of the big hit judging processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a small hit determination process. It is a figure which illustrates the big hit probability and the small hit probability of a special figure variation display game with respect to each setting (each set value). It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of special figure 1 stop design setting processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a special figure 2 stop symbol setting process. It is the figure which illustrates the big hit symbol distribution (big hit breakdown) of the special figure fluctuation indicatory game for each setting. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of processing during special figure change. It is the flowchart which shows the procedure of design fluctuation control processing. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of general-purpose game processing. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of gate switch monitoring processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a normal figure normal process. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of the first half part of external information edit processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the latter half part of external information edit processing. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the batch display apparatus during changing probability setting (the 1). It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the batch display apparatus (2) during change of probability setting. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the batch display apparatus (3) during change of probability setting. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the batch display apparatus (4) during change of probability setting. It is a figure which shows the display example (the 5) of the batch display apparatus during change of probability setting. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the batch display apparatus (6) during change of probability setting. It is a figure which shows the other structural example of a batch display device. It is a figure which shows another structure of a collective display device. It is the flowchart which shows the main processing of the production control control equipment. It is a flow chart which shows reception command check processing. It is a flow chart which shows received command analysis processing. It is a flow chart which shows single-shot system command processing. It is a flow chart which shows pre-reading symbol type command processing. It is a flow chart which shows pre-reading variable system command processing. It is a flowchart which shows a symbol type command process. It is a flow chart which shows variable system command processing. It is a flow chart which shows change production setting processing. It is a flow chart which shows big hit system command processing. It is a figure showing signs that a removable part concerning a 2nd embodiment is attached to a game machine. It is a figure which shows roughly the structural example of the game board and parts which concern on 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows another example of the game board and parts which concern on 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the structure of the parallel serial conversion part of the identification board which concerns on 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the 1st modification of the identification board|substrate (especially parallel-serial conversion part) which concerns on 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the 2nd modification of the identification board|substrate (especially parallel-serial conversion part) which concerns on 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the 3rd modification of the identification board which concerns on 2nd Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of the main processing of the production control device concerning a 2nd embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of the parts collation processing concerning a 2nd embodiment. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing a reference table that associates model designation commands with model identification information in the second embodiment. It is a block diagram showing an example of composition of a game control system of a game machine concerning a 3rd embodiment. It is a figure explaining the transition state at the time of power-on (power-supply restoration) of the game machine which concerns on 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the probability setting value change process which concerns on 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the process at the time of setting value reception which concerns on 3rd Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of segment LED edit processing concerning a 3rd embodiment. It is a timing chart which shows an example of the timing of the fixed display period of the probability setting value at the time of setting change which concerns on 3rd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the display screen of a display apparatus at the time of setting change which concerns on 3rd Embodiment. 9 is a timing chart showing a first modified example of the timing of the fixed display period of the probability setting value at the time of changing the setting according to the third embodiment. It is a timing chart which shows the 2nd modification of the timing of the fixed display period of the probability setting value at the time of setting change which concerns on 3rd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the display mode at the time of setting change of the state display apparatus concerning the 2nd modification of 3rd Embodiment. It is a timing chart which shows the 3rd modification of the timing of the fixed display period of the probability setting value at the time of setting change which concerns on 3rd Embodiment. It is a timing chart which shows the 4th modification of the timing of the fixed display period of the probability set value at the time of setting change concerning a 3rd embodiment. It is a timing chart which shows an example of the timing of the fixed display period of the probability setting value at the time of setting confirmation which concerns on 3rd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the display screen of a display device at the time of setting confirmation which concerns on 3rd Embodiment. 9 is a timing chart showing a modification of the timing of the fixed display period of the probability setting value at the time of setting confirmation according to the third embodiment. It is a figure which shows the modification of the display screen of a display device at the time of setting confirmation which concerns on 3rd Embodiment. It is a block diagram showing an example of composition of a game control system concerning a 4th embodiment. It is a figure which shows the address of the input port in the game control apparatus which concerns on 4th Embodiment, and the signal input into each input port. It is a front view of a game board according to a fifth embodiment. The figure which shows the relationship (FIG. 75(A)) between the number of hold|holding and the occurrence probability of setting suggestion production which concerns on 5th Embodiment, and the relationship between the number of hold|holding, a set value, and the lighting probability of red lighting (FIG. 75(B)). Is. The relationship between the error priority and the bit of the error code according to the sixth embodiment (FIG. 76(A)) and the notation of the error code (binary) and the error code (hexadecimal) (FIG. 76(B)) are shown. FIG. In the display example of the error code and the error content according to the sixth embodiment, when there are two errors (left: binary notation, right: hexadecimal notation) (FIG. 77(A)), one error is resolved. The case (FIG. 77(B)) and the case where all errors are resolved (FIG. 77(C)) are shown. An example of switching display of error contents according to the sixth embodiment, an example of displaying a panel radio wave error as an initial state (FIG. 78(A)), an example of operating the operation unit once to display a frame radio wave error (FIG. 78(B)), and an example (FIG. 78(C)) of displaying the switch abnormality error by operating the operation unit once. It is a figure showing an example in which a removable part concerning a 7th embodiment was attached to a game machine. It is a figure which shows the example which displays the notification information which concerns on 7th Embodiment on the display apparatus which is displaying the decoration special symbol of a special figure fluctuation display game. It is a figure which shows the example which changes the display mode of the alerting|reporting information which concerns on 7th Embodiment according to operation|movement of a movable body. It is a figure which shows the example at the time of prohibiting drive of a frame decoration device in the parts collation process which concerns on 7th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the identification board of the parts which concerns on 7th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the reference table (FIG. 84(A)) which matches a model designation|designated command and model identification information which concerns on 7th Embodiment, and the reference table (FIG. 84(B)) which shows classification|category of the nonconforming model. It is a figure which shows the example at the time of a parts collation process which concerns on 7th Embodiment, and changes a drive mode by classifying parts. It is a front view of a game board provided in a game machine according to an eighth embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of light guide plate control processing concerning an 8th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of the movable body control processing concerning an 8th embodiment. It is a front view of a game board when the light guide plate according to the eighth embodiment is initially operated. It is a front view of the game board at the time of the initial operation of the internal accessory and the external accessory according to the eighth embodiment. It is a timing chart which shows an example of the timing of the initial operation control processing which concerns on 8th Embodiment. It is a front view of a game board at the time of running the variable display game according to the eighth embodiment. It is a front view of a game board when a reach effect is performed during execution of a variable display game according to an eighth embodiment. It is a front view of the game board when the reach effect is performed in the variable display game while executing the initial operation control process according to the eighth embodiment. It is a modification of the front view of the game board when the reach effect is performed in the variable display game while executing the initial operation control process according to the eighth embodiment. It is the 2nd modification of the front view of the game board at the time of performing the reach production in a variable display game, while performing the initial operation control processing concerning an 8th embodiment. It is a timing chart which shows an example of the timing of the display mode of the variable display game before and after the power failure recovery which concerns on 9th Embodiment. In 10th Embodiment, it is a figure which shows an example of the display screen of a display apparatus when identification information is displayed in each display mode. In the tenth embodiment, it is a screen transition diagram showing the display screen of the display device in time series, the screen transition of the entire game from the display result of the variable display game is a special result mode until the special game is started Is an example. It is a figure which shows the structural aspect and variation mode of the decoration special symbol displayed on the display screen of a display apparatus regarding 11th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the modification of the structure aspect of a decoration special symbol displayed on the display screen of a display apparatus, and a variation aspect regarding 11th Embodiment. In 11th Embodiment, it is a table referred in order to set the structure aspect and variation aspect of a decoration special design. In 11th Embodiment, it is a modification of the table referred in order to set the structure aspect and variation aspect of a decoration special design. It is a screen transition diagram (first half) which showed the display screen of the display apparatus in time series regarding 11th Embodiment. It is a screen transition diagram (second half) which showed the display screen of the display apparatus in time series regarding 11th Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of the main processing concerning a 12th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of the hit method alert processing concerning a 12th embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the single command system command processing which concerns on 12th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the process at the time of receiving the hitting instruction|indication which concerns on 12th Embodiment. It is a screen transition diagram (the 1) which illustrates the display screen of a display apparatus in a time series regarding 12th Embodiment. It is a screen transition diagram (the 2) which illustrates the display screen of a display apparatus in a time series regarding 12th Embodiment. It is a screen transition diagram (the 3) which illustrates the display screen of a display apparatus in a time series regarding 12th Embodiment. It is a figure which illustrates the form of the image of a right-handed instruction display regarding a 13th embodiment. It is a figure which illustrates the inside color change of the right-handed instruction|indication display regarding 13th Embodiment. It is another figure which illustrates the color change inside the right-handed instruction|indication regarding 13th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the example arrange|positioned so that a color may change spatially gradually according to a hue circle in the right-handed instruction|indication display regarding 13th Embodiment. It is a screen transition diagram which illustrates movement of the right-handing instruction|indication display on the display screen of a display apparatus regarding 13th Embodiment. It is a figure which illustrates addition of the effect image to the right-handing instruction|indication display regarding 13th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the presence or absence of each parameter which defines and characterizes the production|generation aspect of notification production regarding 13th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows another example of the presence or absence of each parameter which defines and characterizes the production|generation aspect of notification production regarding 13th Embodiment. It is a screen transition figure which shows the modification of the production|generation aspect of the notification production|generation by the right-handing instruction|indication display regarding 13th Embodiment. It is a screen transition diagram which shows the production|generation aspect of the notification production|generation by the left-handed instruction|indication display regarding 13th Embodiment.

[First Embodiment]
Hereinafter, preferred embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings. The front, rear, left, and right in the description of the gaming machine refer to the direction viewed by the player who is playing the game.

[Overall view of gaming machines]
FIG. 1 is a diagram illustrating a game machine.

The gaming machine 10 is provided with an opening/closing frame that is attached to a frame 11 fixed to the island equipment so as to be openable and closable via a hinge. The open/close frame includes a front frame 12 (main body frame) and a glass frame 15.

A game board 30 (see FIG. 2) is arranged on the front frame 12, and a glass frame 15 having a cover glass 14 for covering the front surface of the game board 30 is attached to the front frame 12. The cover glass 14 functions as a game visual recognition area that allows the game area 32 (see FIG. 2) formed on the game board 30 to be visually recognized.

The front frame 12 and the glass frame 15 can be individually opened. For example, the game area 32 of the game board 30 can be accessed by opening only the glass frame 15. Further, by opening the front frame 12 in a state where the glass frame 15 is not open, it is possible to access the game control device (main board) 100 (see FIG. 7) and the like arranged on the back surface side of the game board 30. You can

Various frame components are arranged at the edge of the glass frame 15 around the cover glass 14.

At the upper center and the left side of the glass frame 15, decoration devices 18a and 18b capable of emitting light according to the game state are arranged. The decoration devices 18a and 18b house illumination members such as LEDs inside and perform a light emission effect according to the gaming state. The illumination members arranged inside the decoration devices 18a and 18b form a part of the frame decoration device 18 (see FIG. 4).

Upper speakers 19a are arranged at the upper right corner and the upper left corner of the glass frame 15, respectively. In addition to these upper speakers 19a, two lower speakers 19b are provided in the lower part of the gaming machine 10. The lower speaker 19b is arranged in the lower left corner of the glass frame 15 and the lower right corner of the front frame 12. The upper speaker 19a and the lower speaker 19b emit a sound effect, an alarm sound, a notification sound, and the like.

On the right side of the glass frame 15, a projecting effect unit 13 is provided that extends in the up-down direction of the gaming machine 10 and projects toward the front (player side). The protrusion effect unit 13 is an effect device that performs light emission effect or the like according to the progress state of the game. The lighting member arranged inside the projection effect unit 13 also constitutes a part of the frame decoration device 18 (see FIG. 4 ).

An upper plate unit having an upper plate 21 capable of storing game balls is attached to the lower portion of the glass frame 15. The upper plate 21 is formed in a box shape having an open top surface. The game balls stored in the upper plate 21 are supplied to a ball launching device (not shown) one by one.

The upper plate unit further includes an effect operation device that accepts an input operation from the player, a ball lending operation device that accepts an input operation from the player, and a decoration device 22 that performs a light emission effect or the like according to a game state. ..

The effect operation device is an operation device in which the touch panel 25b is incorporated in the effect button 25, and is provided at the center of the upper part of the upper plate unit so that the player can easily operate it.

When the player operates the effect operation device, it is possible to perform an effect in which the operation of the player is intervened in the special figure variation display game displayed on the display device 41 (see FIG. 2). For example, it is possible to select an effect pattern (effect mode) or execute a notice effect that gives advance notice of the result of the variable display game corresponding to the starting memory. Note that the variable display game includes a special figure variable display game, and when it is simply referred to as a variable display game, this specification refers to the special figure variable display game.

Further, the effect pattern may be changed not only during execution of the variable display game but also by the player operating the effect operation device during non-execution.

The gaming state when the variable display game is executed is composed of a plurality of gaming states. The normal gaming state (normal state) is a gaming state in which no special gaming state has occurred. Further, the special gaming state is, for example, a time-saving state as a specific gaming state or a state in which a high probability of occurrence of a special result (for example, a big hit) in a variable display game (probable variation state, probability variation state), big hit state (special gaming state). ), is a small hit game state (small hit state).

Here, the probability change state (specific game state) is one that continues until the next big hit (loop type), one that continues until a variable display game is executed a predetermined number of times (multi-turn type, ST), and There are those that continue until a predetermined probability falling lottery is won (falling lottery type).

Furthermore, without determining whether or not to generate a probability variation state by a big hit symbol random number, a probability variation state may always be generated when a big hit occurs, or a winning device or the like having a specific area is provided and specified. The probability change state may be generated when the game ball passes through the area.

The ball lending operation device is an operation device operated by a player when borrowing a game ball, and is provided on the upper right side of the upper plate unit. The ball lending operation device includes a ball lending button 27, a return button 28, and a balance display unit 26. The ball lending button 27 is a button operated by the player when renting a game ball, and the return button 28 is for ejecting a prepaid card or the like from a card unit (not shown) arranged adjacent to the gaming machine 10. It is a button operated by the player. The balance display unit 26 is a display area in which the balance of a prepaid card or the like is displayed.

The decoration device 22 accommodates a lighting member such as an LED inside, and is a device for performing a light emission effect or the like according to a game state, and is provided in the front portion of the upper plate unit. The lighting member arranged inside the decoration device 22 constitutes a part of the frame decoration device 18 (see FIG. 4 ).

Below the glass frame 15 including the above-mentioned upper plate unit and the like, below the front frame 12, an operation handle 24 for controlling the operation of a ball launching device (not shown) and a game ball can be stored. And a lower plate 23 are provided.

The operation handle 24 is disposed on the lower right side of the front frame 12 and below the lower speaker 19b on the right side. When the player turns the operation handle 24, the ball launching device launches the game ball supplied from the upper plate 21 to the game area 32 of the game board 30. The launch speed of the game ball launched from the ball launch device is set to increase as the amount of rotational operation of the operation handle 24 increases. That is, the ball launching device can change the launching force, which is the force (speed) of launching the game ball into the game area, in response to the operation of the operation handle 24 by the player, and the game can be performed in various launching modes with different launching forces. You can fire a ball. The launch mode includes left hitting (normal hitting) that causes the game ball to flow down on the left side of the game area 32 and right hitting that causes the game ball to flow down on the right side of the game area 32.

The lower plate 23 is arranged below the upper plate unit at a predetermined distance from the upper plate unit. The lower plate 23 has a ball removal hole 23a that vertically penetrates the bottom surface of the lower plate 23, and an opening/closing operation portion 23b for opening and closing the ball removal hole 23a. When the player operates the opening/closing operation portion 23b to open the ball hole 23a, the game balls stored in the lower plate 23 can be discharged to the outside through the ball hole 23a.

[Game board]
Subsequently, the game board 30 of the game machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. 2A. FIG. 2A is a front view of the game board 30 provided in the game machine 10.

As shown in FIG. 2A, the game board 30 includes a flat plate-shaped game board body 30a that serves as a mounting base for various members. The game board body 30a is made of wood or synthetic resin, and a game area 32 surrounded by a guide rail 31 is provided on the front surface of the game board body 30a. The gaming machine 10 is configured to shoot a game ball from a ball launching device in a game area 32 surrounded by a guide rail 31 to play a game. In the game area 32, windmills, obstacle nails, etc. are arranged as members for converting the flow direction of the game balls, and the launched game balls flow down the game area 32 while changing the rolling direction by these members.

A center case (front structure) 40 that forms a window serving as a display area of a variable display game is attached to the approximate center of the game area 32. A display device 41 as an effect display device (variable display device) that variably displays (variably displays) a plurality of pieces of identification information is arranged behind the window formed in the center case 40. The display device 41 includes, for example, a liquid crystal display, and is arranged so that the display content can be viewed from the front side of the game board 30 through the window of the center case 40. The display device 41 is not limited to one having a liquid crystal display, and may be one having a display such as an EL or CRT.

The display screen (display unit) of the display device 41 is provided with a plurality of variable display areas, and in each variable display area, identification information (special symbols) and a character that produces a variable display game are displayed. In addition, images based on the progress of the game (big hit display, fanfare display, ending display, etc.) are displayed on the display screen.

Further, in the center case 40, an inflow port 40a to the warp passage 40e for guiding the game ball flowing down the game area 32 to the inside of the center case 40, and a stage in which the game ball passing through the warp passage 40e can roll. Section 40b is provided. Since the stage part 40b of the center case 40 is arranged above the starting winning opening 36 and the normal variation winning device 37, the game ball rolled on the stage part 40b is moved to the starting winning port 36 or the ordinary variation winning device 37. It's easy to win.

An upper effect unit 40c and a side effect unit 40d are provided on the upper and right sides of the center case 40, respectively. The upper effect unit 40c and the side effect unit 40d constitute a part of the board decoration device 46 (see FIG. 4) and the board effect device 44 (see FIG. 4).

In the game area 32 on the right side of the center case 40, a normal symbol starting gate (universal figure starting gate) 34 is provided. Inside the universal figure starting gate 34, a gate switch (SW) 34a (see FIG. 3) for detecting a game ball that has passed through the universal figure starting gate 34 is provided. When the game ball hit in the game area 32 passes through the universal figure starting gate 34, the universal figure variation display game is executed.

The general winning opening 35 is arranged in the lower left game area 32 of the center case 40, and the general winning opening 35 is also arranged in the lower right game area 32 of the center case 40. The winning of the game ball into the general winning opening 35 is detected by the winning opening switches (SW) 35a to 35n (see FIG. 3) provided in the general winning opening 35.

In the game area 32 below the center case 40, there is provided a starting winning opening (first starting winning area) 36 for giving a condition for starting the special figure variation display game, and immediately below that is a second starting winning opening (second starting winning opening). An ordinary variable winning device 37 having a starting winning area) is provided. The normal variation winning device 37 includes a movable member (movable piece) 37b that is rotated in a direction in which the upper end side is tilted toward the front side to convert the game ball into a state in which the game ball easily flows. When the movable member 37b is in the closed state, the game ball cannot normally win the variable winning device 37. When the game ball wins the starting winning opening 36 or the normal variation winning device 37, the special figure variation display game is executed as an auxiliary game.

The movable member 37b is a so-called toro-type ordinary electric accessory, and is rotated via the universal solenoid 37c (see FIG. 3) when the result of the universal figure variation display game is a predetermined stop display mode. The game ball is normally opened to change to an open state in which the game balls normally flow into the variable winning device 37 (an easy winning state advantageous to the player).

The movable member 37b is controlled by the game control device 100 described later. The game control device 100 increases the frequency of occurrence of the easy prize winning state by shortening the variation time of the universal figure changing display game or setting the hit probability of the universal figure changing display game to be higher than usual, or the normal game state. By increasing the generation time of the easy prize winning state than the easy prize winning state, the time saving state (universal power support state) is generated as the specific game state. Even in the probability variation state (excluding the latent probability variation state), a time saving state (universal power support state) occurs redundantly.

In the game area 32 on the lower right of the normal variation winning device 37, an attacker type in which the special winning opening solenoid (39b) (see FIG. 3) is rotated in a direction in which the upper end side is tilted toward the front side to open the special winning opening A special variation winning device 39 having an opening/closing door 39c is provided. The special variation winning device 39 converts a state in which the special winning opening is closed (a closed state that is disadvantageous to the player) to an open state (a special gaming state that is advantageous to the player) according to the result of the special figure variation display game, and a big prize is awarded. A predetermined game value (prize ball) is given to the player by facilitating the inflow of the game ball into the mouth. In addition, inside the special winning opening, a count switch 39a (see FIG. 3) is arranged as a detecting means for detecting a game ball that has entered the special winning opening. Further, one or a plurality of special winning opening LEDs 39d (full-color LEDs) that illuminate the special winning opening are arranged in or near the special winning opening (around the special winning opening) of the special variable winning device 39. ..

When a game ball wins the major winning openings of the general winning opening 35, the starting winning opening 36, the normal variation winning device 37, and the special variation winning device 39, the payout control device 200 (see FIG. 3) indicates the type of the winning opening. The prize balls of the number corresponding to are discharged from the dispensing device to the upper plate 21. Further, in the game area 32 below the normal variation winning device 37, an out port 30b for collecting game balls that have not won a prize is provided.

Further, a special figure variation display game (special figure 1 variation display game, special figure 2 variation display game) and a general figure variation display game are executed outside the game area 32 and in the lower right corner of the game board body 30a. A collective display device 50 is provided. The collective display device 50 includes display units 51 to 60 that display information such as the current game state (see FIG. 2B).

FIG. 2B is a diagram showing a configuration of the collective display device 50. The collective display device 50 is composed of a 7-segment type display (LED lamp) or the like, and a first special figure fluctuation display section 51 (special figure 1 display, lamp D1) and a second special figure fluctuation for a variable display game. A display unit 52 (special figure 2 display, lamp D2), a fluctuation display unit 53 for general figure fluctuation display game (general display, lamps D8, D10, D18), and start (holding) of each fluctuation display game And a storage display unit for informing the number of storages (special figure 1 hold display 54, special figure 2 hold display 55, general figure hold display 56). The special figure 1 hold indicator 54 is composed of lamps D11 and D12. The special figure 2 hold indicator 55 is composed of lamps D13 and D14. The universal figure hold indicator 56 is composed of lamps D15 and D16.

In addition, the collective display device 50, the first game state display unit 57 (first game state indicator, lamp) for notifying that it is right-handed (when right-handed) or left-handed (normal) D7), a second gaming state display section 58 (second gaming state indicator, lamp D17) that lights up when a time-saving state occurs and notifies the occurrence of the time-saving state, and the probability state of jackpot when the gaming machine 10 is powered on is high. The third game state display section 59 (third game state display unit, probability state display section, lamp D9) that indicates that the state is displayed, the number of rounds at the time of a big hit (the number of times of opening and closing the special variation winning device 39) is displayed. A round display unit 60 (lamps D3 to D6) is provided.

In the special figure 1 display device 51 and the special figure 2 display device 52, the variable display game is executed by a variable display in which identification information (for example, a central segment) is repeatedly turned on and off (blinking). The special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52 are not limited to such a segment type display section, and may be composed of an assembly of a plurality of LEDs, or when performing variable display. In addition, all the LEDs provided as indicators are all turned on and off (all LEDs are simultaneously blinked), cyclically turned on (one of the LEDs is turned on and off in a predetermined order at a predetermined time interval), or plural It may be performed by turning on/off (blinking) or circulating lighting by a predetermined number of the LEDs. Also on the universal figure display 53, the variable display game is executed by a variable display (blinking) in which the lamps D10 and D18 are repeatedly turned on and off. Further, the public figure display 53 can also be appropriately configured similarly to the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52.

The lamp display device 80 is a lamp display unit 1 or 2 (LED) for performing variable display (blinking) that repeats lighting display and extinguishing display as a symbol (a fourth special symbol described later), and the start of each special symbol variable display game. (Hold) It has a lamp display unit 3-6 (LED) for notifying the number of stored memories. The lamp display device 80 is controlled by the effect control device 300 (described later).

The lamp display units 1 and 2 blink as a variable display at a predetermined blinking cycle (for example, 200 msec (millisecond)). The variation time of the variation display in the special figure 1 display 51, the special figure 2 display 52, and the universal figure display 53 of the collective display device 50 is measured by the game control device 100, whereas the lamp of the lamp display device 80 The variation time of the display units 1 and 2 is measured by the effect control device 300 (described later).

The lamp display units 3 and 4 (special figure 1 holding LED 1, special figure 1 holding LED 2) display the special figure 1 holding number (first starting memory number) by a combination of the off state, the lighting state, and the blinking state. Similarly, the lamp display parts 5 and 6 (special figure 2 holding LED1, special figure 2 holding LED2) display the special figure 2 holding number (second starting memory number) by a combination of the off state, the lighting state and the blinking state. To do. The lamp display unit 3-6 terminates the display of the number of holdings when a big hit occurs, but displays the number of holdings when the jackpot state is not in effect (including the case where a reach described later is occurring on the display device 41). To do.

Next, the flow of the game in the gaming machine 10, details of the normal figure variation display game and the special figure variation display game will be described.

In the gaming machine 10, a game is played by launching a game ball from a ball launching device (not shown) toward the game area 32. The launched game ball flows down the game area 32 while changing the rolling direction by obstacle nails, windmills, etc. arranged at various places in the game area 32, and the universal figure starting gate 34, general winning opening 35, starting winning opening 36, the normal variation winning device 37, or the special variation winning device 39 is won, or it flows into the outlet 30b provided at the bottom of the game area 32 and is discharged from the game area 32. When a game ball is won in the general winning opening 35, the starting winning opening 36, the normal variation winning device 37, or the special variation winning device 39, the number of prize balls according to the type of the winning opening is paid out through the payout device. It is discharged to the upper plate 21.

The universal figure starting gate 34 is provided with a gate switch 34a (see FIG. 3) for detecting a game ball that has passed through the universal figure starting gate 34. When the game ball passes through the universal figure starting gate 34, it is detected by the gate switch 34a, and the universal figure variation display game is executed based on the determination result of the random number value for hit determination extracted at this time.

The state in which the general figure fluctuation display game cannot be started, for example, when the general figure fluctuation display game has already been played and the general figure fluctuation display game has not ended, or the result of the general figure fluctuation display game is a win When the gaming ball passes through the universal figure starting gate 34 when the variable winning device 37 is converted to the open state, if the universal figure starting memory number is less than the upper limit number, the memory number is added (+1).

A random number value for hit determination for determining the hit/miss of the universal figure variation display game is stored in the universal figure starting memory, and when the random number value for hit determination coincides with the determination value, the universal figure variation display is displayed. The game is won and a specific result mode (specific result) is derived.

The general figure fluctuation display game is executed by the general figure display device 53 provided in the collective display device 50. The ordinary figure display 53 is composed of LEDs that indicate a hit when the normal identification information (universal figure) is in the lighted state and a deviation when the light is in the off state. By blinking the LED, the ordinary figure information fluctuates. The result is displayed by turning on or off the LED after a predetermined variable display time has elapsed.

When the universal figure random number value extracted when passing through the universal figure starting gate 34 is a hit value, the ordinary symbol displayed on the universal figure display 53 is stopped in the hit state, and is in the hit state. At this time, by driving the universal solenoid 37c (see FIG. 3), the movable member 37b is converted into an open state for a predetermined time (for example, 0.3 seconds), and the game ball to the normal variation winning device 37 is changed. Winning is allowed.

The winning of the game ball into the starting winning opening 36 and the winning of the normal variation winning device 37 are detected by the starting opening 1 switch 36a (see FIG. 3) and the starting opening 2 switch 37a (see FIG. 3). The game ball that has won the start winning opening 36 is detected as the start prize ball of the special display 1 variable display game and is stored up to a predetermined upper limit, and the game ball that has won the normal variable winning device 37 is the special map 2 It is detected as a start winning ball of the variable display game and is stored up to a predetermined upper limit.

At the time of detecting the start winning ball of the special figure fluctuation display game, a big hit random number value, a big hit symbol random value, each fluctuation pattern random value, etc. are extracted. These random number values are stored in the special figure reservation storage area (a part of RAM) of the game control device 100 as special figure start winning storages for a predetermined number of times (for example, up to eight times). The storage number of the special figure starting prize winning memory is displayed on the special figure 1 holding display 54 and the special figure 2 holding display 55 for notifying the starting winning number of the collective display device 50, and also on the display screen of the display device 41. Is displayed.

The game control device 100 executes the special figure 1 variable display game on the special figure 1 display 51 based on the winning in the starting winning opening 36 or the first starting memory. In addition, the game control device 100 executes the special figure 2 variable display game on the special figure 2 display device 52 based on the winning of the normal variable prize device 37 or the second starting memory.

In the special figure 1 variable display game (first special figure variable display game) and the special figure 2 variable display game (second special figure variable display game), the identification information in the special figure 1 display 51 and special figure 2 display 52 ( It is performed by displaying the predetermined result mode in a stopped state after the variable display of the special symbol and the special symbol). In the display device 41, a decorative special figure variable display game in which a plurality of types of identification information (for example, numbers, symbols, character patterns, etc.) are variably displayed corresponding to each special figure variable display game is executed.

In the decorative special figure variation display game on the display device 41, the decorative special symbol (identification information) composed of the numbers described above is left (first special symbol), right (second special symbol), middle (third special symbol). ) Is started in this order, scrolling is started in a predetermined order, the changing symbols are stopped in sequence after a predetermined time, and the result of the special figure variation display game is displayed. Further, on the display device 41, various effect displays such as the appearance of characters are displayed for the purpose of improving the interest. Furthermore, in the decorative special figure variation display game, as the other special special symbol (identification information), the fourth special symbol is repeatedly displayed (flashing) on and off in the lamp display parts 1 and 2 of the lamp display device 80. fluctuate. The variable display of the lamp display units 1 and 2 is stopped after a predetermined time from the start when the lamp is off, when it is out, and when it is a big hit or a small hit, it is on.

When the winning of the game ball into the starting winning opening 36 or the normal variation winning device 37 is made at a predetermined timing (when the big hit random number value at the time of winning detection is the big hit value), as a result of the special figure variation display game. A specific result mode (special result mode) is derived from the display symbol, and the jackpot state (special game state) is set. In response to this, the display mode of the display device 41 becomes a special result mode (for example, a state in which numbers such as “7, 7, 7” are aligned).

At this time, in the special variation winning device 39, the special winning opening solenoid (39b) (see FIG. 3) is energized to convert the special winning opening from the closed state to the open state for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds). That is, the special winning opening provided in the special variation winning device 39 opens greatly until a predetermined time or a predetermined number of game balls are won, and during this time, the player is given the privilege of being able to obtain many game balls. It

When the winning of the game ball to the first starting winning opening 36 or the normal variation winning device 37 is made at a predetermined timing (when the big hit random number value at the time of winning detection is the small hit value), the special figure variation display game As a result, the specific result mode (small hit result mode) is derived from the display pattern, and the small hit state is established. Correspondingly, the display mode of the display device 41 becomes the small hit result mode. In the present embodiment, the big hit random number value is also used for the small hit judgment, but the small hit value (small hit judgment value) is different from the big hit value (big hit judgment value).

At this time, in the special variation winning device 39, by energizing the special winning opening solenoid 39b (see FIG. 3), the special winning opening is converted from the closed state to the open state for a predetermined short time. In addition, the total opening time of the special winning opening is shorter in the small hit state (small hit game state) than in the big hit state (special game state), so in the small hit state, the player can obtain a game more than in the big hit state. There is little value (number of balls acquired). In both the small hit state and the big hit state, the special winning opening is open, but the big hit state may be called a first special game state and the small hit state may be called a second special game state.

Here, the difference between the big hit and the small hit will be described.

The big hit is a special result involving the operation of the condition device, and the small hit is a specific result not involving the operation of the condition device. The condition device is a device that operates when a big hit occurs in the special figure variation display game (stop display of the big hit symbol). When the condition device operates, for example, a big hit state occurs and a special electric role as a special electric accessory. It means that a specific flag for continuously operating the variable winning device 39 is set. The condition device not operating means that the above-mentioned specific flag is not set as in the case of winning the small hit lottery, for example. The "condition device" may be software means such as a flag that is turned on and off by software as described above, or hardware means such as a switch that is turned on and off electrically. Further, the "conditional device" is a term that is generally used in the field of pachinko gaming machines as a device whose operation is a necessary condition for continuous operation of the electric accessory, and the same applies in this specification. It is used as a term having the meaning of.

Specifically, in the case of a big hit, the special variation winning device is opened by setting the big hit flag, while in the case of a small hit, the special variation winning device is set by setting the small hit flag. Is released.

Note that the special figure 1 display device 51 and the special figure 2 display device 52 may be configured as separate display devices or the same display device, but each special figure variation display game is not executed at the same time. Is set as follows.

Regarding the decoration special figure variable display game on the display device 41, the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game may be executed on different display devices or different display areas, or the same display may be performed. It may be executed in the device or the display area. In this case, the decorative special figure variable display games corresponding to the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game are not executed at the same time. It should be noted that the special figure 2 variable display game is executed with priority over the special figure 1 variable display game, and there is a starting memory for the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game. When it becomes possible to execute the figure variable display game, the special figure 2 variable display game is executed.

In the following description, the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game are simply referred to as the special figure variable display game, when they are not distinguished from each other.

In addition, although not particularly limited, the starting opening 1 switch 36a in the starting winning opening 36, the starting opening 2 switch 37a in the normal variable winning device 37, the gate switch 34a, the winning opening switch 35a, the count switch (39a). ), a non-contact magnetic proximity sensor (hereinafter, referred to as a proximity switch) that includes a coil for magnetic detection and uses a phenomenon that a magnetic field changes when a metal approaches the coil is used. ing. Further, the glass frame open detection switch 63 provided on the glass frame 15 of the gaming machine 10 or the front frame open detection switch 64 (main frame open detection switch) provided on the front frame (game frame) 12 is a machine. Microswitches with specific contacts can be used.

[Game control device]
FIG. 3 is a block diagram of a game control system of the gaming machine 10. The gaming machine 10 is provided with a game control device 100 (main board), and the game control device 100 is a main control device (main board) that controls a game in a centralized manner, and includes a game microcomputer (hereinafter, game microcomputer and CPU section 110 having an input port 111, an input section 120 having an input port, an output section 130 having an output port and a driver, and a data bus 140 connecting the CPU section 110, the input section 120, and the output section 130. And so on.

The CPU unit 110 includes a gaming microcomputer (CPU) 111 called an amusement chip (IC) and an oscillator such as a crystal oscillator, and generates a CPU operation clock, a timer interrupt, and a reference clock for a random number generation circuit. It has an oscillating circuit (crystal oscillator) 113 and the like. A DC voltage of a predetermined level such as DC32V, DC12V, or DC5V generated by the power supply device 400 is supplied to the game control device 100 and electronic components such as a solenoid and a motor driven by the game control device 100 to be operable. To be done.

The power supply device 400 includes a normal power supply unit 410 including an ACDC converter that generates a DC voltage of 32V DC from an AC power supply of 24V and a DC-DC converter that generates a DC voltage of a lower level such as DC 12V and DC 5V from a voltage of 32V DC. , A backup power supply unit 420 for supplying a power supply voltage to the RAM inside the game microcomputer 111 at the time of a power failure, and a power failure monitoring circuit, and a power failure monitoring signal or a reset signal for informing the game control device 100 of the occurrence and recovery of the power failure And a control signal generation unit 430 that generates and outputs a control signal.

In the present embodiment, the power supply device 400 is configured separately from the game control device 100, but the backup power supply part 420 and the control signal generation part 430 are on separate boards or integrated with the game control device 100, that is, the main. It may be configured to be provided on the substrate. Since the game board 30 and the game control device 100 are to be replaced when the model is changed, the backup power supply unit 420 and the control signal generation unit 430 are provided on a board different from the power supply apparatus 400 or the main board as in the embodiment. By providing it, it is possible to remove it from the object of replacement and reduce the cost.

The backup power supply unit 420 can be composed of one large-capacity capacitor such as an electrolytic capacitor. The backup power supply is supplied to the game microcomputer 111 (particularly the built-in RAM) of the game control device 100, and the data stored in the RAM is retained even during a power failure or after the power is cut off. The control signal generation unit 430, for example, monitors the voltage of 32V generated by the normal power supply unit 410, detects a power failure occurrence when the voltage drops to, for example, 17V or less, changes the power failure monitoring signal, and resets the reset signal after a predetermined time. Is output. Also, when the power is turned on or the power is restored, a reset signal is output after a predetermined time has elapsed from that point.

Further, the game control device 100 (main board) is set by a turning operation of the operator or the like to turn on the set value related to the game condition (game). And a set value change switch 102 capable of changing the set value relating to the game condition. In the present embodiment, the setting value related to the game condition (game) is the probability setting value of the big hit probability, but other game conditions other than the big hit probability (such as the small hit probability and the probability variation plunge rate) also depend on the probability setting value. Can be changed. The setting key switch 93 and the setting value changing switch 102 constitute a setting changing unit (setting changing device 42) capable of changing the setting (setting value) relating to the game condition. In the present embodiment, the touch switch signal of the touch switch provided on the operation handle 24 is used as the confirmation signal for confirming the set value, but an operable confirmation button switch (operation means, operation unit) is used. The signal from the enter button switch may be provided in the game control device 100 and used as an enter signal for confirming the set value.

The setting key switch 93 and the setting value change switch 102 are provided on the game control device 100 inside the gaming machine 10 so that the setting key switch 93 and the setting value change switch 102 are arranged at a position where they cannot be operated (a position where they cannot be accessed) unless the front frame 12 (main frame) is opened. To be done. That is, a general player cannot access and operate the setting key switch 93 and the setting value changing switch 102. In addition, in the present embodiment, the setting key switch 93 and the setting value change switch 102 are provided so as to be assembled on the game control device 100, but the front frame 12 (main body frame) such as the power supply board of the power supply device 400 is opened. It may be provided at a position where it cannot be accessed unless otherwise specified.

When the gaming machine 10 is powered on, when the front frame 12 (main body frame) is opened and the setting key switch 93 is in the on state, the operator operates the setting value changing switch 102 (setting value changing button). By doing so, it is possible to change the setting (setting value) relating to the game condition such as the probability of a big hit or the probability variation plunge rate. That is, when the power is turned on, the state in which the front frame 12 is opened and the setting key switch 93 is turned on is the setting variable state in which the setting (setting value) can be changed. In a normal procedure, when the operator opens the front frame 12 and rotationally operates the setting key switch 93 to turn it to the ON position to turn on the power, a setting variable state corresponding to a state during setting change is set. The variable setting state may be notified by voice from a speaker. It should be noted that when the power is turned on, the state in which the glass frame 15 is opened and the setting key switch 93 is turned on may be the setting variable state, or both the front frame 12 and the glass frame 15 are opened and the setting key switch 93 is turned on. The state may be variable.

In the present embodiment, the setting values relating to the game conditions are defined in 6 stages, and the setting value 1 (setting 1), the setting value 2 (setting 2), the setting value 3 (setting 3), the setting value 4 (setting 4), There are setting value 5 (setting 5) and setting value 6 (setting 6). The setting value 1 is the most unfavorable setting for the player, and the setting value 6 is the most unfavorable setting for the player. The setting values 1 and 2 are low settings, the setting values 3 and 4 are intermediate settings (intermediate settings), and the setting values 5 and 6 are high settings.

In the set value change processing, every time the operator operates the set value change switch 102 (set value change button), the set value (setting) is changed to set value 1→set value 2→set value 3→set value 4→set Value 5→set value 6→set value 1→set value 2→... The setting value may be changed by rotating the setting key switch 93 to a predetermined position instead of operating the setting value changing button. The set value is not limited to 6 levels. Then, the selected setting values 1 to 6 are displayed on the probability setting value display device 143 or the like which is a 7-segment type display. The probability set value display device 143 may change the display in direct interlock with the operation of the set value change switch 102 via an electric circuit. As will be described later, by displaying the selected set values of 1 to 6 on the first special figure fluctuation display section 51 and/or the second special figure fluctuation display section 52 for the variable display game of the collective display device 50. Good.

When a touch switch signal is input to the game control device 100 by the operator touching the operation handle 24, the selected (changed) set value (that is, the setting) is confirmed and the probability set value in the RWM (storage means) is set. The value is stored in the area, and the setting value changing process ends. Note that, regardless of the touch switch signal, when the setting key switch 93 is turned off after changing the setting value or when a predetermined time has elapsed after the setting variable state, the game control device 100 confirms and stores the setting value (that is, setting). It is also possible to have a configuration.

On the other hand, after turning on the power of the gaming machine 10, when the front frame 12 (main body frame) is opened and the setting key switch 93 is rotationally operated to change from the OFF state to the ON state, the set value confirmation mode (setting confirmation state) is set. In the set value confirmation mode, the set value displayed on the probability set value display device 143 can be confirmed. The selected 1 to 6 setting values may be displayed and confirmed on the first special figure fluctuation display section 51 and/or the second special figure fluctuation display section 52 for the variable display game of the collective display device 50. .. The set value confirmation mode (setting confirmation state) may be notified by voice from a speaker.

The set value change switch 102 (set value change button) can also be used as a RAM initialization switch (RAM clear switch), and is initialized when the initialization switch is in the ON state when the power is turned on (power is restored). A switch signal is generated, and based on this, processing for forcibly initializing the information stored in the RAM 111c in the gaming microcomputer 111 and the RAM in the payout control device 200 is performed. Although not particularly limited, the initialization switch signal is read when the power is turned on, and the power failure monitoring signal is repeatedly read in the main loop of the main program executed by the gaming microcomputer 111. The reset signal is a kind of forced interrupt signal and resets the entire control system.

The gaming microcomputer 111 includes a CPU (central processing unit: microprocessor) 111a, a read-only ROM (read only memory) 111b, and a RAM (random access memory) 111c that can be read and written at any time.

The ROM 111b stores invariant information (programs, fixed data, determination values of various random numbers, etc.) for game control in a nonvolatile manner, and the RAM 111c stores a work area of the CPU 111a and a storage area of various signals and random number values during game control. Used as. An electrically rewritable nonvolatile memory such as an EEPROM may be used as the ROM 111b or the RAM 111c.

Further, the ROM 111b stores, for example, a variation pattern table for determining a variation pattern (variation mode) that defines the execution time of the special figure variation display game, the effect contents, the presence or absence of the reach state, and the like. The fluctuation pattern table is a table for the CPU 111a to refer to the fluctuation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 stored as the starting memory to determine the fluctuation pattern. Further, the variation pattern table includes a deviation variation pattern table selected when the result is a loss, a jackpot variation pattern table selected when the result is a jackpot, and the like. Further, in these pattern tables, there are tables for determining the latter half variation pattern which is the variation pattern after reaching the reach state (the latter half variation group table, the latter half variation pattern selection table, etc.), and the variation before the reach state. A table (first half variation group table, first half variation pattern selection table, etc.) for determining a first half variation pattern that is a pattern is included.

Here, the reach (reach state) has a display device whose display state can be changed, the display device derives and displays a plurality of display results at different times, and the plurality of display results are predetermined. In the gaming machine 10 in which the gaming state becomes a gaming state that is advantageous to the player (special gaming state) when the special result mode is achieved, some of the plurality of display results have already been derived and displayed. A display state in which the displayed display result satisfies the condition of the special result mode. In other words, the reach state is out of the display condition that is the special result mode even when the variable display control of the display device progresses to reach the stage before the display result is derived and displayed. Refers to a display mode that does not exist Then, for example, the reach state includes a state in which the variable display is performed by the plurality of variable display areas while maintaining the state in which the special result forms are uniform (so-called full rotation reach). Further, the reach state is a display state at the time when the display control of the display device progresses to reach the stage before the display result is derived and displayed, and is determined before the display result is derived and displayed. The display state in the case where at least a part of the display results of the plurality of variable display areas satisfying the condition satisfies the special result mode.

Therefore, for example, the decorative special figure variable display game displayed on the display device corresponding to the special figure variable display game changes a plurality of pieces of identification information for a predetermined time in each of the left, middle and right variable display areas of the display device. After displaying, in the case of displaying the result mode by stopping the variable display in the order of left, right, and middle, in the left and right variable display areas, the condition that satisfies the special result mode (for example, The state where the variable display is stopped by the same identification information) is the reach state. In addition, when the variable display of all the variable display areas is temporarily stopped, the condition that the special result mode is satisfied in any two left, middle, and right variable display areas (for example, the same identification information May be set as the reach state, and the remaining one variable display area may be variably displayed from the reach state.

Then, the reach state includes a plurality of reach effects, and a normal reach (N reach) and a special 1 reach are provided as a reach effect system in which the possibility of deriving a special result mode (big hit mode) is different (expected value is different). (SP1 reach), Special 2 reach (SP2 reach), Special 3 reach (SP3 reach), and Premier reach are set. It should be noted that the expectation level (expected value) of the jackpot is higher in the order of no reach <normal reach <special 1 reach <special 2 reach <special 3 reach <premier reach. In addition, the reach state is included in at least the variable display mode when the special result mode is derived in the special figure variable display game (when it is a big hit). That is, it may be included in the variable display mode in the case where it is determined that the special result mode is not derived in the special figure variable display game (when it is out of sync). Therefore, the state in which the reach state has occurred is a state in which there is a high possibility of a big hit compared with the case where the reach state does not occur.

The CPU 111a executes the game control program in the ROM 111b to generate a control signal (command) for the payout control device 200 or the effect control device 300, or generate and output a drive signal for a solenoid or a display device to output the game machine. Control of the whole 10 is performed. Although not shown, the gaming microcomputer 111 is a big hit random number for determining a big hit random number for determining a big hit in the special figure variation display game, a big hit symbol random number for determining a big hit symbol, and a small hit for determining a small hit symbol. Random pattern generation circuit for generating random numbers for pattern random numbers, fluctuation patterns in special display variable display games (including execution time of variable display games in various reach and variable display without reach) A clock generator that generates a clock that gives a timer interrupt signal of a predetermined cycle (for example, 4 msec (milliseconds)) to the CPU 111a and an update timing of the random number generation circuit based on an oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113. ing.

Further, the CPU 111a acquires any one of the plurality of fluctuation pattern tables stored in the ROM 111b in the processing related to the special figure fluctuation display game. Specifically, the CPU 111a causes the special figure variation display game game result (big hit or miss), the special figure variation display game probability state (normal probability state or high probability state) as the current gaming state, and the number of starting memories. Based on the above, one of the fluctuation pattern tables is selected and acquired from the plurality of fluctuation pattern tables. Here, the CPU 111a serves as a variation allocation information acquisition unit that acquires any one of the plurality of variation pattern tables stored in the ROM 111b when executing the special figure variation display game.

The payout control device 200 includes a CPU, a ROM, a RAM, an input interface, an output interface, etc., and drives the payout motor 91 of the payout unit to drive the payout motor 91 of the payout unit in accordance with the prize ball payout command (command or data) from the game control device 100. Control for paying out. Further, the payout control device 200 drives the payout motor 91 of the payout unit based on a ball payout request signal from the card unit 600, and performs control for paying out the ball.

The input unit 120 of the gaming microcomputer 111 has a radio wave sensor 62 (a board radio wave sensor) for detecting the emission of radio waves to the gaming machine, a gate switch 34a of the universal figure starting gate 34, and a starting opening 1 in the first starting winning opening 36. The switch 36a, the start opening 2 switch 37a in the second start winning opening 37, the winning opening switch 35a, and the special winning opening switch 39a of the special variation winning device 39 are connected to a high level of 11V and a low level. Is provided with an interface chip (proximity I/F) 121 for inputting a negative logic signal such as 7 V and converting it into a positive logic signal of 0V-5V.

The output of the proximity I/F 121 is supplied to the second input port 123 or the third input port 124 and read by the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. Among the outputs of the proximity I/F 121, the detection signals of the gate switch 34a, the starting opening 1 switch 36a, the starting opening 2 switch 37a, the winning opening switch 35a, and the special winning opening switch 39a are input to the third input port 124. ..

Further, among the outputs of the proximity I/F 121, the detection signal of the radio wave sensor 62 and the abnormality detection signal output when the abnormality of the sensor or the switch is detected are input to the second input port 123.

Further, in the second input port 123, a detection signal from a magnetic sensor switch 61 for fraud detection provided on the front frame 12 of the gaming machine 10 or the like, a glass frame open detection provided on the glass frame 15 or the like of the gaming machine 10 or the like. Signals are input from the switch 63, the front frame open detection switch 64 (main frame open detection switch) provided on the front frame 12 (main frame) and the like. Note that a vibration sensor switch for detecting vibration may be provided in the game machine and the detection signal may be input to the second input port 123.

Further, the second input port 123 (input port 3) takes in the setting key switch signal from the setting key switch 93 and the set value change switch signal from the set value change switch 102, and plays a game microcomputer via the data bus 140. Supply to 111.

Further, among the outputs of the proximity I/F 121, the output to the third input port 124 is also supplied from the game control device 100 to the test shot test device (not shown) via the relay board 70. Further, the detection signals of the starting port 1 switch 36a and the starting port 2 switch 37a among the outputs of the proximity I/F 121 are configured to be input to the gaming microcomputer 111 in addition to the third input port 124.

As described above, the proximity I/F 121 has a signal level conversion function. In order to enable such a level conversion function, the proximity I/F 121 is supplied with a voltage of 12V from the power supply device 400 in addition to the voltage of 5V required for normal IC operation. Has become.

The data held by the third input port 124 is read by the gaming microcomputer 111 decoding the address assigned to the third input port 124 to assert the enable signal CE2 (change to a valid level). be able to. The same applies to the second input port 123 and the first input port 122 described later.

Further, to the input unit 120, a frame radio wave incorrect signal output from the payout control device 200, a payout busy signal, a status signal indicating a payout abnormality, a shoot ball out switch signal indicating a shortage of game balls before payout, and an overflow are shown. First, the overflow switch signal, the touch switch signal based on the input of the touch switch provided on the operation handle 24, and the out ball detection switch signal from the out ball detection switch are fetched and supplied to the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. An input port 122 is provided. The overflow switch signal is a signal output when it is detected that the game balls are stored in the lower plate 23 at a predetermined amount or more (full). The frame radio wave incorrect signal is a signal output based on the detection of radio waves by the frame radio wave sensor provided on the front frame 12 (main body frame), and whether the payout busy signal is in a state in which the payout control device 200 can receive a command. This is a signal indicating whether or not. In the present embodiment, the out ball detection switch (not shown) detects all the game balls that have been shot in the game area and finished the game. The out ball detection switch (not shown) may detect only the game ball passing through the out opening 30b.

Further, the input section 120 is provided with a Schmitt buffer 125 for inputting signals such as a power failure monitoring signal and a reset signal from the power supply device 400 to the gaming microcomputer 111 and the like, and the Schmitt buffer 125 receives these input signals. It has a function to remove noise from. The power failure monitoring signal from the power supply device 400 is once input to the first input port 122, and taken into the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. That is, it is treated as a signal equivalent to the signal from the above-mentioned various switches. This is because the number of terminals provided in the gaming microcomputer 111 for receiving signals from the outside is limited.

On the other hand, the reset signal RST from which the noise is removed by the Schmitt buffer 125 is directly input to the reset terminal provided in the gaming microcomputer 111 and is also supplied to each port of the output unit 130. In addition, the reset signal RST is directly output to the relay board 70 without passing through the output unit 130, thereby turning off the test shot test signal held in the port (not shown) of the relay board 70 for output to the test shot test apparatus. Is configured.

In addition, the reset signal RST may be configured to be output to the test shot test device via the relay board 70. The reset signal RST is not supplied to the ports 122, 123, 124 of the input section 120. The data set to each port of the output unit 130 by the gaming microcomputer 111 immediately before the reset signal RST is input needs to be reset in order to prevent malfunction of the system, but each of the input units 120 immediately before the reset signal RST is input. This is because the data read by the gaming microcomputer 111 from the port is discarded by resetting the gaming microcomputer 111.

The output unit 130 is provided with a Schmitt buffer 132 arranged on a communication path from the gaming microcomputer 111 to the effect control device 300 and a communication path from the gaming microcomputer 111 to the payout control device 200. Data is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 and the payout control device 200 by serial communication. It should be noted that one-way communication is performed so that no signal can be input from the effect control device 300 side to the game control device 100.

Furthermore, the output unit 130 is connected to the data bus 140, and transmits data for informing the test firing test device of an accredited organization (not shown) of the special symbol information of the variable display game and a signal indicating the probability state of a big hit through the relay board 70. The output buffer 133 is configured to be mountable. The buffer 133 is a component that is not mounted on the game control device (main board) of the pachinko gaming machine, which is an actual machine (mass-production product) installed in the game shop. A detection signal of a switch that does not need to be processed, such as a starter switch output from the proximity I/F 121, is supplied to the test-shooting test device via the relay board 70 without passing through the buffer 133.

On the other hand, a detection signal such as the magnetic sensor switch 61 or the radio wave sensor 62 that cannot be supplied to the test-shooting test device as it is is once taken into the game microcomputer 111 and processed into another signal or information, for example, a game machine controls the game. An error signal indicating that it is in the impossible state is supplied from the data bus 140 to the test-injection test apparatus via the buffer 133 and the relay board 70.

The relay board 70 is provided with a port for receiving the signal output from the buffer 133 and supplying it to the test-shooting test apparatus, a connector for relaying and transmitting the signal line of the detection signal of the switch that does not pass through the buffer, and the like. There is. The chip enable signal CE output from the gaming microcomputer 111 is also supplied to the port on the relay board 70, and the signal of the port selectively controlled by the signal CE is supplied to the test-shooting test device.

In addition, the opening/closing data of the solenoid (universal solenoid) 37c connected to the data bus 140 for opening the normal variation winning device 37 and the solenoid (large winning opening solenoid) 39b for opening the special variation winning device 39 are output to the output unit 130. A second output port 134 for outputting is provided.

Also, the output unit 130 has a third output port 135 for outputting ON/OFF data of the segment line to which the anode terminal of the LED is connected according to the content displayed on the collective display device 50, and the collective display device 50. The fourth output port 136 for outputting ON/OFF data of the digit line connected to the cathode terminal of the LED is provided.

Further, the output unit 130 is provided with a fifth output port 137 for outputting information about the gaming machine 10 such as big hit information to the external information terminal 71. The external information terminal 71 is provided with a photo relay and can be connected to, for example, an external device (such as an information collecting terminal or an amusement hall internal management device (hall computer)) installed in a game store, and information related to the gaming machine 10 is externally transmitted. It can be supplied to the device. Further, a firing permission signal is also output from the fifth output port 137 to the payout control device 200 via the Schmitt buffer 132.

Further, the output unit 130 is provided with a sixth output port 141 (probability set value display output port) for outputting information on the set value (probability set value) to the probability set value display device 143. In the present embodiment, the probability setting value display device 143 is a 7-segment type display (LED lamp), but the setting value (probability setting value) information is sent from the sixth output port 141 to the driver (LED driver). It may be output to the probability setting value display device 143 via the.

Further, the output unit 130 receives the opening/closing data signals of the universal electric solenoid 37c and the special winning opening solenoid 39b output from the second output port 134, and generates and outputs a solenoid drive signal, which is a first driver (drive circuit) 138a. , The second driver 138b that outputs an ON/OFF drive signal for the segment line on the current supply side of the collective display device 50 that is output from the third output port 135, and the current of the collective display device 50 that is output from the fourth output port 136. A third driver 138c that outputs an ON/OFF drive signal for the lead-in digit line, and a fourth driver 138d that outputs an external information signal supplied from the fifth output port 137 to an external device such as a management device to the external information terminal 71. It is provided.

The first driver 138a is supplied with 32V DC as a power supply voltage from the power supply device 400 in order to drive a solenoid that operates at 32V. Further, DC 12V is supplied to the second driver 138b that drives the segment lines of the collective display device 50. Since the third driver 138c for driving the digit line is for extracting the digit line according to the display data with a current, the power supply voltage may be either 12V or 5V.

The second driver 138b that outputs 12V causes a current to flow to the anode terminal of the LED through the segment line, and the third driver 138c that outputs the ground potential pulls out the current from the cathode terminal through the segment line, thereby providing a dynamic driving method. The power supply voltage flows to the LEDs selected in sequence and the LEDs are turned on. The fourth driver 138d, which outputs the external information signal to the external information terminal 71, is supplied with DC12V in order to give the external information signal a level of 12V. The buffer 133, the second output port 134, the first driver 138a, etc. may be provided on the output board 130 of the game control device 100, that is, on the relay board 70 side instead of the main board.

Further, the output unit 130 is provided with a photocoupler 139 for transmitting information such as an identification code of each gaming machine and a program to the external inspection device 250. The photocoupler 139 is configured to be able to communicate with each other so that the gaming microcomputer 111 can transmit/receive data to/from the inspection device 250 by serial communication. Since the data transmission/reception is performed using the serial communication terminal of the gaming microcomputer 111 as in a general-purpose microprocessor, ports such as the input ports 122, 123, and 124 are not provided.

Further, the output unit 130 includes a driver 150 that receives the serial data (control data, lighting pattern data, character code (character code), etc.) output from the second output port 134 and drives the status display device 152. It is provided. In the present embodiment, the status display device 152 is composed of a plurality (four) of 7-segment type (8-segment type including dot portions) indicators (LED lamps), and the driver 150 is an LED driver. It is not limited to.

The state display device 152 is provided on the game control device 100 (main board), but may be provided at another place. For example, the status display device 152 is a 4-digit 7-segment type (8-segment type including the dot portion) display, and can display the character ratio, the payout rate, and the number of discharged balls. The state display device 152 is not limited to a device that directly displays the character ratio, the ball output rate, and the number of balls discharged, but may also indirectly display the number of ball discharged, the ball ratio, and the character ratio. Good. That is, the state display device 152 may display information about the character ratio, the ball output rate, and the number of discharged balls.

Here, the number of discharged balls is the number of game balls discharged from the game area 32 (also referred to as the number of out balls), the number of game balls that have passed through the winning opening (the number of winnings) and the game that has passed through the out opening 30b. It is the sum of the number of spheres. The number of discharged balls is basically the same as the number of discharged balls, which is the number of game balls shot from the ball shooting device to the game area 32. The number of discharged balls can be obtained by counting the signal of the out-ball detection switch. In the present embodiment, the winning openings are a general winning opening 35, a starting winning opening 36 (first starting winning opening, starting opening 1), a normal variation winning device 37 (second starting winning opening, starting opening 2), and The special variation winning device 39 (large winning hole) is included. The number of discharged balls is displayed as a countdown, (100-number of discharged balls) is displayed, and only 100 (predetermined number) is counted. In addition, the number of discharged balls may be counted up from “00” to “99”.

The payout rate is a ratio (ratio) of the total number of prize balls to the number of discharged balls (or the number of shot balls), and is calculated by (number of acquired balls/number of discharged balls)×100(%). That is, the payout rate is the number of acquired balls (the total number of prize balls) per 100 discharged balls.

In the present embodiment, the payout rate is easily calculated from the number of balls acquired from when the number of discharged balls becomes 100 to 100 when the number of discharged balls becomes 100. That is, the number of discharged balls is counted up to 100 (predetermined number). Every time the number of discharged balls reaches 100 (predetermined number), the payout rate is updated to the latest winning rate until the number of discharged balls changes from 1 to 100. As a result, if the number of acquired balls (total number of prize balls) is displayed on the state display device 152 as it is, the payout rate is displayed.

For example, the winning character ratio is in the state of big hit among the total number of award balls (total number of award balls) obtained by winning the prize hole in a predetermined period (for example, from power-on of the gaming machine 10 to the present). Is the ratio (%) of the number of prize balls (the number of balls acquired for each character) obtained by winning the special winning opening (=so-called continuous character ratio). In addition, the ratio of the prizes may be the ratio of the number of prize balls (during the big hit state and the small hit state) obtained by winning the big prize hole (=the big prize hole ratio), out of the total number of prize balls. Or, the ratio of the number of prize balls obtained by winning the large prize hole and the ordinary variable prize device 37 (the second starting prize hole) (=the so-called character ratio (general character ratio) that is generally used. )).

[Production control device]
Next, the configuration of the effect control device 300 (sub-board) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a block diagram of an effect control system of the gaming machine 10.

The production control device 300 is for displaying an image on the display device 41 according to a command and data from the main control microcomputer (CPU) 311 including an amusement chip (IC) and the main control microcomputer 311 like the game microcomputer 111. A VDP (Video Display Processor) 312 as a graphic processor for performing the image processing and a sound source LSI 314 for controlling the output of sound for reproducing various melodies and sound effects from the speaker 19.

The main control microcomputer 311 has a program ROM 321, which is a PROM (programmable read only memory) that stores programs executed by the CPU and various data, a RAM 322 that provides a work area, and retains stored contents even when power is not supplied during a power failure. A possible FeRAM 323 and an RTC (Real Time Clock) 338 which is a time counting means for generating information indicating the current date and time (year, month, day, day of the week, etc.) are connected. A RAM for providing a work area is also provided inside the main control microcomputer 311.

A WDT (watchdog timer) circuit 324 is connected to the main control microcomputer 311. The main control microcomputer 311 analyzes the command from the game microcomputer 111, determines the effect contents and instructs the VDP 312 on the contents of the output video, instructs the sound source LSI 314 to give a reproduced sound, lights a decoration lamp, and drives the motor. Performs processing such as drive control of solenoids and control of production time.

The VDP 312 is provided with a RAM 312a for providing a work area and a scaler 312b for enlarging and reducing an image. Further, the VDP 312 has an image ROM 325 in which character images and video data are stored, and an ultra-high-speed VRAM (video RAM) used for expanding and processing image data such as characters read from the image ROM 325. ) 326 is connected.

Although not particularly limited, data is transmitted and received between the main control microcomputer 311 and the VDP 312 in parallel. By transmitting and receiving data in parallel, it is possible to transmit commands and data in a shorter time than in the case of serial transmission.

From the VDP 312 to the main control microcomputer 311, a vertical synchronization signal VSYNC for synchronizing the image of the display device 41 and the lighting of the decorative lamp provided on the glass frame 15 or the game board 30, a synchronization signal for giving a data transmission timing. STS is input. It should be noted that the VDP 312 notifies the main control microcomputer 311 that it is in a waiting state for receiving the interrupt signals INT0 to INT and the command or data from the main control microcomputer 311 in order to notify the processing status such as the completion of drawing in the VRAM. A wait signal WAIT and the like are also input.

The effect control device 300 is provided with a signal conversion circuit 313 that generates a video signal to be transmitted to the display device 41 by the LVDS (small amplitude signal transmission) method. Video data, a horizontal synchronization signal HSYNC, and a vertical synchronization signal VSYNC are input from the VDP 312 to the signal conversion circuit 313, and the image generated by the VDP 312 is sent to the display device 41 via the signal conversion circuit 313. Is displayed.

A sound ROM 327 storing voice data is connected to the sound source LSI 314. The main control microcomputer 311 and the tone generator LSI 314 are connected via an address/data bus 340. An interrupt signal INT is input from the sound source LSI 314 to the main control microcomputer 311. The effect control device 300 is provided with an amplifier circuit 337 including an audio power amplifier for driving the upper speaker 19a provided on the glass frame 15 and the lower speaker 19b provided on the front frame 12, and is generated by the sound source LSI 314. The generated sound is output from the upper speaker 19a and the lower speaker 19b via the amplifier circuit 337.

Further, the effect control device 300 is provided with an interface chip (command I/F) 331 that receives a command transmitted from the game control device 100. Through the command I/F331, the decoration special figure reservation number command, the decoration special figure command, the fluctuation command, the stop information command and the like transmitted from the game control apparatus 100 to the effect control apparatus 300, the effect control command signal (effect command) To receive as. Since the game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100 operates at DC5V and the main control microcomputer 311 of the effect control device 300 operates at DC3.3V, the command I/F 331 is provided with a signal level conversion function. There is.

In addition, in the effect control device 300, the board decoration LED control circuit 332 for driving and controlling the board decoration device 46 having the LED (light emitting diode) provided in the game board 30 (including the center case 40) and the glass frame 15 are provided. A frame decoration LED control circuit 333 for driving and controlling a frame decoration device (for example, the frame decoration device 18 or the like) having an LED (light emitting diode) provided, a board effect provided on the game board 30 (including the center case 40). A board effect movable body control circuit 334 is provided to drive and control the device 44 (for example, a movable accessory that enhances effect effects in cooperation with effect display on the display device 41). The board decoration device 46 may include the lamp display device 80 described above.

These control circuits 332 to 334 that drive and control the lamps, motors, solenoids, etc. are connected to the main control microcomputer 311 via the address/data bus 340. A frame effect movable body control circuit for driving and controlling a frame effect device such as a motor provided in the glass frame 15 may be provided.

Further, in the effect control device 300, the effect button switch 25a built in the effect button 25 provided on the glass frame 15, the touch panel 25b provided on the surface of the effect button 25, and the motor in the board effect device 44. A function of detecting the on/off state of the performance accessory switch 47 (production motor switch) for detecting the initial position and the like and inputting a detection signal to the main control microcomputer 311, and a volume control switch provided in the production control device 300. A switch input circuit 336 for detecting the state of 335 and inputting a detection signal to the main control microcomputer 311 is provided.

The normal power supply unit 410 of the power supply device 400 supplies a direct-current voltage of a desired level to the effect control device 300 having the above-described configuration and electronic components controlled by the same, and thus drives a motor and a solenoid. DC32V, a display device 41 including a liquid crystal panel, DC12V for driving a motor and an LED, DC5V serving as a power supply voltage for the command I/F 331, and a voltage of DC15V for driving a motor, an LED and a speaker. Is configured to.

Furthermore, when an LSI that operates at a low voltage such as 3.3V or 1.2V is used as the main control microcomputer 311, DC- for generating DC3.3V or DC1.2V based on DC5V is used. A DC converter is provided in effect control device 300. The DC-DC converter may be provided in the normal power supply unit 410.

The reset signal generated by the control signal generation unit 430 of the power supply device 400 is supplied to the main control microcomputer 311 and puts the device in the reset state. In addition, in the form of being output from the main control microcomputer 311, the VDP 312 (VDPRESET signal), the sound source LSI 314, the amplifier circuit 337 (SNDRRESET signal) that drives the speaker, and the control circuits 332 to 334 (IORESET that drive and control the lamp and the motor). Signal) to put them in a reset state. In addition, the production control device 300 is connected to a cooling FAN 45 that cools each part of the gaming machine 10, and the cooling fan 45 is driven when the production control device 300 is powered on.

Next, game control performed in these control circuits will be described. In the CPU 111a of the game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100, based on the input of the detection signal of the game ball from the gate switch 34a provided in the universal figure starting gate 34, the random number for hit determination of the universal figure is extracted and the ROM 111b. Is compared with the judgment value stored in, and it is judged whether or not the general figure variation display game is hit.

Then, after the identification pattern is variably displayed for a predetermined time on the public figure display, the general figure variability display game is displayed in which it is stopped. When the result of the universal figure variation display game is a hit, a special result mode is displayed on the universal figure indicator, the universal electric solenoid 37c is operated, and the movable member 37b of the regular variation winning device 37 is operated for a predetermined time (for example, (0.3 seconds) The opening control is performed as described above. That is, the game control device 100 serves as conversion control execution means for performing conversion control of the conversion member (movable member 37b). When the result of the general-picture variation display game is off, control is performed to display the off-result mode on the general-picture display.

In addition, based on the input of the detection signal of the game ball from the starting opening 1 switch 36a provided in the starting winning opening 36, the starting winning (starting memory) is stored, and based on the starting memory, the big hit determination of the special figure 1 variable display game is performed. The random number for use is extracted and compared with the determination value stored in the ROM 111b to determine whether or not the special figure 1 variable display game is missed.

In addition, the starting memory is stored based on the input of the detection signal of the game ball from the starting opening 2 switch 37a provided in the normal variation winning device 37, and based on the starting memory, the random number value for jackpot determination of the special figure 2 variation display game. Is extracted and compared with the determination value stored in the ROM 111b to determine whether or not the special figure 2 variable display game has missed.

Then, the CPU 111a of the game control device 100 outputs to the effect control device 300 a control signal (effect control command) including the determination result of the special figure 1 variable display game or the special figure 2 variable display game. Then, after the identification symbol is variably displayed for a predetermined time on the special figure 1 display 51 or the special figure 2 display 52, the special figure variation display game that is stopped and displayed is displayed. That is, the game control device 100 controls the progress of the variable display game based on the winning of the game ball flowing down the game region 32 into the starting winning region (first starting winning port 36, normal variable winning device 37). Make up.

Further, in the effect control device 300, based on the control signal from the game control device 100, the display device 41 displays the decorative special figure variation display game corresponding to the special figure variation display game. Furthermore, in the effect control device 300, based on the control signal from the game control device 100, setting of effect state, output of sounds from the speakers 19a and 19b, processing for controlling light emission of various LEDs, and the like are performed. That is, the effect control device 300 constitutes an effect control means for controlling the effect related to the game (variable display game, etc.).

Then, the CPU 111a of the game control device 100 displays the special result mode on the special figure 1 display 51 or the special figure 2 display 52 and generates the special game state when the result of the special figure variation display game is a hit. Let In the process of generating the special game state, for example, the CPU 111a opens the opening/closing door 39c of the special variation winning device 39 by the special winning opening solenoid 39b, and performs control so that the game ball can flow into the special winning opening. ..

Either a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are won in the special winning opening, or a predetermined openable time (for example, 27 seconds or 0.05 seconds) elapses from the opening of the special winning opening. One round (R) is to open the special winning opening until such a condition is achieved, and this is repeated a predetermined number of times (for example, 15 times, 11 times or 2 times) (repetition) control (cycle game) I do. That is, the game control device 100 serves as a special winning opening opening/closing control unit that controls the opening and closing of the special winning opening when the stop result appearance becomes the special result appearance. Further, when the result of the special figure variation display game is off, control is performed to display the deviation result mode on the special figure 1 display device 51 and the special figure 2 display device 52.

Further, the game control device 100 can generate a high probability state as a game state after the special game state ends based on the result mode of the special figure variation display game. The high probability state (probability change state) is a state in which the probability of a hit result in the special figure variation display game is higher than the normal probability state. In addition, even if a high probability state is reached based on the result mode of the special figure variable display game, that is, the special figure 1 variable display game or the special figure 2 variable display game, Both are in high probability states.

Further, the game control device 100 can generate a time saving state (specific gaming state) as a gaming state after the special gaming state ends, based on the result mode of the special figure variation display game. In the time saving state, control is performed such that the universal figure variation display game and the normal variation winning device 37 are set to the time saving operation state, and the normal variation winning device 37 per unit time is longer than that in the case where the normal variation winning device 37 is in the normal operation state. Since the control is performed so that the opening time of is substantially increased, it becomes the universal communication support state. It should be noted that even in the high probability state (normal probability variation state) excluding the latent probability variation state, duplication support is executed by overlapping and shortening the state.

For example, in the time saving state, it is possible to perform a time-shortening variation in which the execution time (general figure variation time) of the above-mentioned universal figure variation display game is set to the second variation display time shorter than the normal first variation display time (for example, (10000 msec is 1000 msec). In the time saving state, the execution time of the special figure variation display game (special figure variation time) is shortened as compared with the normal time, and the time reduction variation of the special figure variation display game is also executed.

In addition, in the time saving state, it is possible to control the universal figure stop time for displaying the result of the universal figure variation display game to be the second stop time (for example, 704 msec) shorter than the first stop time (for example, 1604 msec). Is.

Further, in the time saving state, when the universal figure variation display game is a hit result and the regular variation winning device 37 is opened, the opening time (normal communication opening time) is the first opening time in the normal state (for example, 100 msec). It is possible to control so that the second opening time is longer than that (for example, 1352 msec).

Further, in the time saving state, the number of times the normal variation winning device 37 is opened (the number of ordinary electric open times) is larger than the first number of times of opening (for example, two times) with respect to one hit result of the universal figure variation display game. It is possible to set the second opening number (for example, 4 times). Further, in the time-saving state, it is possible to make the probability of being a hit result of the universal figure fluctuation display game (general figure probability) higher than the ordinary probability (low probability) in the normal operation state.

In the time saving state, the general variation winning device 37 is opened by changing any one or more of the universal figure variation time, the universal figure stop time, the number of universal communication open, the universal communication open time, and the universal figure probability. Make the conversion time longer than usual. As a result, in the time saving state, winning in the normal variation winning device 37 is easier than in the normal gaming state, and the number of executions of the special figure variation display game per unit time can be increased more than in the normal gaming state. It is also possible to set a plurality of types of time saving states that are different from each other. Further, the movable member 37b may be set not to be opened in the normal operation state (universal figure probability is 0). Further, in the case of a win, either the first opening mode or the second opening mode may be selected. In this case, the selection probabilities of the first opening mode and the second opening mode may be different. Further, the high-probability state and the time-saving state can occur independently of each other, both of them can occur at the same time, or only one of them can occur.

[Control of game control device]
Hereinafter, control of a gaming machine that performs such a game will be described. First, the control executed by the gaming microcomputer (gaming microcomputer) 111 of the gaming control device 100 will be described. The control process by the gaming microcomputer 111 mainly includes a main process shown in FIGS. 5A and 5B and a timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 9 which is performed in a predetermined time cycle (for example, 4 msec).

[Main processing (game control device)]
First, the main process will be described. 5A and 5B are flowcharts showing a procedure of main processing by the game control device 100. The main process is started when the power is turned on. In the flow chart of the process executed by the game control device 100, the code (number) of the step is expressed as "A***".

As shown in FIG. 5A, when starting the main process, the game control device 100 first executes a process of prohibiting interruption (A1001). Further, a stack pointer setting process for setting the stack pointer which is the top address of the area for saving the value of the register or the like when an interrupt occurs (A1002).

Then, register bank 0 is designated as the register bank to be used (A1003), and the upper address of the RAM start address is set in a predetermined register (A1004). For example, when the RAM address is in the range of 0000h to 01FFh, 00h is set as the upper address.

Next, the game control device 100 outputs a firing prohibition signal and sets the firing permission signal to a prohibited state (A1005). The firing permission signal is set to a prohibited state when at least one of the game control device 100 and the payout control device 200 outputs a firing prohibition signal, and the firing of the game ball is prohibited. After that, the game control device 100 reads the state of the input port 3 (second input port 123) (A1006). As a result, signals from the setting key switch 93, the setting value changing switch 102, the glass frame opening detection switch 63, and the front frame opening detection switch 64 (main body frame opening detection switch) can be read.

Further, the game control device 100 sets a power supply delay timer (A1007). By setting a predetermined initial value in the power supply delay timer, a program of sub-control means (for example, payout control device 200 or effect control device 300) that performs various controls according to instructions from the game control device 100 that is the main control means. A waiting time (for example, 3 seconds) for waiting for the normal startup is set. As a result, when the power is turned on, the command is sent to the slave control device before the game control device 100 starts up and the slave control devices (for example, the payout control device 200 and the effect control device 300) start up, and the slave control device. Can avoid dropping commands. That is, the game control device 100 delays the activation of the main control means (the game control device 100) and waits for the activation of the slave control devices (the payout control device 200, the effect control device 300, etc.) when the power is turned on. It forms a standby means for setting the standby time.

In addition, the power supply delay timer measures the time using a storage area (RAM area or register or the like that is not the target of validity determination) that is not the target of RAM validity determination (checksum calculation). As a result, when calculating check data such as a checksum of the RAM area, it is not necessary to exclude a part of the RAM area for calculation, and thus it is possible to prevent the control at power-on from becoming complicated.

Note that the setting key switch signal from the setting key switch 93 and the set value change switch signal from the set value change switch 102 are input to the second input port 123 (input port 3), and the standby time By reading the state of the second input port 123 before the start of, the operation of the setting key switch 93 or the setting value change switch 102 can be reliably detected. That is, if the states of the setting key switch 93 and the setting value changing switch 102 are read after the waiting time has elapsed, the setting key switch 93 and the setting value changing switch 102 are operated and the power is turned on after waiting for the waiting time. It is necessary to continue to operate the setting key switch 93 and the setting value change switch 102 from the time until the waiting time elapses. However, by reading the state before the start of the standby time, it becomes possible to detect it by performing the operation immediately after the power is turned on without performing such a troublesome operation. It is possible to prevent a situation in which the operation of the setting value change switch 102 cannot be accepted.

When the power supply delay timer is set (A1007), the game control device 100 executes a process of measuring a standby time and a process of monitoring occurrence of a power failure during the standby time (A1008 to A1012).

When the power failure monitoring process is started, the game control device 100 first sets the number of times (for example, two times) to check by checking the power failure monitoring signal input from the power supply device 400 via the port and the data bus ( A1008), it is determined whether the power failure monitoring signal is on (A1009).

When the power failure monitoring signal is on (the result of A1009 is “Y”), the game control device 100 determines whether or not the power failure monitoring signal remains on for the number of checks set in the process of step A1008. The determination is made (A1010). Then, when the power failure monitoring signal is not kept on for the number of checks (the result of A1010 is “N”), the process returns to step A1009 for determining whether the power failure monitoring signal is on.

Further, the game control device 100, when the ON state of the power failure monitoring signal for the number of checks continues (the result of A1010 is “Y”), that is, when it is determined that a power failure has occurred, the gaming machine. Wait until the power is cut off. In this way, by determining that a power failure has occurred when the power failure monitoring signal is continuously received for a predetermined period, it is possible to prevent false detection of power failure due to noise, etc. can do.

That is, the game control device 100 serves as a power failure monitoring means for monitoring occurrence of power failure in a predetermined standby time. As a result, it becomes possible to deal with a power failure that has occurred during the period in which the activation of the game control device 100, which is the main control means, is delayed, and it is possible to appropriately deal with a defect at the time of turning on the power. Note that access to the RAM is not permitted until the end of the standby time, and the stored contents at the time of the previous power shutdown have been retained, so backup processing will be performed when a power failure occurs here. No need. Therefore, even if a power failure occurs during the standby time, it is not necessary to back up the RAM, and the control load can be reduced.

On the other hand, when the power failure monitoring signal is not on (result of A1009 is "N"), that is, when the power failure has not occurred, the game control device 100 updates the power-on delay timer by -1 (A1011), It is determined whether the value of the timer is 0 (A1012). When the value of the timer is not 0 (result of A1012 is “N”), that is, when the standby time has not ended, the process returns to the process of setting the number of checks of the power failure monitoring signal in step A1008.

Further, when the value of the timer is 0 (the result of A1012 is “Y”), that is, when the waiting time is over, the game control device 100 can read/write RWM (read/write) such as RAM or EEPROM. Access to the memory is permitted (A1013), and off data is output to all output ports (set to a state where there is no output) (A1014).

Next, the game control device 100 sets a serial port (a port mounted in advance in the game microcomputer 111, which is used for communication with the effect control device 300 and the payout control device 200 in this embodiment) (A1015). ). Further, the driver 150 that drives the state display device 152 is initialized (A1016).

Here, the game control device 100 writes a command including control data corresponding to the contents of the initial setting in the transmission buffer of the second output port 134 (serial communication circuit) and transmits it to the driver 150. For example, the game control device 100 sets the duty ratio in the initial setting. The duty ratio corresponds to the brightness of each LED of the status display device 152. The control data corresponding to the duty ratio is used by the duty setting unit of the driver 150 (LED driver). The duty ratio of the driver 150 may be made smaller than usual in order to darken each LED with power saving. Next, the game control device 100 sets the number of used digits of the state display device 152 in the initial setting. In this embodiment, the number of used digits is four. The control data corresponding to the number of used digits is used by the digit number setting unit of the driver 150 (LED driver).

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the value of the power failure inspection area 1 in the RWM is normal power failure inspection area check data (A1017). If it is normal (result of A1017 is “Y”), it is determined whether the value of the power failure inspection area 2 in the RWM is normal power failure inspection area check data (A1018).

Furthermore, if the value of the power failure inspection area 2 is normal (the result of A1018 is “Y”), the game control device 100 calculates a checksum of a predetermined area (for example, a game control work area) in the RWM. Calculation processing is executed (A1019), and it is determined whether the calculated checksum and the checksum at the time of power off match (A1020). If the checksums match (result of A1020 is “Y”), the RAM 111c is normal and the RAM clear start address 2 is set (A1021).

FIG. 5C is a diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 111c of the gaming microcomputer 111. As shown in FIG. 5C, the RAM clear start address 2 is set so as to remove the probability setting value area from the RAM area to be cleared. With the RAM clear start address 2, the RAM area to be cleared becomes the clear area #2 in FIG. 5C. The clear area #2 includes a random number area, a control information area, and a game control stack area. The random number area includes an initial value random number area that stores various initial value random numbers and a variation pattern random number area that stores variation pattern random numbers. The control information area is an area from the power failure inspection area 1 to the checksum area, and includes the power failure inspection area 1, the power failure inspection area 2, the checksum area, and the like. The random number area may be excluded from the clear area #2. The clear area #2 includes a status display work area for storing information displayed on the status display device 152 such as a character ratio, and a status display stack area for processing information displayed on the status display device 152. I can't.

In FIG. 5C, an unused area may be provided between the game control work area including the probability setting value area, the random number area, and the control information area and the game control stack area. Further, an unused area may be provided between the status display work area and the status display stack area. Further, the stack area for status display may be arranged at the end of the address of the RAM 111c, and the unused area (the bottom of FIG. 5C) at the end of FIG. 5C may be eliminated.

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the probability setting is being changed (during setting variable state, setting changing state) (A1022). When the probability setting is being changed (the result of A1022 is “Y”), the game control device 100 executes the process of changing the probability setting in steps A1036-A1041. When the probability setting value changing flag (A1038) is set, it can be determined that the probability setting value is changing.

When the probability setting is not being changed (the result of A1022 is “N”), the game control device 100 determines whether or not the front frame 12 (main frame) is in the open state (A1023). When the signal from the front frame open detection switch 64 (main frame open detection switch) is input, it can be determined that the front frame 12 (main frame) is in the open state. In step A1023, it may be determined whether the glass frame 15 is open instead of the front frame 12, or whether both the front frame 12 and the glass frame 15 are open. Good. When the signal from the glass frame open detection switch 63 is input, it can be determined that the glass frame 15 is in the open state.

When the front frame 12 (main frame) is in the open state (result of A1023 is “Y”), the game control device 100 determines whether or not the setting key switch 93 is on (A1024). When the setting key switch 93 is on (result of A1024 is “Y”), the setting (setting value) can be changed. Therefore, the RAM initial state in the setting changing state of steps A1036-A1041 is set. Processing (RAM clear processing) and processing during setting change are executed.

The game control device 100, when the front frame 12 (main body frame) is not open (closed) (result of A1023 is “N”), or when the setting key switch 93 is off (result of A1024 is “N”), and it is determined whether or not the set value change switch 102 is turned on (A1025). When the setting value change switch 102 is not turned on (result of A1025 is “N”), the normal power-on process (power recovery) of steps A1031-A1035 is executed.

On the other hand, when the setting value change switch 102 is turned on (result of A1025 is “Y”), the game control device 100 executes the process of RAM initialization (RAM clear) in steps A1042-A1045. Since the setting key switch 93 is turned off by operating (pressing) the setting value changing switch 102 when the power is turned on, the setting value changing switch 102 is the RAM initialization switch ( It is used as a RAM clear switch). It should be noted that the setting value change switch 102 is not actually turned on when the front frame 12 is closed (result of A1023 is “N”). The setting value change switch 102 that can also function as an initialization switch constitutes an initialization operation unit that can be operated from the outside, and the game control device 100 is stored in the RAM based on the operation of the initialization operation unit. It is an initialization means for initializing data.

Further, when the game control device 100 determines that the check data in the power failure inspection area is not normal data (the result of A1017 is “N” or the result of A1018 is “N”), the checksums do not match. (The result of A1020 is “N”), there is an abnormality in the RAM 111c, and the process proceeds to the processing for dealing with the RAM abnormality after step A1026. First, the RAM clear start address 1 is set (A1026). As shown in FIG. 5C, since the RAM clear start address 1 is the start address of the game control work area, the probability setting value area is also included in the clear target RAM area. The RAM area to be cleared is set to the clear area #1 in FIG. 5C by the RAM clear start address 1. The clear area #1 includes a game control work area (including a probability setting value area, a random number area, and a control information area), and a game control stack area. The clear area #1 does not include a status display work area for storing information displayed on the status display device 152 and a status display stack area for processing information displayed on the status display device 152.

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the front frame 12 (main body frame) is in an open state (A1027). When the signal from the front frame open detection switch 64 (main frame open detection switch) is input, it can be determined that the front frame 12 is in the open state.

When the front frame 12 is in the open state (result of A1027 is “Y”), the game control device 100 determines whether or not the setting key switch 93 is on (A1028). When the setting key switch 93 is on (result of A1028 is “Y”), the setting variable state allows the setting value to be changed. Therefore, the RAM initialization process in the setting variable state of steps A1036-A1041 ( RAM clear processing) and processing during setting change are executed. The RAM area to be cleared in the RAM initialization process in this case is the clear area #1 in FIG. 5C. Therefore, the RAM abnormality can be resolved.

When the front frame 12 (main body frame) is not in the open state (closed state) (result of A1027 is “N”) or the setting key switch 93 is off, the game control device 100 (result of A1028 is “N”), and transmits a command of a setting change instruction for urging the player to change the setting to the effect control device 300 (effect control board) (A1029). The effect control device 300 that has received the command to change the setting displays a setting change instruction display that prompts the player to change the setting on the display device 41. By the setting change instruction display, the player tries to change the setting and the setting key switch 93 is turned on (the result of A1028 is “Y”), and the RAM abnormality processing is solved by the RAM clear processing (A1036) at the time of the setting change. it can.

After that, the game control device 100 executes a process of prohibiting access to the RWM (A1030), and waits until the power of the game machine is cut off.

Next, the normal processing when the power is turned on (when the power is restored) in steps A1031-A1035 will be described.

The game control device 100 first saves the initial value at the time of power failure recovery in the area to be initialized (A1031). The area to be initialized is the clear area #2 (random number area, control information area, game control stack area) in FIG. 5C. Here, the control information area includes a power failure inspection area, a checksum area, and an area related to error fraud monitoring. In addition, the busy signal status area that stores the state of the payout busy signal, which is a signal indicating whether or not the payout control device 200 can accept the command, is also cleared, indicating that the state of the payout busy signal is not fixed. Indefinite. After that, the game control device 100 checks the area for storing the game state in the RWM and determines whether or not the game state is the high probability state (A1032).

Here, when the game state is not the high-probability state (result of A1032 is “N”), the game control device 100 skips the processes of step A1033 and step A1034, and shifts to the process of step A1035. When the gaming state is the high-probability state (the result of A1032 is “Y”), the ON information is saved in the high-probability notification flag area (A1033), for example, the high-probability notification LED provided on the collective display device 50. The ON (lighting) data of the (third gaming state display unit 59, error display) is saved in the segment area (A1034). Then, a command at the time of power failure recovery corresponding to the processing number prepared for rationally executing the special figure game process described later is transmitted to the effect control device 300 (effect control board) (A1035), and step A1046 is executed. Move to processing.

Next, the RAM initialization processing (RAM clear processing) in the setting variable state and the processing during the setting change of steps A1036-A1041 will be described.

The game control device 100 first clears the RAM area to be cleared to 0 (A1036). The RAM area to be cleared is the clear area #2 in FIG. 5C because the RAM clear start address 2 is set when the RAM 111c is normal (result of A1020 is “Y”). When the RAM 111c is abnormal (result of A1020 is “N”), the RAM clear start address 1 is set, and therefore the clear area #1 in FIG. 5C is set. That is, the probability setting value area is not cleared when the RAM is normal, but the probability setting value area is also cleared when the RAM is abnormal.

Next, the game control device 100 saves the initial value at the time of RAM initialization in the area to be initialized (A1037). At this point, it is premised that the front frame 12 is in an open state, the initial value of the security signal control timer (described later) for outputting a security signal is saved, and the front frame 12 (main frame) is opened. It will be possible to output what was done to an external device (such as a hall computer). If the probability setting value area is cleared when the RAM is abnormal, a default value (for example, setting value 1) may be saved as an initial value in the probability setting value area.

Then, the game control device 100 sets a probability setting value changing flag indicating that the setting is changeable (that is, the setting is being changed) so that the setting can be changed (A1038). Then, the probability setting value display data corresponding to the probability setting value is saved in the probability setting value display data area as initial data when the probability setting value is changed (A1039), the value in the probability setting value area is loaded, and the probability setting value is set. It is saved in the work probability setting value area as initial data at the time of change (A1040). Then, the command of changing the probability setting indicating that the setting is in the variable state (changing the probability setting) is transmitted to the effect control device 300 (effect control board) (A1041), and the process proceeds to step A1046. The effect control device 300 can recognize that it is in the setting variable state (probability setting is being changed) by the command that is changing the probability setting.

Next, the processing of the RAM initialization (RAM clear) by the RAM initialization switch (RAM clear switch, setting value change switch 102) in steps A1042-A1045 will be described.

The game control device 100 first sets the RAM clear start address 2 (A1042) and clears the RAM area to be cleared to 0 (A1043). Since the clear start address 2 is set, the RAM area RAM to be cleared is the clear area #2 in FIG. 5C. Therefore, the probability setting value area is not cleared in the RAM initialization (RAM clear) process by operating the RAM initialization switch (setting value change switch 102).

Next, the game control device 100 saves the initial value at the time of RAM initialization in the area to be initialized (A1044). Here, the area to be initialized is, for example, a customer waiting demonstration area and an area related to the setting of the effect mode. Then, the command for RAM initialization is transmitted to the effect control device 300 (effect control board) (A1045), and the process proceeds to step A1046.

The command for power failure recovery transmitted in the process of step A1035 and the command for RAM initialization transmitted in the process of step A1045 include a model designation command indicating the type of gaming machine, and suspension of special figures 1 and 2 A decoration special figure 1 reserved number command indicating a number, a decoration special figure 2 reserved number command, and a probability information command indicating a state of probability are included. Also, depending on the state when the power is turned off or turned on, a recovery screen command is displayed when the special figure variation display game is running when the power is turned off, and a customer wait demo command when the customer is waiting when the power is turned off. , A power-on command indicating that the power is turned on is included. Further, depending on the model, an effect mode information command indicating the state of the effect mode, an effect number information command, and a high probability number information command indicating the number of remaining games in the high probability state are included. The RAM initialization command also includes a RAM initialization command (RAM clear command). Upon receiving the RAM initialization command (RAM clear command), the production control device 300 displays a customer waiting demo on the display device 41, and initializes the RAM with the sound of the LED and the speaker of the panel decoration device 46 (RAM). Clear) notification is performed for 30 seconds.

Further, the command for power failure recovery and the command for RAM initialization include a set value information command (probability set value information command) indicating set value information that is information on the set value (probability set value) of the gaming machine 10. Be done. The game control device 100 need only send the setting value information command to the effect control device 300 only once when the power is restored (turned on), and thereafter, the effect control device 300 refers to the setting value information stored by itself. You can control production.

After the processing of steps A1035, A1041, and A1045, the game control device 100 includes a CTC (Counter/Timer Circuit) circuit that generates a timer interrupt signal and a random number update trigger signal (CTC) in the game microcomputer 111 (clock generator). It is activated (A1046). The CTC circuit is provided in the clock generator in the gaming microcomputer 111. The clock generator divides the oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113 and a timer interrupt signal of a predetermined cycle (for example, 4 milliseconds) to the CPU 111a based on the divided signal. And a CTC circuit that generates a signal CTC that gives a trigger for updating a random number to be supplied to the random number generation circuit.

After executing the CTC activation process in step A1046, the game control device 100 activates and sets the random number generation circuit (A1047). Specifically, the CPU 111a sets a code (designated value) for activating the random number generation circuit in a predetermined register (CTC update permission register) in the random number generation circuit. Also, the bit transposed pattern of the hard random number (here, the big hit random number) generated by the hardware of the random number generation circuit is set.

A bit transposition pattern is a method of exchanging the bit arrangement of the extracted random numbers (arrangement before bit transposition in the upper row) in a predetermined order and storing as a different bit arrangement (arrangement after bit transposition in the lower row). Is a pattern that determines.

In the present embodiment, by exchanging the bits of the random number according to the bit transposed pattern, the regularity of the random number can be broken and the confidentiality of the random number can be improved. The bit transposition pattern may be a fixed single pattern or may be selected from a plurality of patterns prepared in advance. Further, the user may set it arbitrarily.

After that, the game control device 100 extracts the value of a predetermined register (soft random number registers 1 to n) in the random number generation circuit when the power is turned on, and various corresponding initial value random numbers (random numbers for determining the jackpot symbol (the jackpot symbol) Random number 1, big hit symbol random number 2), small number to determine small hit symbol (small hit symbol random number), random number to determine hit of ordinary figure (random number per hit), random number to determine hit symbol of ordinary figure (random number to hit symbol) Etc.) is saved in a predetermined area of the RWM as an initial value (start value) (A1048), and interruption is permitted (A1049). Since the random number generation circuit in the CPU 111a used in the present embodiment is configured so that the initial value of the soft random number register changes each time the power is turned on, this value is used as the initial value (start value) of various initial value random numbers. By doing so, it is possible to break the regularity of the random numbers generated by the software and make it difficult for the player to obtain an illegal random number.

Next, the game control device 100 executes an initial value random number updating process for updating the values of various initial value random numbers and breaking the regularity of the random numbers (A1050). Although not particularly limited, in the present embodiment, the big hit random number, the big hit pattern random number, and the hit random number are configured to be generated using the random numbers generated in the random number generation circuit. However, the big hit random number is a so-called "high-speed counter" that is updated based on a clock having a speed equal to or higher than the operation clock of the CPU. It is a "low-speed counter" that is updated based on the CTC output (CTC (CTC0) different from CTC (CTC0) of timer interrupt processing) that becomes

In addition, in the big hit symbol random number and the hit symbol random number, a so-called "initial value changing method" is adopted in which the start value is changed each time the random number makes a round by using each initial value random number (generated by software). Each of the random numbers may be updated by a counter method by +1 or 1, or may be a random method update in which all values within the range appear in a scattered manner without duplication until one cycle. That is, the big hit random number is a random number that is updated only by hardware, and the big hit design random number and the hit random number are random numbers that are updated by hardware and software.

After the initial value random number updating process of step A1050, the game control device 100 sets the number of times to check by checking the power failure monitoring signal input from the power supply device 400 through the port and the data bus (A1051), and power failure monitoring. It is determined whether the signal is on (A1052). When the power failure monitoring signal is not on (result of A1052 is “N”), the process returns to the initial value random number updating process of step A1050. That is, when the power failure has not occurred, the initial value random number update processing and the power failure monitoring signal check (loop processing) are repeated. By permitting the interrupt (A1049) before the initial value random number updating process (A1050), when the timer interrupt occurs during the initial value random number updating process, the interrupt process is preferentially executed, and the timer interrupt is initialized. It is possible to prevent the interrupt processing from being stressed by making the value random number update processing wait. Note that during the setting change (during the setting variable state), the processes of steps A1046, A1047, A1048, and A1050 related to the initial value random number update need not be executed.

In addition to the main process, the initial value random number updating process of step A1050 includes a method of performing the initial value random number updating process also in the timer interrupt process. When such a method is adopted, both of the initial value random number updating processes are performed. In order to prevent the update process from being executed, when the initial value random number update process is performed in the main process, it is necessary to disable the interrupt and then update and release the interrupt. On the other hand, if the initial value random number updating process in the timer interrupt process is not performed as in the present embodiment and only in the main process, there is no problem even if the interrupt is released before the initial value random number updating process. There is an advantage that it simplifies the main process.

When the power failure monitoring signal is on (result of A1052 is “Y”), the game control device 100 determines whether or not the power failure monitoring signal is kept on for the number of checks set in the process of step A1051. The determination is made (A1053). If the power failure monitoring signal is not kept on for the number of checks (result of A1053 is “N”), the process returns to step A1052 to determine whether the power failure monitoring signal is on.

Further, the game control device 100 once interrupts when the power failure monitoring signal is kept on for the number of checks (the result of A1053 is “Y”), that is, when it is determined that a power failure has occurred. Is prohibited (A1054), and off data is output to all output ports (A1055).

After that, the game control device 100 saves the power failure inspection area check data 1 in the power failure inspection area 1 (A1056) and saves the power failure inspection area check data 2 in the power failure inspection area 2 (A1057). Further, a checksum calculation process for calculating the checksum at the time of power-off of the RWM is executed (A1058), and the calculated checksum is saved (A1059). Finally, a process of prohibiting access to the RWM is executed (A1060), and the game machine stands by until the power is cut off.

In this way, by saving the check data in the power failure inspection area and calculating the checksum at the time of power shutdown, it is possible to check whether the information stored in the RWM before the power shutdown was correctly backed up. It can be judged at the time of re-input.

From the above, the main control means (game control device 100) that controls the game in general, and the sub-control means (payout control device 200, effect control device 300, etc.) that performs various controls according to instructions from the main control means. ), and the main control means delays the start of the main control means when the power is turned on and sets a predetermined standby time for waiting the start of the slave control device (game control device 100) and a power failure monitoring means (game control device 100) for monitoring occurrence of power failure during the predetermined standby time.

In addition, a power supply device 400 that supplies power to various devices is provided, and the power supply device 400 is configured to output a power failure monitoring signal when detecting the occurrence of a power failure, and the power failure monitoring means (game control device 100) When the power failure monitoring signal is continuously received for a predetermined period, it is determined that the power failure has occurred.

Further, the main control means (game control device 100) is based on the RAM 111c capable of storing data, the initialization operation section (initialization switch) which can be operated from the outside, and the initialization operation section being operated. It is provided with an initialization unit (game control device 100) for initializing the data stored in the RAM 111c, and the operation state of the initialization unit is read before the start of the standby time.

Further, the main control means (game control device 100) allows access to the RAM 111c after the waiting time has elapsed.

[Timer interrupt processing]
Next, the timer interrupt process will be described. FIG. 6 is a flowchart showing the procedure of timer interrupt processing. The timer interrupt process is started when a periodic timer interrupt signal generated by the CTC circuit in the clock generator is input to the CPU 111a. When a timer interrupt occurs in the gaming microcomputer 111, timer interrupt processing is started.

When the timer interrupt process is started, the game control device 100 first designates the register bank 1 as the register bank to be used (A1301), and sets the upper address of the RAM start address in a predetermined register (A1302). Switching from register bank 0 used in the main process to register bank 1 at the start of the timer interrupt process is equivalent to saving the registers used in the main process. When the timer interrupt processing is started, the interrupt is automatically disabled.

Next, the game control device 100 executes input processing from various sensors and switches and capture of signals, that is, input processing for reading the state of each input port (A1303). Further, based on the output data set in various processes, an output process for performing drive control of an actuator such as a solenoid (special winning opening solenoid 39b) is executed (A1304). When the firing prohibition signal is output in the processing of step A1005 in the main processing, the firing permission signal is output by performing this output processing, and the firing permission signal can be set to the permission state. ..

Next, the game control device 100 executes a random number update process 1 (A1305) and a random number update process 2 (A1306). The random number update process 1 is a process for updating the initial value (start value) of the big hit symbol random number, the small hit symbol random number, the hit random number, and the hit symbol random number that is the target of the initial value random number update process. The random number update process 2 is a process of updating the variation pattern random number for determining the variation pattern in the variation display game of Toku-zu 1 and Toku-zu 2. Note that the random number update process 1 and the random number update process 2 do not have to be executed when the probability setting is being changed (during the setting variable state). After that, the start port 1 switch 36a, the start port 2 switch 37a, the gate switch 34a, the winning opening switch 35a, the special winning opening switch 39a is monitored to see if there is a normal signal input, and the error is monitored (front frame or A winning opening switch/state monitoring process for checking whether the glass frame is opened or not is executed (A1307).

Next, the game control device 100 executes probability setting value changing processing for changing the probability setting value (A1308). Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the probability setting is being changed (during the setting variable state) (A1309). Whether or not the probability setting is being changed can be determined by the probability setting value changing flag (A1038). Next, it is determined whether or not the probability setting is being confirmed (during the setting confirmation state) (A1310). If the probability setting value confirmation mode flag, which will be described later, is set, it can be determined that the probability setting confirmation is in progress.

If the probability setting is not being changed or the probability setting is not being confirmed (result of A1310 is “N”), the gaming control device 100 executes a payout command transmission process of outputting the command set in the transmission buffer by various processes to the payout control device 200. It is executed (A1311). Further, a special figure game process for performing a process related to the special figure variation display game is executed (A1312), and then a general figure game process for performing a process related to the general figure variation display game is executed (A1313). When the probability setting is being changed (result of A1309 is “Y”) or the probability setting is being confirmed (result of A1310 is “Y”), the game control device 100 does not need to send the payout command. The process (A1311), the special figure game process (A1312), and the general figure game process (A1313) are not executed, and the process proceeds to step A1314.

Next, the game control device 100 is provided in the gaming machine 10 and executes a segment LED edit process for driving the segment LEDs for displaying the special figure variation game and various information regarding the game so as to display desired contents. (A1314).

Further, the game control device 100 executes a magnet irregularity monitoring process of checking the detection signal from the magnetic sensor switch 61 to determine whether there is any abnormality (A1315). For example, in the magnet fraud monitoring process, the magnet fraud occurrence flag is saved in the magnet fraud flag area when there is an abnormality. Further, a radio wave fraud monitoring process (board radio wave fraud monitoring process) for checking the detection signal from the radio wave sensor 62 of the game board to determine whether there is any abnormality is executed (A1316). For example, in the radio wave fraud monitoring process, the board radio wave fraud flag is saved in the board radio wave fraud flag area when there is an abnormality.

After that, the game control device 100 executes an external information editing process of setting a signal to be output to various external devices in the output buffer (A1317). Then, a state display edit output process of editing and outputting the output data to the state display device 152 is executed (A1318). In the state display edit output process, as the output data to the state display device 152, a character product ratio, a payout rate, the number of discharged balls, etc. may be calculated. In the status display edit output process, when the power is turned on (power is restored), the checksum of the status display work area is calculated. If the checksum does not match the checksum when power is turned off, the status display work area and status display work area are displayed. You may clear the stack area. After that, the timer interrupt processing ends. Note that when the timer interrupt process returns, restoration of the interrupt disabled state and restoration of the register bank designation is configured to be performed automatically. However, depending on the CPU used, interrupts are enabled after the external information editing process. It is also possible to perform the processing for returning to the register bank 0 or the processing for returning to the register bank 0.

[Output processing]
Next, details of the output process (A1304) in the above-mentioned timer interrupt process will be described. FIG. 7 is a flowchart showing the procedure of output processing.

The game control device 100 first outputs (resets) off data to the port 135 (see FIG. 3) that outputs the data of the segment of the collective display device (LED) 50 (A1601). Next, the data output to the solenoid output port 134 which outputs the data of the special winning opening solenoid 39b is combined and output (A1602).

Then, the game control device 100 updates the value of the digit counter for sequentially scanning the digit lines of the collective display device (LED) 50 (A1603). Further, the output data of the digit line of the LED corresponding to the value of the digit counter is acquired (A1604). Then, the acquired data and the external information data are combined (A1605), and the combined data is output to the fourth output port 136 for digit output/external information output (A1606). After that, the output data of the segment line is loaded from the segment area in the RWM corresponding to the value of the digit counter (A1607), and the loaded data is output to the third output port 135 for segment output (A1608).

Subsequently, the game control device 100 loads and combines the data to be output to the external information terminal 71 (A1609), further combines the combined data and the output data of the launch permission (A1610), and finally combines. The data is output to the fifth output port 137 for outputting the external information/launch permission signal (A1611).

Next, the game control device 100 sets off output data of the probability setting value display (A1612). The off output data is output data (blank data for extinguishing the light) during a period in which the probability setting value display is not performed. Then, it is determined whether the probability setting value display permission flag for permitting the display of the probability setting value is set (A1613). The probability setting value display permission flag is set in the probability setting value changing process described later.

When the probability setting value display permission flag is set (the result of A1613 is "Y"), the game control device 100 loads the probability setting value display data from the probability setting value display data area (A1614), and loads it. The probability set value display data is output to the probability set value display output port (sixth output port 141) (A1615). If the probability setting value display permission flag is not set (result of A1613 is “N”), the probability setting value display data is not loaded, and the OFF output data is set to the probability setting value display output port (sixth output port 141). To (A1615). Therefore, when the probability setting value display permission flag is set, the probability setting value display device 143 displays the probability setting value, and when the probability setting value display permission flag is not set, the probability setting value display device 143. Turns off (blank display).

Next, the data to be output to the test terminal output port 1 on the relay board 70 that outputs the test signal to the test firing test device is loaded and combined, and the combined data is output to the test terminal output port 1 on the relay board 70. (A1616). After that, the data to be output to the test terminal output port 2 on the relay board 70 that outputs the test signal to the test firing test device is loaded and combined, and the combined data is output to the test terminal output port 2 on the relay board 70. (A1617).

Next, the game control device 100 loads and combines the data to be output to the test terminal output port 3 on the relay board 70 which outputs the test signal to the test shooting test device, and the test terminal output port 3 on the relay board 70. The combined data is output to (A1618). Further, the data to be output to the test terminal output port 4 on the relay board 70 that outputs the test signal of the test-shooting test device is loaded and combined, and the combined data is output to the test terminal output port 4 on the relay board 70 ( A1619). Then, the data to be output to the test terminal output port 5 on the relay board 70 that outputs the test signal to the test firing test device is loaded and combined, and the combined data is output to the test terminal output port 5 on the relay board 70. (A1620), the output process ends.

After that, the game control device 100 loads the test signal output data of the probability setting value (A1621). Here, the display data itself of the probability setting value display device 143 (7-segment type display), that is, the probability setting value display data in the probability setting value display data area is output as the test signal output data relating to the probability setting value. The test signal output data may be numerical data (1 to 6) representing the set value, or may be output data of another form. Then, it is determined whether the setting key switch 93 is on (A1622). When the setting key switch 93 is on (result of A1622 is “Y”), the loaded data and the setting key switch ON information are combined (A1623), and the combined data is output to the test signal output port 6 (A1624). ). On the other hand, when the setting key switch 93 is off (result of A1622 is “N”), the test signal output data of the probability set value is directly output to the test signal output port 6 (A1624).

[Winning prize switch/Status monitoring processing]
FIG. 8 is a flowchart showing a procedure of a winning opening switch/state monitoring process. The winning opening switch/state monitoring process is executed in step A1307 in the timer interrupt process.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not the probability setting is being changed (during the setting variable state) (A2001). When the probability setting is not being changed (result of A2001 is “N”), the game control device 100 determines whether or not the probability setting is being confirmed (setting confirmation state) (A2002). When the probability setting confirmation is not in progress (result of A2001 is “N”), the monitoring processing from step A2003 to A2010 is executed as usual. On the other hand, when the probability setting is being changed (the result of A2001 is “Y”) or when the probability setting is being confirmed (the result of A2002 is “Y”), the glass frame 15 may be released. Since there is a possibility that a game ball can be put into any of the winning openings by hand, and there is no point in performing monitoring processing or the like, the monitoring processing from steps A2003 to A2010 is not executed, and the processing proceeds to step A2011. To do.

When the probability setting is not being changed (the result of A2001 is "N"), the game control device 100 corresponds to one of the special winning opening switches 39a (two) in the special winning opening (special variation winning device 39). The mouth monitoring table 1 is prepared (A2003). Then, despite the fact that the special winning opening is not open, it is monitored whether or not there is an illegal winning in the special winning opening, and the fraud & winning monitoring process for detecting a normal winning is executed (A2004).

After that, the game control device 100 prepares a winning opening monitoring table 2 corresponding to the other one of the large winning opening switches 39a (two pieces) in the special winning opening (special variation winning device 39) (A2005). Then, the fraud & prize monitoring process of monitoring the fraudulent prize and detecting the normal prize is executed (A2006).

Then, the game control device 100 prepares a winning opening monitoring table corresponding to the starting opening 2 switch 37a in the normal variation winning device 37 (A2007). Then, the fraud & prize monitoring process for monitoring the illegal prize and detecting the normal prize is executed (A2008). Then, a winning opening monitoring table of the winning opening switch that does not require fraudulent monitoring is prepared (A2009). The winning opening switch that does not require illicit monitoring is the starting opening 1 switch 36a and the winning opening switch (SW) 35a of the general winning opening 35.

Next, the game control device 100 executes a winning number counter updating process for updating the winning number (A2010). Then, the status scan counter for sequentially designating which switch or signal among the plurality of switches and signals whose status is to be monitored is to be monitored this time is updated (A2011). The status scan counter is updated in the range of 0 to 3.

After that, the game control device 100 prepares the gaming machine status monitoring table 1 for setting the status to be monitored according to the value of the status scan counter (A2012). Then, a gaming machine status check process for determining a status such as whether an error occurs (A2013). The details of the gaming machine status check processing will be described later.

By referring the value of the status scan counter to the gaming machine status monitoring table 1, when the value of the status scan counter is 0, the status based on the abnormality detection signal 1 output due to occurrence of disconnection of the switch connector (switch abnormality) (1 error) monitoring is set, and when the value of the status scan counter is 1, monitoring of the status (shooting ball running out error) based on the shoot ball running out switch signal from the payout control device 200 is set up. When the value of the status scan counter is 2, monitoring of the status (overflow error) based on the overflow switch signal is set, and when the value of the status scan counter is 3, status based on the payout abnormal status signal (payout abnormal error) Monitoring is set.

Next, the game control device 100 prepares the gaming machine status monitoring table 2 for setting the status to be monitored according to the value of the status scan counter (A2014). Then, a gaming machine status check process for determining a status such as whether an error occurs (A2015).

By referring the value of the status scan counter to the gaming machine status monitoring table 2, when the value of the status scan counter is 0, the status (glass frame opening error) is monitored based on the signal output from the glass frame opening detection switch. Is set, and when the value of the status scan counter is 1, monitoring of the status (main body frame open error, front frame open error) based on the signal output from the front frame open detection switch is set. Further, when the value of the status scan counter is 2, monitoring of the status based on the illegal radio wave signal (frame illegal radio wave) is set, and when the value of the status scan counter is 3, monitoring of the status based on the touch switch signal. Is set.

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the value of the state scan counter is 0 (A2016). When the value of the error scan counter is not 0 (result of A2016 is "N"), the winning opening switch/state monitoring process is ended. In this case, there is no status monitoring target in the gaming machine status monitoring table 3 to be referred to next.

Further, when the value of the error scan counter is 0 (result of A2016 is “Y”), the gaming control device 100 prepares the gaming machine state monitoring table 3 (A2017), and whether an error has occurred, etc. The gaming machine state check process for determining the state of A is executed (A2018).

By referring the value of the status scan counter to the gaming machine status monitoring table 3, when the value of the status scan counter is 0, the status based on the abnormality detection signal 2 output due to occurrence of disconnection of the switch connector (switch abnormality) 2 error) monitoring is set. The gaming machine status monitoring table 3 is not defined when the status scan counter is 1 to 3.

After that, the game control device 100 executes a payout busy signal check process of setting a busy signal status (payout busy signal flag) based on a payout busy signal indicating whether the payout control device 200 can start payout control (A2019). ), and ends the winning opening switch/state monitoring process.

Note that the processing from steps A2017 to A2019 is executed only when the value of the status scan counter updated for each timer interrupt is 0, and therefore is executed once for every four timer interrupts. .. That is, when the timer interrupt is performed every 4 ms, the processing from A2017 to A2019 is performed every 16 ms.

In the fraud & winning award monitoring process (A2008), the number of winnings and the number of winning balls (total number of winning balls) for each character related to the special winning opening (special variation winning device 39) and the ordinary variation winning device 37 are counted and stored. Further, information on the number of prizes and the number of balls acquired by role may be set as an effect command. In the winning number counter updating process (A2010), the number of winnings and the number of winning balls (total of the number of winning balls) for each winning prize related to the starting winning holes 36 and the general winning holes 35 are counted and stored. Information on the number of acquired balls may be set as a performance command. Further, in the winning opening switch/state monitoring process (FIG. 8), the number of out balls (the number of discharged balls) is counted and stored by the out ball detection switch, and the information of the number of out balls is a production command (out ball number command). May be set as The payout rate is the ratio (ratio) of the total number of prize balls (the total number of balls acquired by all characters) to the number of discharged balls. The character ratio is, for example, the ratio (%) of the number of prize balls (the number of balls acquired by character) obtained by winning the prize hole, out of the total number of prize balls (=so-called continuous character ratio). is there. In the state display edit output process (A1318), the output ratio of the state display device 152 may be calculated such as the character ratio, the payout rate, and the number of discharged balls.

[Game machine status check processing]
FIG. 9 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the gaming machine status check processing. The gaming machine status check processing is executed in steps A2013, A2015 and A2018 in the winning opening switch/status monitoring processing shown in FIG.

The game control device 100 first acquires a state monitoring table corresponding to the state scan counter (A2201). The state scan counter is set to a value in the range of 0 to 3 corresponding to the gaming state. The relationship between the state monitoring table and the state scan counter is as described in the winning port switch/state monitoring process shown in FIG.

Subsequently, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the signal to be checked is on (A2202). When the signal to be checked is not on (result of A2202 is “N”), that is, when the signal to be checked is off, a state off flag is prepared as a state flag (A2203) and the target state off command is acquired. And prepare (A2204). Further, the target state-off monitoring timer comparison value is acquired (A2205). The state off flag indicates a normal state regarding an error system signal, and indicates a state without touch regarding a touch switch signal.

On the other hand, when the signal to be checked is on (result of A2202 is “Y”), the game control device 100 prepares a state on flag as a state flag (A2206), acquires a target state on command, and prepares. Yes (A2207). Further, the target state-on monitoring timer comparison value is acquired (A2208). The state on flag indicates an abnormal or incorrect state regarding an error-related signal, and indicates a state with a touch regarding a touch switch signal.

When the process of step A2205 or step A2208 ends, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the value of the target signal control region matches the state of the acquired signal (A2209). If they match (the result of A2209 is “Y”), the process moves to step A2212. If they do not match (result of A2209 is "N"), the acquired signal state is saved in the target signal control area (A2210), and the target state monitoring timer is cleared (A2211).

Subsequently, the game control device 100 updates the target state monitoring timer by +1 (A2212). Further, it is determined whether or not the updated value of the state monitoring timer is equal to or greater than the corresponding timer comparison value (A2213). When the updated value of the state monitoring timer is less than the corresponding timer comparison value (result of A2213 is “N”), the gaming machine state check process is ended.

On the other hand, when the updated value of the state monitoring timer is equal to or more than the corresponding timer comparison value (result of A2213 is “Y”), the game control device 100 updates the state monitoring timer by −1, and the timer comparison value − The value is kept at 1 (A2214). Further, it is determined whether the prepared status flag matches the value of the target status flag area (A2215). If they match (the result of A2215 is “Y”), the gaming machine state check processing is ended.

On the other hand, when the prepared state flag does not match the value of the target state flag area (result of A2215 is “N”), the game control device 100 saves the prepared state flag in the target state flag area. Yes (A2216). Finally, effect command setting processing for setting effect commands is executed (A2217), and the gaming machine state check processing ends. The effect command here is either a state off command or a state on command. If the state on command is an error command, the effect control device 300 is caused to start error notification. In the effect command setting process, the effect command is written in the serial transmission buffer, and the effect command is transmitted to the effect control device 300.

[Probability setting value change processing]
Next, details of the probability setting value changing process (A1308) in the above-mentioned timer interrupt process will be described. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the probability setting value changing process.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not the probability setting value is being changed (during setting variable state) (A2401). When the probability setting value is not being changed (result of A2401 is “N”), probability setting value confirmation processing for confirming the probability setting value is executed (A2402).

When the probability setting value is being changed (the result of A2401 is "Y"), the game control device 100 updates -1 if the probability setting value extinguishing timer is not 0 (A2403), and the probability setting value extinguishing timer is 0. Or not (A2404). If the probability setting value extinction timer is 0 (result of A2404 is "Y"), the probability setting value display permission flag is set (A2405), and the process proceeds to step A2406. If the probability setting value extinction timer is not 0 (result of A2404 is "N"), nothing is done and the process proceeds to step A2406.

Then, in step A2406, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the probability setting value has been changed (A2406). If the probability setting value changed flag, which will be described later, is set, the probability setting value has been changed. If the probability setting value has been changed (result of A2406 is “Y”), the setting change end processing of steps A2416 to A2421 is executed.

If the probability setting value has not been changed (result of A2406 is "N"), the game control device 100 determines whether or not there is an input from the setting value change switch 102 (A2407). If there is no input from the setting value change switch 102 (result of A2407 is “N”), the process proceeds to step A2411.

When there is an input from the setting value change switch 102 (result of A2407 is "Y"), the game control device 100 updates the value of the work probability setting value area by 1 within the range of 0 to 5 (A2408). In this way, each time the setting value change switch 102 is operated, the value in the work probability setting value area is increased by one. If the setting value change switch 102 is operated after the value of the working probability setting value area becomes 5, the value of the working probability setting value area may be reset to 0. Values 0 to 5 in the work probability setting value area correspond to probability setting values 1 to 6 in 6 levels. The probability setting value is not limited to 6 levels.

Then, the game control device 100 saves the probability setting value display data corresponding to the work probability setting value in the probability setting value display data area (A2409). Next, an initial value (for example, 100 ms) is saved in the probability setting value extinction timer area (A2410). This initial value corresponds to an extinguishing period (blank period) in which the probability setting value display device 143 is extinguished (blank display).

As described above, when the probability setting value extinction timer is 0, the probability setting value display permission flag is set to set the probability setting value display data as the probability setting value during the setting change (working probability setting value). When the probability set value display timer 143 is displayed and the probability set value display timer 143 is not 0, the probability set value display device 143 is turned off. Since the probability setting value extinguishing timer turns off the setting value changing switch 102 (setting value changing button) for a predetermined extinguishing period, even if there is only one setting (when the setting value is only 1) It is possible to visually confirm on the probability set value display device 143 that the set value change switch 102 has been operated.

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not there is a touch switch signal input from the touch switch provided on the operation handle 24 (A2411). When the touch switch signal is not input (the result of A2411 is “N”), the probability setting value changing process ends. When the touch switch signal is input (result of A2411 is “Y”), the value of the working probability setting value area is loaded and saved in the probability setting value area (A2412). The touch switch signal serves as a confirmation signal for confirming the set value. Then, values 0 to 5 corresponding to the confirmed probability setting value are stored in the probability setting value area.

It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the probability setting value is determined and stored in the probability setting value area when a predetermined time has elapsed after the setting key switch 93 was turned off or the setting variable state was entered. Further, an operable confirmation button switch (operation means, operation unit) may be newly provided in the game control device 100, and a signal from the confirmation button switch may be used as a confirmation signal for confirming the set value. .. That is, instead of operating the touch switch, the operation of the newly provided confirm button switch may be used as the confirm operation.

Subsequently, the game control device 100 saves the probability setting value display data corresponding to the probability setting value in the probability setting value display data area (A2413). As a result, the confirmed probability setting value is displayed on the probability setting value display device 143. Then, a probability setting value changed flag indicating that the probability setting value has been changed is set (A2414), and a command for changing the probability setting value indicating that the probability setting value has been changed is output to the effect control device 300 (effect control. (A2415), and ends the probability setting value changing process.

In the processing for ending the setting change of steps A2416 to A2421, the game control device 100 first determines whether or not the setting key switch 93 is off (A2416). When the setting key switch 93 is in the ON state (result of A2416 is “N”), the probability setting value changing process ends. When the setting key switch 93 is in the off state (result of A2416 is “Y”), the RAM clear start address 3 is set (A2417) and the RAM area to be cleared is cleared to 0 (A2418). The RAM area to be cleared here is the clear area #3 in FIG. 5C. The clear area #3 includes a control information area (area from the power failure inspection area 1 to the checksum area) and a game control stack area, and excludes the probability setting value area and the random number area. The clear area #3 is obtained by removing the random area from the clear area #2, and the random numbers updated during the setting change are not wasted. By clearing the RAM area to be cleared to 0, the information and flags used for changing the settings, such as the work probability setting value area information, the probability setting value changing flag and the probability setting value changed flag, are cleared. It

Next, the game control device 100 saves the initial value at the time of RAM initialization in the area to be initialized (A2419). Since the setting change is completed, the initial value of the security signal control timer (described later) for outputting the security signal is saved, and the external device (hall Output to a computer). Thereafter, the probability setting value display data corresponding to the probability setting value is saved in the probability setting value display data area (A2420). As a result, the probability setting value at the time of ending the setting change is displayed and maintained on the probability setting value display device 143.

Next, the game control device 100 sends a probability setting change end command indicating that the probability setting change has ended to the effect control device 300 (effect control board) (A2421), and returns to the main process (FIG. 5B). The process moves to step A1049. The commands to be transmitted here include the model designation command, the decoration special figure 1 hold number command, the decoration special figure 2 hold number command, the probability information command, the set value information command (probability set value information command), and the probability setting change end. This is a command (which may be a RAM initialization command). Depending on the model, a performance mode information command, a performance number information command, and a high probability number information command are transmitted. Upon receiving the command for ending the probability setting change, the production control device 300 displays, for example, a customer waiting demo on the display device 41, and notifies the RAM initialization (RAM clear) by the sound of the LED and the speaker of the panel decoration device 46 and the like. Do it for 30 seconds.

[Probability setting value confirmation processing]
Next, details of the probability setting value confirmation processing (A2402) in the above-described probability setting value changing processing will be described. FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the probability setting value confirmation processing.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not it is in a probability set value confirmation mode (a set value confirmable state) in which the probability set value can be confirmed (A2501). When the probability setting value confirmation mode flag described later is set, it can be determined that the probability setting value confirmation mode is in progress. When the probability setting value confirmation mode is in effect (result of A2501 is “Y”), the processes of step A2509 and thereafter are executed.

If the probability setting value confirmation mode is not in effect (the result of A2501 is "N"), the game control device 100 clears the probability setting value display permission flag (A2502). Then, it is determined whether or not a game is being played (A2503). For example, if the variable display game is being executed or the jackpot is being hit, it can be determined that the game is being played. When the game is being played (the result of A2503 is “Y”), the probability setting value confirmation processing is ended so that the confirmation of the probability setting value becomes impossible. When the game is not in progress (result of A2503 is "N"), it is determined whether or not the setting key switch 93 is ON (A2504). If the setting key switch 93 is off (result of A2504 is “N”), the probability setting value confirmation process ends.

When the setting key switch 93 is on (result of A2504 is “Y”), the game control device 100 sets the probability setting value confirmation mode flag (A2505). As a result, when the probability setting value is not being changed (during setting variable state) (result of A2401 is “N”), if the setting key switch 93 is turned on, the probability setting value confirmation mode (the probability setting value confirmation mode) The setting value can be confirmed). Then, the probability setting value display permission flag is set (A2506). As a result, the output process (FIG. 7) causes the probability setting value display device 143 to display the probability setting value based on the probability setting value display data loaded from the probability setting value display data area.

Next, the game control device 100 saves the initial value in the security signal control timer area so that the security signal can be output (A2507). When the set value is confirmed, a security signal is output, and the fact that the front frame 12 is opened can be output to an external device (hall computer, etc.). The command for confirming the probability set value is transmitted to the effect control device 300 (effect control board) (A2508), and the probability set value confirmation process ends.

When in the probability setting value confirmation mode (result of A2501 is “Y”), the game control device 100 determines whether or not the setting key switch 93 is on (A2509). When the setting key switch 93 is on (result of A2509 is “Y”), the probability set value confirmation mode continues and the probability set value confirmation probability set value confirmation processing ends.

When the setting key switch 93 is off (result of A2509 is “N”), the game control device 100 clears the probability setting value confirmation mode flag (A2510). Therefore, when the setting key switch 93 is turned off, the probability setting value confirmation mode ends. Then, in order to prevent the probability setting value display device 143 from displaying the probability setting value, the probability setting value display permission flag is cleared (A2511). Subsequently, a command for ending the confirmation of the probability set value indicating that the confirmation of the probability set value has been completed is transmitted to the effect control device 300 (effect control board) (A2512).

In the above description, the setting value change switch 102 can be used as a RAM initialization switch (RAM clear switch), but a RAM initialization switch may be provided separately from the setting value change switch 102. In this case, when the power is turned on (power is restored), if the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch are on, the setting is changed (setting change state), and the setting key switch 93 is turned on and the RAM initialization switch is turned on. If the setting key switch 93 is off and the RAM initialization switch is on, the RAM initialization (RAM clear) is possible and the setting key switch 93 and the RAM are set. If the initialization switch is off, the power may be turned on normally (power recovery). Further, the setting value (setting) may be fixed when the setting key switch 93 is turned off.

[Special game processing]
Next, details of the special figure game process (A1312) in the above-described timer interrupt process will be described. FIG. 12 is a flowchart showing the procedure of special figure game processing. In the special figure game process, the input of the starting port 1 switch 36a and the starting port 2 switch 37a is monitored, the entire process relating to the special figure variation display game is controlled, and the special figure display is set.

The game control device 100 first executes a starting opening switch monitoring process for monitoring the winning of the starting opening 1 switch 36a and the starting opening 2 switch 37a (A2601). In the starting opening switch monitoring process, when a game ball wins the starting winning opening 36 and the ordinary variation winning device 37 that forms the second starting winning opening, various random numbers (big hit random numbers, etc.) are extracted, and a special figure variation display based on the winning is displayed. Before the start of the game, a game result pre-determination is performed to pre-determine the game result based on winning. The details of the starting opening switch monitoring process will be described later.

Next, the game control device 100 executes a special winning opening switch monitoring process (A2602). In the special winning opening switch monitoring process, the detection of the game ball by the count switch 39a provided in the special variation winning device 39 is monitored. The details of the special winning opening switch monitoring process will be described later.

Next, the game control device 100, if the special figure game processing timer is not 0, updates -1 (subtracts only 1) (A2603). The special figure game processing timer is clocked for the interrupt period (4 msec) of the timer interrupt process by updating -1. The minimum value of the special figure game processing timer is set to 0. Next, it is determined whether the special figure game processing timer is 0 (A2604). If the special figure game processing timer is not 0 (result of A2604 is "N"), the process proceeds to step A2619.

The game control device 100 corresponds to the special figure game processing number when the special figure game processing timer is 0 (the result of A2604 is “Y”), that is, when the time has expired or has already expired. The special figure game sequence branch table to be referred to for branching to the process is set in the register (A2605). Further, the branch destination address of the process corresponding to the special figure game processing number is acquired using the special figure game sequence branch table (A2606). Subsequently, a subroutine call with the special figure game process number is performed to execute a game branch process corresponding to the special figure game process number (A2607).

When the game process number is “0” in step A2607, the game control device 100 monitors the variation start of the special figure variation display game to set the variation start of the special figure variation display game and the effect setting, The special figure normal processing for setting the information necessary for performing the special figure changing process is executed (A2608). Details of the special figure normal process will be described later with reference to FIG.

When the game process number is "1" in step A2607, the game control device 100 sets a special display stop display time and information necessary for performing the special figure displaying process. The process during figure fluctuation is executed (A2609). The details of the special figure changing process will be described later with reference to FIG.

When the game processing number is "2" at step A2607, if the game result of the special figure variation display game is a big hit, the game control device 100 sets the fanfare command according to the kind of big hit, and each big hit. The special figure displaying process for setting the fanfare time according to the special winning opening opening pattern and the information necessary for performing the fanfare/interval processing are executed (A2610). For example, in the special figure display process, if the result of the special figure change display game is a big hit, necessary information such as a big hit fanfare command (effect command), big hit fanfare time, probability information command (low probability) is set, The processing number "3" related to the fanfare/interval processing is set and saved in the special figure game processing number area. If the result of the special figure variation display game is a small hit, set the necessary information such as the small hit fanfare command (effect command) and the small hit fanfare time, and set the processing number "7" related to the small hit fanfare middle processing. Save it in the special figure game processing number area. If the result of the special figure variation display game is not a big hit or a small hit, the process number "0" related to the special figure normal process is set and saved in the special figure game process number area.

When the game process number is “3” in step A2607, the game control device 100 sets information necessary for setting the opening time of the special winning opening, updating the number of times of opening, and performing the process during opening of the special winning opening. The fanfare/interval processing for setting and the like is executed (A2611). For example, in the fanfare/interval processing, necessary information such as the round command (effect command) corresponding to the round of the round game to be executed and the opening time of the special winning opening is set, and the processing number relating to the processing during the big winning opening is set. "4" is set and saved in the special figure game processing number area.

When the game process number is “4” in step A2607, the game control device 100 sets an interval command if the jackpot round is not the final round, and sets an ending command if it is the final round, The process of opening the special winning opening is executed to set information necessary for performing the special winning opening remaining ball processing (A2612). For example, in the processing during the opening of the special winning opening, necessary information such as an interval command as an effect command and an ending command is set, and the processing number "5" related to the processing of the special winning opening remaining ball is set to set the special figure game processing number area. Save to.

When the game process number is “5” in step A2607, the game control device 100 sets a time for discharging the remaining balls in the special winning opening if the big hit round is the final round, The special winning opening remaining ball process for setting the information necessary for performing the big hit ending process is executed (A2613). For example, in the special winning opening remaining ball processing, if the round is not the final round, the interval time is saved in the special figure game processing timer area, and the processing number "3" related to the fanfare/interval processing is set in the special figure game processing number area. Save. If it is the final round, the ending time is saved in the special figure game processing timer area, the processing number "6" related to the big hit end processing is set, and the ending time is saved in the special figure game processing number area.

When the game process number is "6" in step A2607, the game control device 100 executes a jackpot end process for setting information necessary for executing the special figure normal process (A2614). For example, in the jackpot end processing, necessary information such as the probability state after the jackpot state ends and the normal electric power support state (time saving state) after the jackpot state ends is set, and the probability information command (production) Command), set a process number "0" related to special figure normal processing, and save it in the special figure game process number area. Probability information commands include the number of continuous games (probability/high probability/low probability) after the big hit state, and the number of continuous games (time shortening fluctuation count, power support count) in the normal electric power support state (time saving state) after the big hit state. Information is included.

When the game process number is "7" in step A2607, the game control device 100 sets the opening time of the special winning opening, updates the number of times of opening, sets the information necessary for performing the small hitting process, etc. The small hit fanfare processing is executed (A2615). For example, in the small hitting fanfare medium processing, necessary information such as the small winning opening time of the special winning opening is set, and the processing number "8" related to the small winning medium processing is set and saved in the special figure game processing number area.

When the game process number is "8" in step A2607, the game control device 100 executes a small hit mid-process to set information necessary for performing the small hit remaining ball process (A2616). For example, in the small hitting process, necessary information such as the small hit remaining ball processing time is set, and the process number "9" relating to the special winning opening remaining ball process is set and saved in the special figure game process number area.

When the game process number is "9" in step A2607, the game control device 100 executes a small hit remaining ball process that sets information necessary for performing the small hit end process (A2617). For example, in the small hit remaining ball process, necessary information such as the small hit ending time is set, and the process number "10" related to the special figure small hit end process is set and saved in the special figure 1 game process number area.

When the game process number is “10” in step A2607, the game control device 100 executes a small hit ending process for setting information necessary for executing the special figure normal process (A2618).

When the process based on the special figure game process number is finished, the game control device 100 prepares a special figure 1 change control table for controlling the change of the special figure 1 display device 51 (A2619), and then the special figure 1 display device. The symbol variation control process relating to 51 is executed (A2620). Then, after preparing the special figure 2 fluctuation control table for controlling the fluctuation of the special figure 2 display 52 (A2621), the symbol fluctuation control process relating to the special figure 2 display 52 is executed (A2622). The details of the symbol variation control process will be described later with reference to FIG.

[Starting switch monitoring process]
Next, details of the starting opening switch monitoring process (A2601) in the special figure game process will be described. FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the starting opening switch monitoring process.

The game control device 100 first prepares a winning prize monitoring table for the starting winning opening 36 (starting opening 1) (A2701), executes a hard random number acquisition process (A2702), and determines whether or not there is a winning in the starting winning opening 36. It is determined (A2703). When there is no winning in the starting winning opening 36 (result of A2703 is "N"), the processing of step A2709 and thereafter is executed. On the other hand, if there is a winning in the starting winning opening 36 (result of A2703 is "Y"), it is determined whether or not it is during special time saving (during normal power support state) (A2704).

When the game control device 100 determines that it is not during special time saving (during normal communication support state) (result of A2704 is “N”), the process of step A2707 and subsequent steps is executed. On the other hand, when it is during special time saving (during normal power support state) (result of A2704 is “Y”), a right-handing instruction notification command is prepared as an effect command (A2705), and effect command setting processing is executed ( A2706).

That is, in the normal power support state (time saving state), regardless of the probability state (high-probability state/low-probability state) of the variable display game, the right-handing instruction notification command is prepared and the effect command setting process is executed. .. In the case of the present embodiment, the start winning port 36 is not won unless the player hits it left, and the normal variable winning device 37 is won only when it is hit right. Also, the game ball does not pass through the universal figure starting gate 34 unless it is hit to the right. Therefore, in the normal power support state (time saving state), right-handed is more advantageous than left-handed, but if there is a winning at the start winning port 36 during the normal power support state (that is, in the normal power support state When left-handed), a right-handing instruction notification command is transmitted to the effect control device 300, and the effect control device 300 executes a notification (warning) for instructing right-handing by the display device 41 or the like.

Next, the game control device 100 prepares a table for setting information on hold by the starting winning opening 36 (starting opening 1) (A2707), and then executes special figure starting opening switch common processing (A2708). Then, a winning monitor table for the second starting winning opening (normal variation winning device 37) is prepared (A2709), a hard random number acquisition process is executed (A2710), and it is determined whether or not there is a winning at the second starting winning opening. The determination is made (A2711). When there is no winning in the second starting winning opening (the result of A2711 is “N”), the starting opening switch monitoring processing is ended.

On the other hand, the game control device 100, if there is a winning in the second start winning port (the result of A2711 is "Y"), whether or not the ordinary electric auditors (ordinary variation winning device 37) is operating. That is, it is determined whether or not the normal variation winning device 37 is activated and the gaming ball is in an open state in which a prize can be won (A2712). When the ordinary electric accessory is in operation (result of A2712 is “Y”), the process proceeds to step A2714.

On the other hand, when the ordinary electric accessory is not in operation (result of A2712 is “N”), the game control device 100 determines whether or not the normal electric power illegality is occurring (A2713). When the number of illegal wins to the normal variation winning device 37 is equal to or more than the number of fraudulent occurrence determinations (for example, 5), it is determined that the ordinary electric fraud is occurring. In the normally variable winning device 37, the game ball cannot be won in the closed state, and the game ball can be won only in the open state. Therefore, if the game ball wins in the closed state, it means that some abnormality or dishonesty has occurred, and if there is a game ball won in such a closed state, the number is counted as the fraudulent prize number. If the number of fraudulent prizes thus counted is equal to or larger than a predetermined fraud occurrence determination number (upper limit value), it is determined that fraud has occurred.

In the case where the illegality of normal electric power generation is not occurring (the result of A2713 is “N”), the game control device 100 prepares a table for setting the information on hold by the second starting winning opening (normal variation winning device 37) (A2714). The special figure starting port switch common process is executed (A2715), and the starting port switch monitoring process is ended. In addition, when it is determined in A2713 that the illegality of electric power generation is occurring (the result of A2713 is "Y"), the starting opening switch monitoring process is ended. That is, the second starting memory is not generated any more.

[Common processing for special figure start switch]
Next, details of the special figure starting port switch common process (A2708, A2715) in the starting port switch monitoring process will be described. FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure starting port switch common processing. The special figure starting port switch common process is a process commonly performed for each input when the starting port 1 switch 36a and the starting port 2 switch 37a are input.

The game control device 100 first outputs the information regarding the number of winnings to the start port switch to be monitored among the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switch 37a to the management device outside the game machine 10. Is loaded (A2901), the loaded value is updated by +1 (A2902), and it is determined whether or not the output number overflows (A2903). If the number of outputs does not overflow (result of A2903 is “N”), the updated value is saved in the starting port signal output number area of the RWM (A2904), and the process proceeds to step A2905. On the other hand, if the output count overflows (result of A2903 is “Y”), the process moves to step A2905. In the present embodiment, a value from “0” to “255” can be stored in the starting port signal output frequency area. When the loaded value is "255", the value after updating becomes "0" by the +1 update, and it is configured to determine that the output count overflows.

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the number of special figure reservations (starting memory number) to be updated corresponding to the starting port switch to be monitored among the starting port 1 switch 36a and the starting port 2 switch 37a is less than the upper limit value. It is determined (A2905). If the number of special figure reservations to be updated is not less than the upper limit value (the result of A2905 is "N"), the special figure starting port switch common processing ends. When the number of reserved special maps to be updated is less than the upper limit (the result of A2905 is “Y”), the number of reserved special maps to be updated (the number of reserved special maps 1 or the number of reserved special maps 2) is updated by +1. Then (A2906), the target starting opening winning flag is saved (A2907).

Next, the game control device 100 calculates the address of the random number storage area corresponding to the starting port switch to be monitored and the special figure reservation number (A2908), and stores the jackpot random number prepared in step A2805 in the RWM jackpot random number. Save in the area (A2909). Next, the jackpot random number of the starting port switch to be monitored is extracted, prepared (A2910), and saved in the jackpot random number storage area of the RWM (A2911).

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the winning is to the starting winning opening 36 (starting opening 1) (A2912). When the winning is not in the start winning hole 36 (the result of A2912 is “N”), the process proceeds to step A2915. On the other hand, when it is a winning in the starting winning opening 36 (the result of A2912 is “Y”), a small hit symbol random number is extracted, prepared (A2913), and saved in the small hit symbol random number storage area of RWM (A2914). ).

Next, the game control device 100 saves the fluctuation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 in the fluctuation pattern random number storage area of the corresponding RWM (A2915), and executes the special figure reservation information determination process (A2916). Then, a starter switch to be monitored and a decoration special figure reservation number command corresponding to the special figure reservation number are prepared as an effect command (A2917), and an effect command setting process (A2918) is executed to make the special figure starter switch common. The process ends.

Here, the game control device 100 (RAM 111c) extracts a predetermined random number based on the inflow of the game ball into the starting winning area and the starting winning area of the normal variation winning device 37, and becomes the execution right of the variation display game. As a starting memory, a starting memory means for storing a predetermined number at an upper limit is formed. Further, the starting storage means (game control device 100) uses various random number values extracted based on winning of the game balls into the first starting winning opening (starting winning opening 36) as a first starting memory with a predetermined number as an upper limit. Various random number values that are stored and extracted based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting winning opening (ordinary variation winning device 37) are stored as the second starting memory with a predetermined number as an upper limit.

[Special map reservation information determination process]
Next, details of the special figure reservation information determination process (A2916) in the common start port switch process will be described. FIG. 15 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure reservation information determination process. The special figure reservation information determination process is a prefetch (preliminary determination) process of determining the result related information corresponding to the starting memory before the start timing of the special figure variation display game based on the corresponding starting memory.

First, the game control device 100 checks the starting opening winning flag saved in step A2907 to determine whether or not the winning is to the starting winning opening 36 (starting opening 1) (A3001). When the winning is not in the start winning port 36 (the result of A3001 is “N”), the process proceeds to step A3004. On the other hand, if it is a winning in the starting winning opening 36 (the result of A3001 is "Y"), it is determined whether or not it is during special time saving (during normal power support state) (A3002).

The game control device 100 ends the special figure reservation information determination process when it is during the special figure time saving (during normal communication support state) (result of A3002 is “Y”). On the other hand, when it is not during the special drawing time saving (the result of A3002 is “N”), it is determined whether or not a big hit or a small hit is in progress (A3003). When the big hit or the small hit is in progress (the result of A3003 is “Y”), the special figure reservation information determination processing is ended.

On the other hand, when the big hit or the small hit is not in progress (the result of A3003 is "N"), the game control device 100 judges whether or not the big hit random number value is the big hit judgment value and is the big hit judgment processing. Is executed (A3004). Then, if the determination result is a big hit (the result of A3005 is “Y”), a big hit symbol random number check table corresponding to the target opening switch is set (A3006), and the big hit symbol random number prepared in step A2910 is set. The corresponding stop symbol information is acquired (A3007), and the process proceeds to step A3014.

When the determination result is not a big hit (the result of A3005 is "N"), the game control device 100 determines whether or not the winning is the first starting opening (starting winning opening 36) (A3008). When it is not a winning in the starting winning opening 36 (the result of A3008 is "N"), the stop symbol information of the outset is set (A3013), and the process proceeds to step A3014.

The game control device 100, if a winning to the starting winning port 36 (the result of A3008 is “Y”), determines whether or not the big hit random number value is the small hit determination value and is the small hit. A hit determination process is executed (A3009). Then, if the determination result is not a small hit (result of A3010 is "N"), the stop symbol information of the out is set (A3013), and the process proceeds to step A3014. On the other hand, if the determination result is a small hit (result of A3010 is “Y”), a small hit symbol random number check table is set (A3011), and a stop symbol corresponding to the small hit symbol random number prepared in step A143. The information is acquired (A3012), and the process proceeds to step A3014.

Next, the game control device 100 prepares a prefetch stop symbol command corresponding to the target starting opening switch and the stop symbol information as an effect command (A3014), and executes an effect command setting process (A3015). Next, special figure information setting processing for setting special figure information which is a parameter for setting the variation pattern is performed (A3016), and variation pattern setting processing for setting the variation mode of the special figure variation display game is executed (A3017). ).

After that, the game control device 100 prepares a look-ahead variation pattern command corresponding to the first half variation number indicating the first half variation pattern and the second half variation number indicating the second half variation pattern in the variation mode of the special figure variation display game as an effect command (A3018). ), effect command setting processing is performed (A3019), and the special figure reservation information determination processing ends. The special figure information setting process in step A3016 and the variation pattern setting process in step A3017 are the same as the processes executed at the start of the special figure variation display game in the special figure normal process. In the effect command setting process, the effect command is written in the serial transmission buffer, and the effect command is transmitted to the effect control device 300.

By the above processing, a read-ahead symbol command including the result of the special figure variation display game based on the start-up memory of the pre-reading target, and a read-ahead variation pattern command including information on the variation pattern in the special figure variation display game based on the starting memory are prepared. And transmitted to the performance control device 300. As a result, the determination result (prefetch result) of the result related information (whether it is a big hit or not and the type of variation pattern) corresponding to the starting memory is controlled before the start timing of the special figure variation display game based on the corresponding starting memory. The device 300 can be informed, and in particular, by changing the decoration special figure starting memory display displayed on the display device 41, the result related information is given to the player before the start timing of the special figure changing display game. It becomes possible to inform.

That is, the game control device 100 determines a random number stored as a start memory in the start storage means (game control device 100) before executing the variable display game based on the start memory (for example, whether a special result is obtained or not). Judgment etc.) Make a pre-judgment means. Note that the random number value stored corresponding to the starting memory is determined in advance not only at the time of the winning prize when the starting memory is generated, but also at any time before the variable display game based on the starting memory is performed. Good.

[Winning prize switch monitoring process]
Next, the details of the special winning opening switch monitoring process (A2602) in the special figure game process will be described. FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special winning opening switch monitoring process.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not the value of the special figure game process number is “4”, that is, whether or not the special winning opening process is being performed (A3101). When the special winning opening opening process is being performed (the result of A3101 is “Y”), the process proceeds to step A3105. If the special winning opening is not being processed (the result of A3101 is “N”), the value of the special figure game processing number is “5”, that is, whether the special winning opening remaining ball processing is being performed. A determination is made (A3102).

When the special winning opening remaining ball process is being performed (the result of A3102 is “Y”), the game control device 100 proceeds to the process of step A3105. When the special winning opening remaining ball processing is not being performed (the result of A3105 is “N”), it is determined whether the value of the special figure game processing number is “8”, that is, whether or not the small hitting processing is being performed. (A3103). If processing is being performed during the small hit (result of A3104 is “Y”), the process moves to step A3105. Further, when the small hitting is not being processed (the result of A3103 is “N”), it is determined whether the value of the special figure game processing number is “9”, that is, whether the small hit remaining ball processing is being performed ( A3104). Since the special figure game processing number does not shift until the special figure game processing timer reaches 0, the progress of the game can be checked by the special figure game processing number in this way.

When the small hit remaining ball processing is not being performed (the result of A3104 is "N"), the game control device 100 ends the special winning opening switch monitoring processing. If the small hit remaining ball is being processed (result of A3104 is “Y”), the process moves to step A3105. Then, the winning award counter is set to 0 (A3105), and it is determined whether or not there is an input to the special winning opening switch 1 (one big winning opening switch 39a) (A3106).

When there is no input to the special winning opening switch 1 (the result of A3106 is “N”), the game control device 100 determines whether or not there is an input to the special winning opening switch 2 (the other special winning opening switch 39a). (A3110). If there is an input to the special winning opening switch 1 (the result of A3106 is “Y”), the special winning opening count command is prepared as an effect command (A3107), and effect command setting processing (A3108) is executed. Then, the winning counter is updated by +1 (A3109), and it is determined whether or not there is an input to the special winning opening switch 2 (the other special winning opening switch 39a) (A3110).

When there is no input to the special winning opening switch 2 (result of A3110 is “N”), the game control device 100 determines whether or not the value of the winning counter is 0 (A3114). If there is an input to the special winning opening switch 2 (the result of A3110 is “Y”), the special winning opening count command is prepared as an effect command (A3111) and the effect command setting process (A3112) is executed. Then, the winning counter is updated by +1 (A3113), and it is determined whether the value of the winning counter is 0 (A3114).

If the value of the winning counter is 0 (the result of A3114 is "Y"), the game control device 100 ends the special winning opening switch monitoring process. When the value of the winning prize counter is not 0 (result of A3114 is "N"), it is determined whether or not the special winning opening remaining ball processing is being performed (A3115). When the special winning opening remaining ball processing is in progress (result of A3115 is "Y"), the special winning opening switch monitoring processing is terminated, and when the big winning opening remaining ball processing is not in progress (result of A3115 is "N"), small It is determined whether or not the hit residual ball is being processed (A3116).

When the small hit remaining ball processing is being performed (the result of A3116 is "Y"), the game control device 100 ends the special winning opening switch monitoring processing, and when the small hit remaining ball processing is not being performed (the result of A3116 is " N"), the value of the winning prize counter (1 or 2) is added to the special winning opening count number (A3117), and the special winning opening count value is the upper limit value (the number of game balls that can be won in one round. For example, "9"). ) It is determined whether or not the above is satisfied (A3118).

When the special winning opening count number is not equal to or more than the upper limit value (the result of A3118 is “N”), the game control device 100 ends the special winning opening switch monitoring process. In addition, when the special winning opening count number is equal to or more than the upper limit value (the result of A3118 is “Y”), the special winning opening count number is kept at the upper limit value (A3119), and the special figure game processing timer area is cleared to 0. (A3120), it is determined whether or not during the small hitting process (A3121).

When the game control device 100 is not in the process of small hit (the result of A3121 is "N"), the special winning opening switch monitoring process is ended, and when the process of small hit is being processed (the result of A3121 is "Y"). The value of the small hit opening operation end is saved in the special winning opening control pointer area (A3122), and the special winning opening switch monitoring process is ended. As a result, the special winning opening will be closed and the first round will be completed.

[Special processing of special drawings]
Next, details of the special figure normal process (A2608) in the special figure game process will be described. FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure normal process.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not the special figure 2 holding number (second starting memory number) is 0 (A3201). When the special figure 2 reservation number is 0 (result of A3201 is “Y”), it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 reservation number (first startup memory number) is 0 (A3205). Then, when the special figure 1 hold number is 0 (the result of A3205 is “Y”), it is determined whether the customer waiting demo has been started (A3209), and when the customer waiting demo is not started (A3209). The result is “N”), the customer waiting demonstration flag indicating that the customer waiting demonstration state (state during customer waiting demonstration) is set in the customer waiting demo flag area (A3210).

Subsequently, the game control device 100 prepares a customer waiting demo command as an effect command (A3211), performs an effect command setting process (A3212), and sets "0" related to the special figure normal process as a process number ( A3213). On the other hand, in step A3209, even when the customer waiting demo has been started (result of A3209 is “Y”), “0” related to the special figure normal process is set as the process number (A3213). After that, the processing number is saved in the special figure game processing number area (A3214), and the variable symbol determination flag area is cleared (A3215). Then, the flag during the fraud monitoring period is saved in the special winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area (A3216), and the special figure normal process is ended.

In this way, the customer waiting demo command is transmitted when the special figure 1 holding number (first starting memory number) and the special figure 2 holding number (second starting memory number) are 0, and the customer waiting demo command is received. The produced control device 300 performs the setting for displaying the customer waiting demo on the display device 41 or the like. The game control device 100 may also be configured to transmit the customer waiting demo command only when the touch switch signal from the touch switch of the operation handle 24 becomes an off signal.

If the special figure 2 hold number is not 0 (the result of A3201 is “N”), the game control device 100 executes the special figure 2 variation start process (A3202) to display the special figure 2 hold number. The figure reservation number command (decorative special figure 2 reservation number command) is prepared as an effect command (A3203), effect command setting processing is executed (A3204), and the special figure normal processing is ended.

If the special figure 1 hold number is not 0 (the result of A3205 is “N”), the game control device 100 executes the special figure 1 fluctuation start process (A3206), and the special feature corresponding to the special figure 1 hold number. The figure reservation number command (decorative special figure 1 reservation number command) is prepared as an effect command (A3207), effect command setting processing is executed (A3208), and the special figure normal processing is ended.

In this way, by checking the special figure 2 pending number before checking the special figure 1 pending number, the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (A3202) is executed when the special figure 2 pending number is not 0. The Rukoto. That is, the special figure 2 variable display game is executed with priority over the special figure 1 variable display game. In other words, when the game control device 100 has the second start memory in the second start storage means (game control device 100), the variable display game based on the second start memory is displayed as the variable display game based on the first start memory. It forms a priority control means that is executed with priority over the game.

[Special map 1 fluctuation start processing]
Next, details of the special figure 1 variation start process (A3206) in the special figure normal process will be described. FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 1 variation start process. The special figure 1 variation start process is a process performed at the start of the special figure 1 variation display game.

The game control device 100 saves the special figure 1 variation flag indicating the type of the special figure variation display game to be executed (here, special figure 1) in the variation symbol determination flag area (A3401). Subsequently, a big hit flag 1 setting process for setting deviation information and big hit information is executed for the big hit flag 1 for determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable display game is a big hit (A3402). Details of the jackpot flag 1 setting process will be described later.

Next, the game control device 100 executes the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process related to the setting of the special figure 1 stop symbol (symbol information) (A3403). The details of the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process will be described later. Furthermore, the game control device 100 executes special figure information setting processing for setting special figure information which is a parameter for setting the variation pattern (A3404).

Subsequently, the game control device 100 prepares a special figure 1 fluctuation pattern setting information table which is a table in which information for referring to various information regarding the setting of the fluctuation pattern of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is set (A3405). ). After that, the game control device 100 executes a variation pattern setting process for setting a variation pattern which is a variation mode in the special figure 1 variation display game (A3406).

Next, the game control device 100 executes variation start information setting processing for setting variation start information of the special figure 1 variation display game (A3407), and ends the special figure 1 variation start processing. In the fluctuation start information setting processing, the fluctuation time value corresponding to the fluctuation pattern (fluctuation pattern number) is acquired and saved in the special figure game processing timer area. Then, with respect to the special figure 1 variable display game, variable commands (MODE, ACTION) corresponding to the variable pattern numbers are prepared as effect commands, and effect command setting processing is performed.

Then, the game control device 100 sets "1" related to the special figure changing process as the process number (A3408), and saves the process number in the special figure game process number area (A3409).

Then, the game control device 100 clears the customer waiting demo flag area (A3410), and saves the signal regarding the fluctuation start of the special figure 1 in the test signal output data area (A3411). After that, the changing flag is saved in the special figure 1 change control flag area (A3412), and the initial value of the blinking control timer (the timer of the blinking cycle of the special figure 1 display 51) is set in the special figure 1 blink control timer area (for example, 100 ms) is set (A3413). Subsequently, the initial value (for example, 0) is saved in the special figure 1 variation symbol number area (A3414), and the special figure 1 variation start processing is ended.

[Special figure 2 fluctuation start processing]
Next, details of the special figure 2 variation start process (A3202) in the special figure normal process will be described. FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 2 variation start process. The special figure 2 variation start process is a process performed at the start of the special figure 2 variation display game, and is the same as the process in the special figure 1 variation start process shown in FIG. It is something to do.

The game control device 100 first saves a special figure 2 variation flag indicating the type of the special figure variation display game to be executed (here, special figure 2) in the variation symbol determination flag area (A3501). Subsequently, a big hit flag 2 setting process for setting deviation information and big hit information to the big hit flag 2 for determining whether or not the special figure 2 variable display game is a big hit is executed (A3502).

Next, the game control device 100 executes the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process relating to the setting of the special figure 2 stop symbol (symbol information) (A3503). Further, a special figure information setting process for setting special figure information which is a parameter for setting the variation pattern is executed (A3504). Subsequently, a special figure 2 fluctuation pattern setting information table, which is a table in which information for referring to various information regarding the setting of the fluctuation pattern of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is set (A3505).

After that, the game control device 100 executes a variation pattern setting process for setting a variation pattern of the special figure 2 variation display game (A3506). Then, the fluctuation start information setting process for setting the fluctuation start information of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is executed (A3507). In the fluctuation start information setting processing, the fluctuation time value corresponding to the fluctuation pattern (fluctuation pattern number) is acquired and saved in the special figure game processing timer area. Then, with respect to the special figure 2 variable display game, variable commands (MODE, ACTION) corresponding to the variable pattern numbers are prepared as effect commands, and effect command setting processing is performed.

Next, the game control device 100 first sets “1” relating to the special figure changing process as the process number (A3508), and saves the process number in the special figure game process number area (A3509).

Then, the game control device 100 clears the customer waiting demo flag area (A3510), and saves the signal related to the fluctuation start of the special figure 2 in the test signal output data area (A3511). After that, the changing flag is saved in the special figure 2 change control flag area (A3512), and the initial value of the blink control timer (the timer of the blinking cycle of the special figure 2 display 52) is set in the special figure 2 blink control timer area (for example, 100 ms) is set (A3513). Subsequently, the initial value (for example, 0) is saved in the special figure 2 variation symbol number area (A3414), and the special figure 2 variation start processing is ended.

[Big hit flag 1 setting process]
Next, details of the big hit flag 1 setting process (A3402) in the special figure 1 variation start process will be described. FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the big hit flag 1 setting process.

The game control device 100 first saves the deviation information in the small hit flag area (A3601) and saves the deviation information in the big hit flag 1 area (A3602). Next, a big hit random number is loaded from the special figure 1 big hit random number storage area (for holding number 1) and prepared (A3603), and the special figure 1 big hit random number storage area (for holding number 1) is cleared to 0. (A3604). The reserved number 1 is an area for storing information (random numbers, etc.) about the special figure starting storage having the earliest digestion order (here, the earliest of the special figures 1). After that, a jackpot determination process of determining whether or not it is a jackpot is executed depending on whether or not the prepared jackpot random number value matches the jackpot determination value (A3605).

When the determination result of the jackpot determination process (A3605) is a jackpot (the result of A3606 is “Y”), the game control device 100 overwrites the jackpot information in the jackpot flag 1 area where the deviation information is saved in step A3602. Save (A3607), and end the jackpot flag 1 setting process. On the other hand, when the determination result of the big hit determination process (A3605) is not a big hit (the result of A3606 is “N”), whether or not the prepared big hit random number value matches the small hit determination value is a small hit. A small hit determination process for determining whether or not is executed (A3608).

When the determination result of the small hit determination process (A3608) is a small hit (the result of A3609 is “Y”), the game control device 100 sends the small hit information to the small hit flag area in which the deviation information is saved in step A3601. The data is overwritten and saved (A3610), and the jackpot flag 1 setting process ends. On the other hand, if the result of the small hit determination process (A3608) is not a small hit (the result of A3609 is "N"), the big hit flag 1 is set while the deviation information is saved in both the big hit flag 1 area and the small hit flag area. The process ends. As described above, in the present embodiment, the result of the special figure 1 variable display game is any one of “big hit”, “small hit”, and “outfall”.
[Big hit flag 2 setting process]
Next, details of the big hit flag 2 setting process (A3502) in the special figure 2 variation start process will be described. FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the big hit flag 2 setting process. In this process, the same process as the process of the big hit flag 1 setting process shown in FIG. 20 is performed for the second starting memory.

The game control device 100 first saves the deviation information in the big hit flag 2 area (A3701). Next, a big hit random number is loaded from the special figure 2 big hit random number storage area (for holding number 1) and prepared (A3702), and the special figure 2 big hit random number storage area (for holding number 1) is cleared to 0. (A3703). The reserved number 1 is an area for storing information (random numbers and the like) about the special figure starting storage in which the digestion order is the earliest (here, the earliest in the special figure 2). Then, a jackpot determination process for determining whether or not it is a jackpot depending on whether or not the prepared jackpot random number value matches the jackpot determination value (A3704).

When the determination result of the jackpot determination process (A3704) is a jackpot (the result of A3705 is “Y”), the gaming control device 100 overwrites the jackpot information in the jackpot flag 2 area where the deviation information is saved in step A3701. It saves (A3706) and ends the jackpot flag 2 setting process. On the other hand, when the determination result of the big hit determination process (A3704) is not a big hit (the result of A3705 is "N"), the big hit flag 2 setting process is terminated while the deviation information is saved in the big hit flag 2. As described above, in the present embodiment, the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is any one of "big hit" and "off".

[Big hit determination processing]
Next, the details of the jackpot determination processing (A3605, A3704) in the jackpot flag 1 setting processing, the jackpot flag 2 setting processing, and the like will be described. FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the big hit determination process. The big hit judging process is a process common to the big hit judging processes in other processes executed during the timer interrupt process, and is also executed in step A3004 of the special figure reservation information judging process.

The game control device 100 first sets a table of upper limit determination values (upper limit determination value table) corresponding to probability setting values (A3801). The upper limit judgment value table defines upper limit judgment values according to probability setting values for each of the high probability state and the low probability state. Then, the lower limit judgment value of the big hit judgment value is set (A3802), and it is judged whether or not the value of the target big hit random number is less than the lower limit judgment value (A3803). The big hit means that the big hit random number matches the big hit determination value. The big hit judgment value is a plurality of consecutive values, and when the big hit random number is greater than or equal to the lower limit judgment value, which is the lower limit value of the big hit judgment value, and less than or equal to the upper limit judgment value, which is the upper limit value of the big hit judgment value. , Determined to be a big hit.

When the value of the target big hit random number is less than the lower limit judgment value (the result of A3803 is “Y”), the game control device 100 sets a deviation (other than big hit) as the judgment result (A3808), and ends the big hit judgment process. To do.

Further, when the value of the big hit random number is not less than the lower limit judgment value (the result of A3803 is “N”), the game control device 100 judges whether or not the big hit occurrence probability is in a high probability state (probability change state). (A3804). If it is in the high probability state (result of A3804 is “Y”), the upper limit judgment value table is used to set the upper limit judgment value in the high probability corresponding to the probability setting value (A3805). On the other hand, if it is not in the high probability state (result of A3804 is “N”), the upper limit determination value table is used to set the upper limit determination value in the low probability corresponding to the probability setting value (A3806).

After setting the upper limit determination value of the value of the big hit random number, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the value of the target big hit random number is larger than the upper limit determination value (A3807). When the value of the big hit random number is larger than the upper limit judgment value (the result of A3807 is “Y”), a deviation (other than the big hit) is set as the judgment result (A3808). On the other hand, when the value of the big hit random number is not larger than the upper limit judgment value (the result of A3807 is “N”), the big hit is set as the judgment result (A3809). When the determination result is set, the jackpot determination process ends.

[Small hit judgment processing]
Next, the details of the small hit determination process (A3608) in the big hit flag 1 setting process will be described. FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the small hit determination process. The small hit determination processing is common to the small hit determination processing in other processing executed during the timer interrupt processing, and is also executed in step A3009 of the special figure reservation information determination processing.

The game control device 100 first sets a small hit upper limit determination value corresponding to the probability setting value (A3901). Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the big hit random number of the target (special figure 1) is less than the small hit lower limit determination value (A3902). The small hit means that the big hit random number matches the small hit determination value. The small hit judgment value is a series of multiple values, and the big hit random number is greater than or equal to the small hit lower limit judgment value, which is the lower limit value of the small hit judgment value, and the upper limit of the small hit judgment value, which is the upper limit value. When it is less than or equal to the determination value, it is determined to be a small hit.

As a matter of course, the range of the small hit judgment value (between the small hit lower limit judgment value and the small hit upper limit judgment value) is the same as the above big hit judgment in order to avoid that the same special figure variable display game result is a small hit and a big hit. It does not overlap with the value range (between the lower judgment value and the upper judgment value). In this embodiment, the small hit random number is not independently provided, and the big hit random number is also used for the small hit determination, but it is also possible to provide a unique small hit random number.

When the value of the big hit random number of the target (special figure 1) is less than the small hit lower limit judgment value (the result of A3902 is “Y”), the game control device 100 sets the deviation as the judgment result (A3904), and the small hit. The determination process ends.

Further, when the value of the big hit random number is not less than the small hit lower limit judgment value (the result of A3902 is “N”), the value of the big hit random number of the target (special figure 1) is the small hit upper limit judgment value. It is determined whether or not it is larger (A3903). When the value of the big hit random number is larger than the small hit upper limit judgment value (the result of A3903 is “Y”), the deviation is set as the judgment result (A3904). On the other hand, when the value of the big hit random number is not larger than the small hit upper limit judgment value (the result of A3903 is “N”), the small hit is set as the judgment result (A3905). When the determination result is set, the small hit determination process ends.

[Big hit probability, small hit probability]
24(A), (B), and (C) show the big hit probability and the small hit probability of the special figure variation display game determined as a result of the above-described big hit judgment processing (FIG. 22) and small hit judgment processing (FIG. 23). It is a table illustrated for each setting (each set value).

The example of FIG. 24A shows a case where the big hit probability and the small hit probability are different for each setting (each set value). The big hit probability (at low probability and high probability) and the small hit probability become higher as the set value becomes larger (higher setting), and the larger the set value, the more easily the big hit occurs, which is advantageous to the player. The jackpot probability is obtained by dividing the difference between the upper limit determination value and the lower limit determination value in FIG. 22 by the range of the value of the jackpot random number. The big hit probability can be changed according to the set value by changing the lower limit judgment value or the range of the value of the big hit random number in addition to the upper limit judgment value in accordance with the set value. In another example, only one of the big hit probability at the time of low probability and the big hit probability at the time of high probability may be configured to be higher as the set value becomes larger. Since the big hit probability and the small hit probability change according to the setting (setting value), the player has the pleasure of estimating the setting (setting value) from the big hit probability and the small hit probability, and the interest of the game is improved.

In the example of FIG. 24B, the big hit probability and the small hit probability of the settings 1, 2, 3 (setting values 1, 2, 3) and the settings 4, 5, 6 (setting values 4, 5, 6) are the same. It is set. In the settings 1 to 3 or the settings 4 to 6, the big hit probability and the small hit probability increase as the set value increases (the setting becomes higher). In the example of FIG. 24B, it is more difficult for the player to estimate the setting (setting value) from the big hit probability and the small hit probability, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired.

In the example of FIG. 24C, the big hit probability (at low probability and high probability) and the small hit probability are the same regardless of the setting (setting value). In this case, the player will estimate the setting (setting value) from other setting discriminating elements.

Other setting determination factors include the probability of sudden change (described later), the number of continuation of normal electric power support after the end of the big hit (described later), the number of times the ST machine continues in the probability variation state, the number of jackpot rounds (upper limit number of rounds), and There are a variation pattern (variation time value) of the figure variation display game, various times set in the special figure game processing (stop display time, fanfare time, etc.), and the like. If the probability that the predetermined contents of these setting discrimination elements are selected is made different for each setting value, the player can estimate the setting value from these setting discrimination elements.

[Special map 1 stop symbol setting process]
Next, details of the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process (A3403) in the special figure 1 variation start process will be described. FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not the big hit flag 1 is a big hit (A4001), and if it is a big hit (the result of A4001 is “Y”), the special figure 1 big hit symbol random number storage area (for the number of holding 1) ), a big hit symbol random number is loaded (A4002). Next, the special figure 1 big hit design table is set (A4003).

Subsequently, the stop symbol number corresponding to the loaded jackpot symbol random number is acquired and saved in the special symbol 1 stop symbol number area (A4004). By this processing, the type of special result (type of big hit) is selected.

After that, the game control device 100 sets the special figure 1 big hit stop symbol information table (A4005), acquires the stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number, and saves it in the stop symbol pattern area (A4006). The stop symbol pattern is for setting a stop symbol on the special symbol indicator (here, the special symbol 1 indicator 51) or a stop symbol on the display device 41. Next, the round number upper limit value information corresponding to the stopped symbol number is acquired and saved in the round number upper limit value information area (A4007).

Next, the game control device 100 acquires the time reduction determination data corresponding to the stop symbol number and saves it in the time reduction determination data area (A4008). The time reduction determination data includes information on the presence/absence of the universal communication support state (time saving state) after the big hit state ends.

After that, the game control device 100 saves the effect mode transition information corresponding to the stop symbol pattern and the probability state (A4009). Then, the game control device 100 prepares a decorative special figure 1 command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern (A4018).

The effect mode transition information is information for changing the effect mode. The effect mode transition information here is set in the case of a big hit (the result of A4001 is “Y”) and is used in the big hit ending process. That is, the effect mode can be changed by the effect mode shift information when the big hit occurs. In addition, as described above, the production mode transition information is set according to the stop pattern pattern of the big hit (whether it is a probability variation big hit pattern/normal big hit pattern etc.), so the big hit pattern type (big hit type) ends. The transfer destination of the effect mode to be transferred later will change. Further, since the effect mode transition information is set according to the probability state as described above, the destination of the effect mode is also influenced by whether or not the special figure high probability state (probability change state) is currently in progress.

On the other hand, when the big hit flag 1 is not a big hit (the result of A4001 is “N”), the game control device 100 determines whether the small hit flag is a small hit (A4010), and when it is a small hit (the result of A4011). Is “Y”), and the small hit symbol random number is loaded from the special figure 1 small hit symbol random number storage area (for the number of reservations 1) (A4011). Next, the special figure 1 small hit design table is set (A4012), the stop design number corresponding to the loaded small hit design random number is acquired, and saved in the special design 1 stop design number area (A4013).

After that, the game control device 100 acquires the stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number, saves it in the stop symbol pattern area (A4014), and saves the effect mode transition information corresponding to the stop symbol pattern (A4015). The effect mode transition information here is set in the case of a small hit (the result of A4010 is “Y”), and the effect mode can be changed when the small hit occurs. Then, a decorative special figure command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared (A4018).

If the small hit flag is not a small hit (the result of A4010 is “N”), the stop symbol number at the time of falling is saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol number area (A4016), and the stop symbol pattern is stopped. It is saved in the area (A4017), and a decoration special figure command corresponding to the stop pattern is prepared (A4018). By the above processing, the stop symbol corresponding to the result of the special figure variation display game is set.

After that, the decoration special drawing command is saved in the decoration special drawing command area (A4019), and effect command setting processing is executed (A4020). This decorative special figure command is transmitted to the effect control device 300. Then, the symbol data corresponding to the stopped symbol number is saved in the test signal output data area (A4021), the special figure 1 big hit symbol random number storage area (for the number of reserved 1) is cleared to 0 (A4022), and the special figure 1 small hit. The symbol random number storage area (for holding number 1) is cleared to 0 (A4023), and the special symbol 1 stop symbol setting process is ended.

[Special figure 2 stop symbol setting process]
Next, the details of the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process (A3503) in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process will be described. FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not the big hit flag 2 is a big hit (A4101), and if it is a big hit (the result of A4101 is "Y"), the special figure 2 big hit symbol random number storage area (for the number of holding 1) ), a big hit symbol random number is loaded (A4102). Next, the special figure 2 big hit design table is set (A4103). Subsequently, the stop symbol number corresponding to the loaded jackpot symbol random number is acquired and saved in the special symbol 2 stop symbol number area (A4104). By this processing, the type of special result (type of big hit) is selected.

After that, the game control device 100 sets the special figure 2 big hit stop symbol information table (A4105), acquires the stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number, and saves it in the stop symbol pattern area (A4106). The stop symbol pattern is for setting a stop symbol on the special symbol display device (here, the special symbol 2 display device 52) or a stop symbol on the display device 41. Next, the round number upper limit value information corresponding to the stopped symbol number is acquired and saved in the round number upper limit value information area (A4107).

Next, the game control device 100 acquires the time reduction determination data corresponding to the stop symbol number and saves it in the time reduction determination data area (A4108). The time reduction determination data includes information on the presence/absence of the universal communication support state (time saving state) after the big hit state ends.

After that, the game control device 100 saves the effect mode transition information corresponding to the stop symbol pattern and the probability state (A4109). The effect mode transition information here is set in the case of a big hit (the result of A4101 is “Y”), and is used in the big hit ending process. Then, the game control device 100 prepares a decorative special figure 2 command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern (A4112).

On the other hand, if the big hit flag 2 is not a big hit (the result of A4101 is "N"), the game control device 100 saves the stop symbol number at the time of the loss in the special symbol 2 stop symbol number area (A4110), and the loss stop symbol pattern. Is saved in the stop design pattern area (A4111), and a decoration special command corresponding to the stop design pattern is prepared (A4112). By the above processing, the stop symbol corresponding to the result of the special figure variation display game is set.

After that, the decoration special drawing command is saved in the decoration special drawing command area (A4113), and effect command setting processing is executed (A4114). This decorative special figure command is transmitted to the effect control device 300. Then, the symbol data corresponding to the stop symbol number is saved in the test signal output data area (A4115), and the special figure 2 big hit symbol random number storage area (for the number of reserved 1) is cleared to 0 (A4116), the special figure 2 stop symbol. The setting process ends.

[Example of special design jackpot design distribution]
FIG. 27 is a table exemplifying, for each setting, the big hit symbol distribution (big hit breakdown) of the special figure variation display game controlled by the special figure game process described above.

FIG. 27 exemplifies jackpot symbol numbers 1 to 6 (stop symbol numbers) showing types of jackpots and jackpot symbol tables defining the distribution rate thereof for each setting. As shown in FIG. 27, the distribution ratio of the big hit symbol number (kind of big hit, symbols 1 to 6) can be changed according to the setting (setting value), and the probability variation rush rate becomes higher as the setting value becomes larger, and the player can Be advantageous. The probability variation plunge rate is the proportion of the probability variation big hit symbols to all the symbols that the probability state after the jackpot is high has a high probability. Moreover, the number of times of the usual electric jackpot support after the big hit ends, especially for the normal big hit (the probability state after the big hit ends is low probability), the larger the set value in the setting 1 to 3 or the setting 4 to 6. growing. The setting 1, 2, 3 (setting values 1, 2, 3) and the setting 4, 5, 6 (setting values 4, 5, 6) are set to have the same number of times of universal power support. Note that the ST machine can be configured such that the number of continuation of the probability variation state is increased as the set value is increased.

In FIG. 27, the number of rounds (round number upper limit value, for example, 2R, 6R, 16R) given in one big hit does not change with respect to the set value, but the number of rounds is increased as the set value increases. Various configurations are also possible. Further, in FIG. 27, it is easier to give a larger number of rounds to the big hit of the special figure 2 variable display game than the big hit of the special figure 1 variable display game. It is more advantageous to the player than the 1-variation display game.

Note that, similar to FIG. 24(C), regardless of the setting (setting value), it is also possible to make the big hit symbol distribution (big hit breakdown) the same.

[Processing during fluctuation of special map]
Next, details of the special figure changing process (A2609) in the special figure game process will be described. FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure changing process.

The game control device 100 first prepares a symbol stop command (special figure 1 symbol stop command or special figure 2 symbol stop command) corresponding to the changing symbol as an effect command (A4701) and executes an effect command setting process. (A4702). The changing symbol can be determined from the variable symbol determination flag (special figure 1 variation flag or special figure 2 variation flag). Upon receiving the symbol stop command, the effect control device 300 stops the corresponding decorative special figure variable display game (decorative special figure 1 variable display game or decorative special figure 2 variable display game).

Next, the game control device 100 sets the display time corresponding to the stop symbol pattern number indicating the stop symbol pattern (A4703), and saves the set display time in the special figure game processing timer area (A4704). In the case of the present embodiment, 600 msec is commonly set as the display time when the stop symbol pattern is the disengaged symbol pattern, the big hit symbol pattern, or the small hit symbol pattern.

Next, the game control device 100 sets the process number "2" related to the process during special figure display (A4705), and saves the process number in the special figure game process number area (A4706).

Next, the game control device 100 saves the signal regarding the end of fluctuation of the special figure 1 in the test signal output data area (A4707), and further saves the signal regarding the end of fluctuation of the special figure 2 in the test signal output data area ( A4708).

Next, the game control device 100 uses a control timer initial value (for example, 256 msec) in the symbol determination frequency signal control timer area used when outputting a symbol determination frequency signal relating to the number of executions of the special figure variation display game to the external information terminal. Is saved (A4709).

After that, the game control device 100, as information for controlling the special figure 1 variable display game on the special figure 1 display 51, displays a stop flag related to a fluctuation stop on the special figure 1 display 51 in the special figure 1 change control flag area. Save to (A4710). Further, as information for controlling the special figure 2 variation display game on the special figure 2 display device 52, a stop flag related to a variation stop on the special figure 2 display device 52 is saved in the special figure 2 variation control flag area (A4711). , The special figure changing process transition setting process ends.

[Design fluctuation control processing]
FIG. 29 shows the symbol variation control process (A2620, A2622) in the above-mentioned special figure game process, and the symbol variation control process in the later-described universal figure game process. The symbol variation control processing is the control of the variation of the special symbol (first special symbol, the second special symbol, etc.) and the normal symbol (general symbol) of the variable display game in the variable display section of the collective display device 50, and the special symbol and the ordinary symbol. It is a process of setting display data of symbols.

The game control device 100 first checks whether the fluctuation control flag applied to the symbol to be controlled (for example, one of the first special drawing, the second special drawing, and the general drawing) is changing (A7501). In the case of the present embodiment, on the fluctuation control table prepared in Step A2619, Step A2621, and Step A7614, the lower address of the fluctuation control flag area, the initial value of the blink control timer, the fluctuation symbol number upper limit judgment value, and the display table 2 ( Addresses for stop) and addresses for display table 1 (for fluctuation) are defined.

The game control device 100 acquires the symbol display table (for variation) corresponding to the symbol of the control target, when the variation flag related to the symbol of the control target is varying (the result of A7502 is “Y”) (A7503). ). In the case of the present embodiment, the address of the symbol display table (for fluctuation, display table 1) is defined on the fluctuation control table prepared in step A2619, step A2621, and step A7614.

Next, the game control device 100 updates the blinking control timer to be controlled by -1 (A7504), determines whether the updated blinking control timer is 0 (A7505), and the updated blinking control timer is If it is not 0 (result of A7505 is "N"), display data corresponding to the value of the variable symbol number area of the control target is acquired (A7508). Then, the acquired display data is saved in the target segment area (A7511), and the symbol variation control process ends.

If the blink control timer after updating is 0 (the result of A7505 is "Y"), the blink control timer initial value corresponding to the target blink timer area is saved (A7506), and the variable symbol number of the control target. Is updated by +1 in the corresponding range (A7507), and the display data corresponding to the value of the variable symbol number area of the control target is acquired (A7508). Then, the acquired display data is saved in the target segment area (A7511), and the symbol variation control process ends.

On the other hand, the game control device 100 acquires the symbol display table (for stop) corresponding to the symbol of the control target when the changing flag related to the symbol of the control target is not changing (result of A7502 is “N”). (A7509). In the case of the present embodiment, the address of the symbol display table (for stop, display table 2) is defined on the variation control table prepared in step A2619, step A2621, and step A7614. Next, the display data corresponding to the value of the stop symbol number area of the control target is acquired (A7510), the acquired display data is saved in the target segment area (A7511), and the symbol variation control process is ended.

As the blinking control timer initial value saved in step A7506, the value defined in the variation control table prepared according to the game to be processed is saved. Here, a value corresponding to 100 msec is defined as the blink control timer initial value. This blinking control timer initial value is the interval at which the lighting pattern is updated in the collective display device 50 during the varying time.

The corresponding range in step A7507 is defined by the variable symbol number upper limit determination value defined in the variable control table prepared according to the game to be processed. When the variable symbol number upper limit value is reached by updating the variable symbol number by +1 in step A7507, the variable symbol number is set to 0, and the variable symbol number is 0 (variable symbol number upper limit judgment value -1 ) Is sequentially updated within the range. In steps A7508 and A7511, the display data (lighting pattern) corresponding to the variable symbol number is acquired and displayed, and the lighting pattern is updated (changed) a number of times equal to the variable symbol number upper limit determination value. As a result of performing the above, the display for one cycle is repeated.

In this way, by defining the blinking control timer initial value and the variable symbol number upper limit value in the variation control table prepared according to the game to be processed, the interval and the display for updating the lighting pattern in the collective display device 50 make one round. The number of updates to be performed can be set for each game.

[Public game processing]
Next, details of the universal figure game process (A1313) in the timer interrupt process will be described. FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the universal figure game process. In the general figure game process, the input of the gate switch 34a is monitored, the entire process relating to the general figure variable display game is controlled, the display of the general figure is set, and the like.

The game control device 100 first executes a gate switch monitoring process for monitoring the input from the gate switch 34a (A7601). Details of the gate switch monitoring process will be described later.

Subsequently, the game control device 100 executes the ordinary electric prize winning switch monitoring process of monitoring the input from the starting opening 2 switch 37a (A7602).

Next, the gaming control device 100, if the universal figure game processing timer is not 0, updates -1 (subtracts only 1) (A7603). The minimum value of the universal figure game processing timer is set to 0. Then, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the value of the universal figure game processing timer has become 0 (A7604).

When the value of the universal figure game processing timer is 0 (the result of A7604 is “Y”), that is, when the time has expired or has already expired, the game control device 100 sets the universal figure game processing number. The universal figure game sequence branch table referred to in order to branch to the corresponding process is set in the register (A7605).

Further, the game control device 100 acquires the branch destination address of the process corresponding to the universal figure game process number based on the set universal figure game sequence branch table (A7606). Then, a subroutine call by the universal figure game process number is performed to execute a game branch process corresponding to the universal figure game process number (A7607).

When the game process number is “0” in step A7607, the game control device 100 monitors the start of fluctuation of the general figure fluctuation display game, and sets the fluctuation start of the general figure fluctuation display game and the setting of effects, The ordinary figure normal process for setting information necessary for performing the ordinary figure change process is executed (A7608). The details of the ordinary figure ordinary process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Further, when the game process number is "1" in step A7607, the game control device 100 executes the general figure changing process for setting information necessary for performing the general figure displaying process ( A7609). For example, in the process of changing the figure, in order to shift to the process of displaying figure, the game processing number is set to "2" and saved in the figure game processing number area. Save to processing timer area.

Further, when the game processing number is “2” in step A7607, if the result of the universal figure variation display game is a hit, the game control device 100 determines whether or not it is in the time saving state. Processing for displaying a general figure is performed to set the opening time and information necessary for performing the processing for hitting a general figure (A7610). For example, in the processing for displaying a figure, in the case where the result of the figure changing display game is a hit, in order to shift to the processing for hitting a figure, "3" is set as the game processing number and the figure processing number area is displayed. On the other hand, in the case of the loss, the game processing number is set to “0” and the game processing number is saved in the general/universal game processing number area in order to shift to the normal/universal processing routine processing.

If the game process number is “3” in step A7607, the game control device 100 sets the information necessary for continuing the process of hitting the normal figure or performing the normal ball remaining ball process. The middle process in the figure is executed (A7611). For example, in the ordinary figure hitting process, after setting the normal variation winning device 37 for a predetermined number of times, the game process number is set to "4" in order to shift to the ordinary ball remaining ball process. Save to the universal figure game processing number area.

Further, when the game process number is "4" in step A7607, the game control device 100 executes a normal electric ball remaining ball process for setting the information necessary for performing the per-universal-diagram end process (A7612). ). For example, in the normal ball remaining ball process, in order to shift to the general-universal-game end process, "5" is set as the game process number and saved in the general-university game process number area, and the general-universal game ending time Save to processing timer area.

Further, when the game process number is "5" in step A7607, the game control device 100 executes the universal figure per end process for setting the information necessary for performing the ordinary process normal process (A7608). (A7613). For example, in the universal figure ending process, "0" is set as the game process number and the game is saved in the universal figure game process number area in order to shift to the regular figure normal process.

After that, the game control device 100 prepares a universal figure variation control table for controlling the variation of the regular symbols by the universal figure display 53 (A7614). After that, the symbol variation control process relating to the control of the variation of the ordinary symbol by the universal symbol display 53 is executed (A7615), and the universal symbol game process is ended.

On the other hand, when the value of the universal figure game processing timer is not 0 (result of A7604 is “N”), that is, when the time is not up, the game control device 100 executes the processing of step A7614 and subsequent steps.

[Gate switch monitoring process]
FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the gate switch monitoring process. The gate switch monitoring process is executed in step A7601 in the universal figure game process shown in FIG.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not there is an input to the gate switch 34a (A7701). Then, when there is an input to the gate switch 34a (result of A7701 is "Y"), it is determined whether or not the game state is right-handed (A7702). The gaming state of hitting to the right is a big hit state, a small hit state, and a time saving state (normal power support state). If the game state is to hit the right side (result of A7702 is "Y"), the process proceeds to step A7705. If the game state is not for right hitting (the result of A7702 is "N"), a left hitting instruction notification command (left hitting instruction command) is prepared as an effect command (A7703), and effect command setting processing is executed (A7704). The effect control device 300 that has received the left-handing instruction notification command executes the notification (warning) for instructing left-handing by the display device 41 or the like.

Next, the game control device 100 obtains the number of reserved universal figures and determines whether the number of reserved universal figures is less than an upper limit value (for example, 4) (A7705). When the number of reserved universal figures is less than the upper limit value (the result of A7705 is “Y”), the game control device 100 updates the number of reserved universal figures by +1 (A7706), and corresponds to the number of reserved universal figures after the update. Then, the address of the random number storage area is calculated (A7707). Then, the hit random number is extracted and saved in the hit random number storage area of the RWM (A7708), the hit symbol random number is extracted and saved in the hit symbol random number storage area (A7709), and the gate switch monitoring process is ended.

On the other hand, in the game control device 100, when there is no input to the gate switch 34a (result of A7701 is “N”), or when it is determined that the number of universal figure reservations is not less than the upper limit value (result of A7705 is “ N"), the gate switch monitoring process is terminated.

[Usually processed normally]
Next, details of the ordinary figure ordinary process (A7608) in the ordinary figure game process will be described. FIG. 32 is a flow chart showing the procedure of a normal figure normal process.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not the universal figure reservation number is 0 (A7901). If the number of reserved figures is not 0 (the result of A7901 is "N"), the random number is loaded from the random number storage area for ordinary figures of RWM (for the number of reserved 1), and the random number storage area for symbols of RWM is Load a random number per design from (for hold number 1), and clear 0 to the random number per random number storage area (for hold number 1) and per-university symbol random number storage area (for hold number 1) (A7902) ). Furthermore, whether or not the probability that a hit result in the universal figure fluctuation display game is higher than normal is in the high probability of being in a regular figure (during a high probability state), that is, whether it is a time-saving state (a state of the universal power support state). It is determined (A7903). Note that the probability of hitting a universal figure in the high probability is 250/251, and the probability of hitting a universal figure in the low probability is 0/251.

The game control device 100 sets the low probability lower limit judgment value (here, 251) which is the lower limit judgment value in the general figure low probability when the general figure high probability is not in progress (the result of A7903 is "N") (A7904). , If the figure high probability is in progress (result of A7903 is “Y”), the high probability lower limit judgment value (here, 1) which is the lower limit judgment value in the figure high probability is set (A7905), and step A7906 is executed. Move to processing.

The game control device 100 determines whether or not the hit random number is equal to or higher than the upper limit determination value (251 in this case) (A7906). It should be noted that the upper limit judgment value here is common between the high probability of universal figure and the low probability of regular figure. If the hit random number is greater than or equal to the upper limit judgment value (result of A7906 is “Y”), that is, if there is no match, the process proceeds to step A7908. When the hit random number is less than the upper limit judgment value (result of A7906 is "N"), it is determined whether the hit random number is less than the lower limit judgment value (A7907).

If the hit random number is less than the lower limit judgment value (result of A7907 is "Y"), that is, if the hit random number, the game controller 100 saves the hit information in the hit flag area (A7908). Furthermore, the deviation stop symbol number is set as the universal figure stop symbol number (A7909), the deviation symbol information is saved in the general symbol stop symbol information area (A7910), and the process proceeds to step A7914.

If the hit random number is not less than the lower limit judgment value (the result of A7907 is “N”), that is, in the case of hit, the hit information is saved in the hit flag area (A7911), and the hit symbol random number is loaded. The corresponding hit stop symbol number is set (A7912), and the hit stop symbol information corresponding to the hit stop symbol number is saved in the normal symbol stop symbol information area (A7913), and the process proceeds to step A7914. There may be several types of hit stop symbols, and there are two in this embodiment.

Next, the game control device 100 saves the stop symbol number in the universal symbol stop symbol area (A7914), saves the stop symbol number in the test signal output data area (A7915), and shifts the random symbol per random symbol storage area. (A7916) After clearing the vacant area after the shift to 0 (A7917), the number of reserved universal figures is updated by -1 (A7918).

That is, with the execution of the universal figure fluctuation display game for the oldest universal figure hold number 1, the ranks of the universal figure hold numbers 2 to 4 that are on hold after the regular figure hold number 1 are advanced one by one. By this process, the values for the number of reserved figures of 2 for public figures in the random number storage area per general figure to the number of retained figures of 4 for general figures are moved from the number of reserved figures of 1 for general figures in the random number storage area for one figure to 3 for the number of retained figures Will be done. Then, the value for the number of reserved universal figures of 4 in the random number storage area per universal figure is cleared, and the number of reserved universal figures is decremented by one.

Next, the game control device 100 extracts the variation pattern random number 3 (A7919), sets the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern random number 3, and saves it in the universal figure game processing timer area (A7920). For example, the variation time is divided into 500 msec with a probability of 200/256, 1500 msec with a probability of 40/256, and 3000 msec with a probability of 16/256. Then, the process shift setting process during normal figure change is executed (A7921), and the normal day routine process ends. For example, in the universal figure changing process transition setting process, "1" is set as the process number for transitioning to the universal figure changing process, and the process number is saved in the universal figure game process number area. Then, the blinking control timer initial value (for example, 100 msec), which is the initial value of the blinking cycle timer of the universal figure display, is saved in the universal figure blinking control timer area, and the initial value (here 0) is stored in the universal figure variation symbol number area. To save.

Further, when the number of reserved universal figures is 0 (result of A7901 is “Y”), the game control device 100 sets “0” as a processing number for shifting to regular processing of regular figures (A7922). , The processing number is saved in the universal figure game processing number area (A7923). After that, the flag during the fraud monitoring period is saved in the flagging fraud monitoring period flag area (A7924), and the ordinary figure normal processing is ended.

[External information editing process]
Next, the details of the external information editing process (A1317) in the timer interrupt process will be described. FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing the procedure of external information editing processing. FIG. 33A shows the first half of the external information editing process, and FIG. 33B shows the second half of the external information editing process. In the external information editing process, the information based on the monitoring results of the payout command transmitting process (A1311), the winning opening switch/state monitoring process (A1307), the magnet fraud monitoring process (A1315), and the board radio fraud monitoring process (A1316). A process of creating information to be output to an external device such as a collection terminal or an amusement hall internal management device or a test shooting test device and setting the information in an output buffer is performed.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not a glass frame opening error is occurring (A9501). If the glass frame opening error is not occurring (result of A9501 is “N”), it is determined whether a body frame opening error (front frame opening error) is occurring (A9502). When the main frame opening error is not occurring (the result of A9502 is "N"), the OFF data of the door/frame opening signal is saved in the external information output data area (A9503), and the OFF data of the security signal is output as the external information output data. Save to area (A9504).

When the glass frame opening error is occurring (result of A9501 is “Y”) or the main frame opening error is occurring (result of A9502 is “Y”), the game control device 100 The ON data of the frame opening signal is saved in the external information output data area (A9505), and the ON data of the gaming machine error status signal is saved in the test signal output data area (A9506).

After the steps A9504 and A9506, the gaming control device 100 updates -1 if the security signal control timer is not 0 (A9507), and determines whether the security signal control timer is 0 (whether the time has expired). The determination is made (A9508). The initial value of the security signal control timer is set to a predetermined time (for example, 256 msec) when the data stored in the RAM is initialized by operating the initialization switch (setting value change switch 102) or when the setting change is completed. (Main processing A1044, A2419). Then, the security signal control timer is counted from the time of RAM initialization or the end of setting change. The initial value of the security signal control timer is set when the setting variable switch (setting change mode) or the setting confirmation state (setting confirmation mode) is entered by operating the setting key switch 93 or the setting value change switch 102 ( A1037 and A2507 in the main process), the probability setting value changing flag is set During the setting change (during setting change state) or the probability setting value confirmation mode flag is set, the security signal is turned on. You may make it output all the time. The security signal control timer is set to 0 when the probability setting value changed flag is set (A2414), not when the probability setting value changing flag is cleared (A2418), and the security signal is output. A configuration that terminates is also possible.

When the security signal control timer is not 0 (result of A9508 is “N”), the game control device 100 saves the ON data of the security signal in the external information output data area (A9509), and proceeds to the processing of step A9510. That is, the fact that the data stored in the RAM has been initialized is output as external information.

When the security signal control timer is 0 (result of A9508 is “Y”), the game control device 100 determines whether or not a magnet malfunction is occurring (A9510). It should be noted that it can be determined that the magnet malfunction is occurring when the magnet malfunction flag is saved in the magnet malfunction flag area. When the magnet malfunction is not occurring (the result of A9510 is “N”), it is further determined whether the board radio wave malfunction is occurring (A9511). It should be noted that it can be determined that the board radio wave irregularity is occurring when the board radio wave irregularity flag is saved in the board radio wave irregularity flag area.

When the board radio wave irregularity is not occurring (result of A9511 is “N”), the game control device 100 further determines whether or not frame radio wave irregularity is occurring (A9512). If the frame radio wave irregularity is not occurring (the result of A9512 is “N”), it is further determined whether or not the universal communication irregularity is occurring (A9513). In the case where the ordinary telephone fraud is not occurring (the result of A9513 is “N”), it is further determined whether or not the special winning opening fraud is occurring (A9514). In addition, when the fraudulent-prize-winning flag is saved in the fraudulent flag area by the fraud & prize-winning monitoring process, it can be determined that the big-prize-winning fraud is occurring. When the special winning opening fraud is not occurring (result of A9514 is “N”), it is determined whether a switch abnormality error is occurring (A9515).

When the switch abnormality error (the above-mentioned switch abnormality 1 error) such as the disconnection of the switch connector is occurring (the result of A9515 is “N”), the gaming control device 100 tests the off data of the gaming machine error status signal as a test signal. The data is saved in the output data area (A9516). When a switch abnormality error is occurring (result of A9515 is "Y"), ON data of the gaming machine error status signal is saved in the test signal output data area (A9518).

On the other hand, in the gaming control device 100, when the magnet illegality is occurring (A9510 result is “Y”), when the board radio wave irregularity is occurring (A9511 result is “Y”), the frame radio wave irregularity is occurring. In the middle (the result of A9512 is “Y”), when the ordinary telephone fraud is occurring (the result of A9513 is “Y”), or when the special winning opening fraud is occurring (the result of A9514 is “ Y”), the ON data of the security signal is saved in the external information output data area (A9517), and the ON data of the gaming machine error status signal is saved in the test signal output data area (A9518). Depending on the setting of on-data of the security signal, the security signal is output as external information to an external device (such as a hall computer).

After the steps A9516 and A9518, the game control device 100 executes a main prize ball signal editing process for setting information regarding the number of prize balls to be paid out (A9519). Subsequently, the game control device 100 executes a starting opening signal editing process for editing the winning opening winning signal (A9520).

Next, the game control device 100, if the symbol fixed number control timer for controlling the output time of the information relating to the number of executions of the special figure variation display game is not 0, it is updated by -1 (A9521). The minimum value of the symbol determination number control timer is set to 0.

Then, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the value of the symbol fixed number control timer is 0 (A9522). When the value of the symbol determination frequency control timer is 0 (the result of A9522 is “Y”), that is, when the time has expired or has already expired, the OFF data of the symbol determination frequency signal is external information output data. The data is saved in the area (A9523), and the external information editing process ends.

Further, the game control device 100, when the value of the symbol determination number control timer is not 0 (the result of A9522 is “N”), that is, when the time is not up, the ON data of the symbol determination number signal is external information. The data is saved in the output data area (A9524), and the external information editing process ends.

[Display of batch display device during setting change]
FIG. 34 shows the display of each display unit of the collective display device 50 during the probability setting change (during the setting variable state in which the setting can be changed), that is, each light emitting unit (LED lamp D1-D18) of the collective display device 50. It is a figure explaining the light emission mode (mode of lighting/extinction).

During the probability setting change, the game control device 100 displays a predetermined display for the special figure variation display game of the collective display device 50, regardless of the state of the game machine 10 at the time of power-off before power-on (game state etc.). Is displayed on the display units 51 and 52. For example, even if the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed when the power is turned off before the power is turned on, the game control device 100 collectively displays a predetermined display during the probability setting change regardless of the state of the collective display device 50 when the power is turned off. It can be displayed on the display units 51 and 52 of the display device 50. Therefore, while the probability setting is being changed (setting change state), the probability setting is being changed by a predetermined display on the display parts 51 and 52 for the special figure variation display game which are easily visible from the front of the gaming machine 10, It can be suggested that the gaming machine 10 is in a state in which a game (for example, a variable display game) cannot be played.

In FIG. 34A, during changing the probability setting (during the setting variable state), a predetermined special figure variation display section 51 (7-segment LED lamp D1) for the special figure 1 variation display game of the collective display device 50 is provided with a predetermined value. As a display, the probability setting value (here, 6) is displayed. As described above, while the probability setting is being changed, the game machine 10 cannot perform a game (for example, a variable display game) by displaying a different display (a display different from the normal display) from the time when the fluctuation is stopped on the first special map variation display section 51. It can be clearly shown on the front of the gaming machine 10. It should be noted that the numbers 1 to 6 indicating the probability setting values are not used in the stop display when the fluctuation of the first special figure fluctuation display section 51 and the second special figure fluctuation display section 52 is stopped.

For example, the game control device 100 determines the third output port 135 and the third output port 135 based on the probability setting value display data (A2409) corresponding to the work probability setting value and the probability setting value display data (A2413) corresponding to the probability setting value. The output data may be output to the No. 4 output port 136, and the work probability setting value and the probability setting value may be lit or blinked on the first special figure variation display section 51 (LED lamp D1) (A1603- of output processing). A1608).

The probability setting value may be lit or blinked on the second special figure variable display section 52 (7-segment LED lamp D2) for the special figure 2 variable display game of the collective display device 50. Further, the probability setting value may be displayed in a lighted or blinking state by using both the first special figure variation display section 51 and the second special figure variation display section 52.

Further, even if the probability setting value is turned on or blinking by making the brightness weaker than usual so that it is difficult for a person who does not have the authority to change the setting to visually recognize the probability setting value in a place away from the gaming machine 10. Good.

In FIG. 34B, during the change of the probability setting, the changing information display indicating that the probability setting is being changed (during the setting change state) is displayed on the first special map fluctuation display portion 51 (LED lamp D1) as a predetermined display. (For example, the letter “P”) is displayed. In this way, during the probability setting change, the first special figure variation display section 51 displays a display different from that when the fluctuation is stopped (a display different from the normal display), thereby indicating that the gaming machine 10 is in a state in which the game cannot be played. It can be clearly shown on the front of 10. In addition, in the stop display when the fluctuation of the first special figure fluctuation display section 51 and the second special figure fluctuation display section 52 is stopped, the same identification information (special symbol) as the changing information display (for example, the letter “P”) is not used. I shall.

For example, when it is determined that the probability setting is being changed (the result of A2401 is “Y”), the game control device 100 outputs the output data regarding the changing information display to the third output port 135 and the fourth output port 136. May be executed (processing step is added to FIG. 10), and the changing information display may be displayed on the first special figure variation display portion 51 in a lighting or blinking manner (A1603-A1608 of the output processing). Further, for example, when the front frame 12 (main frame) is open and the setting key switch 93 is on (result of A1024 is “Y”), the game control device 100 sets a probability setting value changing flag. At the time (A1038), output data is output to the third output port 135 and the fourth output port 136, and the changing information display is lit or blinked on the first special view variation display portion 51 (LED lamp D1). May be.

The changing information display may be lit or blinking on the second special figure variable display section 52 (7-segment LED lamp D2) for the special figure 2 variable display game of the collective display device 50. Further, the changing information display may be displayed as a light or blink using both the first special figure variation display section 51 and the second special figure variation display section 52.

In FIG. 34C, during the probability setting change, the same display as the stop result (outcome result) of the variable display game other than the special result (other than the big hit) is displayed on the first special map variation display unit 51 as the predetermined display. .. In the present embodiment, the out-of-range result (outside pattern) is a display in which the central segment of the first special figure variation display portion 51 (7-segment LED lamp D1) is lit. Thus, by displaying a predetermined display on the first special figure variation display portion 51 during the probability setting change, it can be indicated on the front of the gaming machine 10 that the gaming machine 10 is not executing a game. Although the RAM area is cleared to 0 upon completion of the setting change (A2418), the initial result of the data displayed on the first special figure variation display unit 51 is displayed by displaying the result of the deviation (deviation pattern) during the probability setting change. In some cases, the value setting (A2419) may be unnecessary.

For example, when it is determined that the probability setting is being changed (the result of A2401 is “Y”), the game control device 100 is the result of the disconnection to the third output port 135 and the fourth output port 136 (the disconnection pattern). A process of generating output data related to display may be executed (a process step may be added to FIG. 10), and the display of the deviation result may be lit and displayed on the first special figure variation display portion 51 (A1603-A1608 of the output process). .. Further, for example, when the front frame 12 (main frame) is open and the setting key switch 93 is on (result of A1024 is “Y”), the game control device 100 sets a probability setting value changing flag. At some time (A1038), output data may be output to the third output port 135 and the fourth output port 136, and the display of the deviation result may be lit and displayed on the first special figure variation display portion 51 (LED lamp D1). ..

In addition, the display of the deviation result may be lit and displayed on the second special figure fluctuation display portion 52 (LED lamp D2) for the special figure 2 fluctuation display game of the collective display device 50. Further, the display of the deviation result may be lit and displayed using both the first special figure variation display section 51 and the second special figure variation display section 52.

In FIG. 34D, an unlit display is displayed as a predetermined display on the first special figure fluctuation display portion 51 (LED lamp D1) during the probability setting change. In this way, during the probability setting change, the first special figure variation display section 51 displays a display different from that when the fluctuation is stopped (a display different from the normal display), thereby indicating that the gaming machine 10 is in a state in which the game cannot be played. It can be clearly shown on the front of 10. In addition, in the stop display at the time of the fluctuation stop of the 1st special figure fluctuation display part 51 and the 2nd special figure fluctuation display part 52, an extinction display shall not be used.

For example, the game control device 100, until the probability setting value has been changed after the power is turned on (power supply is restored) (the result of A2406 is “Y”), the first output to the third output port 135 and the fourth output port 136. The output data for the figure variation display section 51 may not be generated, and the turn-off display may be displayed on the first special figure variation display section 51.

It should be noted that the second special figure variable display portion 52 (7-segment LED lamp D2) for the special figure 2 variable display game of the collective display device 50 may be turned off and displayed. Further, both the first special figure variation display portion 51 and the second special figure variation display portion 52 may be displayed in the off state.

34A to 34D described above, the LED lamps (for example, the LED lamps D3 to D18) other than the display units 51 and 52 (D1 and D2) for the special figure variation display game are turned off during the probability setting change. Alternatively, the animation may be displayed by turning on the light cyclically.

In FIG. 34E and FIG. 34F, while the probability setting is being changed, all the display units (that is, all the light emitting units: LED lamps D1 to D18) of the collective display device 50 are lit or blinked to display a predetermined display. The all-on display or all-blinking display is displayed on the collective display device 50. In this way, during the probability setting change, by displaying on the collective display device 50 a display different from that at the time of fluctuation stop (a display different from the normal display), the fact that the game machine 10 cannot play is displayed on the front of the game machine 10. Can be specified.

The all-blinking display in FIG. 34F is executed by repeating the all-off display and all-on display of the collective display device 50 at predetermined time intervals.

For example, when it is determined that the probability setting is being changed (result of A2401 is “Y”), the game control device 100 displays all lights or blinks on the third output port 135 and the fourth output port 136. The all-lighting display or all-blinking display may be displayed on the collective display device 50 by executing a process of generating output data regarding (output processing A1603-A1608). Further, for example, when the front frame 12 (main frame) is open and the setting key switch 93 is on (result of A1024 is “Y”), the game control device 100 sets a probability setting value changing flag. At some time (A1038), output data may be output to the third output port 135 and the fourth output port 136 to display the all-lit display or all-blinking display on the collective display device 50 (LED lamps D1-D18). ..

FIG. 34G shows another configuration example of the collective display device 50 of FIGS. 34A to 34F. In FIG. 34G, a performance display regarding the performance (spec) of the gaming machine 10 is displayed around the LED lamps D1 to D18 of the collective display device 50. Although the performance display is printed, it may be displayed by emitting light from an LED lamp or a liquid crystal display. As performance indicators, the jackpot probability display 85a "1/300 and 1/200" at low probability in setting 1 (lowest setting) and setting 6 (highest setting), the number of prize balls display 85b "3&2&10&14", the upper limit of the number of rounds A value display 85c "2, 6, 16", a model (formal name) display 85d "CRxxxx", and a limit presence/absence display 85e (here "no limit") regarding the probability variation big hit are displayed.

On the display 85b of the number of prize balls, the number of prize balls of the starting winning port 36, the normal variation winning device 37, the general winning port 35, and the special variation winning device 39 are displayed in order. The limit on the probability variation big hit means that the number of consecutive probability variation big hits is limited to a predetermined limit number (a single big hit can generate a predetermined number of limit hits (number of consecutive games). Become).

Since the big hit probability display 85a at the time of low probability is displayed only for setting 1 (minimum setting) and setting 6 (maximum setting), it can be displayed so as to fit in an empty area around the collective display device 50. It should be noted that the jackpot probability display 85a at low probability is displayed only for the setting 3 (intermediate setting), or the jackpot probability display 85a at low probability is set 1 (minimum setting) and setting 6 (maximum setting). Only one of them (one of the lowest value 1/300 and the highest value 1/200) may be displayed, or the range of the jackpot probability at the time of low probability (1/300 to 1/200) may be displayed.

Further, among the jackpot probabilities at the time of low probability, those that cannot be displayed around the LED lamps D1 to D18 of the batch display device 50 (the jackpot probability of settings 2, 4, 5, etc.) are bundled outside the game area 32. It may be displayed in an empty area of a member different from the display device 50. It should be noted that what is displayed on the collective display device 50 may be redundantly displayed on this separate member. For example, the big hit probability at the time of low probability for the settings 2, 4, 5, etc. is displayed in the empty area at the upper right, lower left and upper left of the game board of FIG. May be. Alternatively, the jackpot probability at the time of low probability for the settings 2, 4, 5, etc. may be displayed in an empty area in the game area (for example, the surface of the lower left general winning opening 35). Further, the display 85e of the presence/absence of a limit regarding the probability variation big hit is displayed as "with limit" only when there is a limit, and does not have to be displayed when there is no limit. As described above, the items displayed as the performance display around the LED lamps D1 to D18 of the collective display device 50 can be appropriately changed. For example, the display 85c of the maximum number of rounds at the time of a big hit is displayed in another area or the display device 41, and some or all of the items displayed as the performance display may be displayed on the collective display device 50 as necessary, It does not have to be displayed.

In addition, the production control device 300 may display the jackpot probability at a low probability for the settings 2, 4, 5, etc. on the display device 41 during the setting change, the setting confirmation, and/or the customer waiting. .. The effect control device 300 may store the jackpot probability at the time of low probability in a memory (the program ROM 321 or the like) in advance. It should be noted that what is displayed on the collective display device 50 may be redundantly displayed on the display device 41. The display of the jackpot probability of each setting may be switched by operating the operation unit such as the effect button 25 or the cross key.

35A and 35B show a predetermined display (probability set value 6 here) on the first special figure variation display section 51 or the second special figure variation display section 52 of the collective display device 50 while the probability setting is being changed. In the case where is displayed, a configuration that makes it difficult to visually recognize a predetermined display from an oblique direction other than the front of the gaming machine 10 is shown. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent a person who does not have the authority to change the setting from visually observing a predetermined display (especially the probability setting value) from the diagonal direction of the gaming machine 10 while changing the probability setting.

In FIG. 35(A), two recesses 51a and 51b (recesses) are provided on the front surface of the collective display device 50, and the first special view variation display unit 51 and the second special view are provided in the recesses 51a and 51b, respectively. The variable display section 52 is arranged. In FIG. 35(B), an annular wall 50a (projection) that surrounds the first special figure variation display portion 51 and the second special figure variation display portion 52 is provided on the front surface of the collective display device 50. This makes it difficult to visually recognize the display on the first special figure variation display portion 51 or the second special figure variation display portion 52 from an oblique direction.

[Control of production control device]
The control (process) executed by the effect control device 300 according to the effect control program will be described below.

[Main processing (production control device)]
First, the details of the main process executed by the effect control device 300 will be described. FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the main process (main program) executed by the effect control device 300. The main processing is executed by the main control microcomputer 311 (production microcomputer) when the game machine 10 is powered on. In addition, in the flowchart of the process executed by the performance control device 300, the reference numeral (number) of the step is represented as “B***”.

When the execution of the main process is started, effect control device 300 first prohibits interruption (B0001). Next, the CPU 311 and VDP 312 are initialized (B0002, B0003) and interrupts are permitted (B0004). When the interrupt is permitted, the command reception interrupt process for receiving the command transmitted from the game control device 100 is ready to be executed.

Next, the production control device 300 permits generation of display data to be displayed on the display device 41 or the like (B0005), and sets a random number seed used for random number generation (B0006). Then, the initial value at power-on is saved in the area to be initialized (B0007).

Then, effect control device 300 clears WDT (watchdog timer) (B0008). The WDT is started by the above-described CPU initial setting (B0002) and monitors whether the CPU 311 is operating normally. If the WDT is not cleared even after the lapse of a certain period, the WDT times out and the CPU 311 is reset.

After that, the production control device 300 executes the RTC reading process of reading the time information from the RTC (real time clock) 338 as the time counting means (B0009).

In the RTC reading process, the time information may be read from the RTC 338 at a predetermined cycle (eg, every 1 minute), and it is not necessary to read the time information each time the process moves to step B0009. Further, when the power to the effect control device 300 is turned on (that is, the power is turned on to the gaming machine 10), the RTC reading process may be executed only once (by changing the position of the RTC reading process, for example, step B0003). Between B and B0004). The production control device 300 sets a time timer (time measuring means) for measuring the time in the timer area in the RAM, and reads the time information from the RTC 338 only once when the time information is read from the RTC 338 at a predetermined cycle or when the power is turned on. The time timer may be adjusted to match the time of the RTC 338 when the information is read. And production control device 300 may use a timer for time instead of RTC338 to execute various processes. By doing so, the number of times of processing for reading the time from the RTC 338 can be reduced, and the load on the CPU 311 is reduced.

In the RTC reading process, if the read time matches any of a plurality of predetermined times (first predetermined time, second predetermined time,... ), a predetermined effect may be executed. By randomly selecting the time interval of the predetermined time according to the set value, the player can estimate the set value from the time interval. For example, the selection rate for a long time interval may be drawn so that the larger the set value, the smaller the selection rate. In addition, the player can estimate the set value from the execution period of the predetermined effect by drawing the execution period for executing the predetermined effect with a probability according to the set value. For example, the selection rate for a long execution period may be selected so that the larger the set value, the larger the selection rate.

Next, the effect control device 300 detects an operation signal of the effect button 25 (signal of the effect button switch 25a or the touch panel 25b) by the player, and changes effect contents (setting) according to the detected signal. Performance button input processing is executed (B0010). Subsequently, a hall/player setting mode process is executed for accepting operations such as changing the brightness and volume of the LED and liquid crystal by the manager of the game hall (game shop) or the player (B0011). In the hall/player setting mode process, the player can customize the effect according to the effect points described later.

Next, the production control device 300 executes production point control processing for executing addition and clearing of production points (B0012). In the production point control processing, the production points to be added to the production points by performing the productions and the operations to be added to the production points are performed, and at the end of the game so that the production points can be carried over to the next game. For example, information including information on effect points is displayed on the display device 41 as a QR code (registered trademark). For example, the effect control device 300 can display the QR code (registered trademark) on the display device 41 in the hall/player setting mode process. In addition, the player can estimate the set value from the added value by drawing a value (added value) to be added to the effect points with a probability according to the set value. For example, the lottery may be performed such that the selection rate of a large addition value increases as the setting value increases.

Next, the production control device 300 executes a random number update process for updating a random number such as a production random number (B0013), analyzes the received command received from the game control device 100, and executes the corresponding received command check process. (B0014). The details of the received command check processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, the effect control device 300 updates various data according to the contents displayed on the display device (display means) such as the display device 41, or sets the drawing to be displayed on the display device 41 in the display frame buffer. Perform effect display edit processing (B0015). The drawing data set at this time can update the image on the display device 41 without any problem as long as the VDP 312 can complete drawing within a frame period of 1/30 second (about 33.3 msec). Then, the drawing preparation for the display frame buffer is completed and the drawing command preparation end setting is executed (B0016).

Next, the production control device 300 determines whether or not it is the frame switching timing (B0017). If it is not the frame switching timing (result of B0017 is “N”), the process of B0017 is repeated until the frame switching timing is reached, and if it is frame switching timing (result of B0017 is “Y”), the display device 41 is displayed. The screen drawing is instructed (B0018). Since the frame cycle of the present embodiment is 1/30 seconds, for example, when the periodic V blank (image update) is executed twice every 1/60 seconds (1/2 of the frame cycle), the frame switching is performed. .. The image may not be updated in 1/60 second, and the interval may be further increased.

In addition, the production control device 300 executes a sound control process for controlling the sound output from the speaker 19 (B0019).

The effect control device 300 also executes a decoration control process for controlling the decoration device (the board decoration device 46, the frame decoration device 18) including the LED (B0020). In the decoration control process, for example, light emission control of a decoration device such as an LED is executed.

Further, the performance control device 300 executes a movable body control process for controlling a performance device (a panel performance device 44, a frame performance device) such as an electric accessory driven by a motor and a solenoid (B0021). In the movable body control process, for example, the accessory motion effect for driving the motor is set.

And production control device 300 will return to the processing of B0008, after finishing the processing of B0021 mentioned above. After that, the processing from B0008 to B0021 is repeated.

[Reception command check processing]
Next, the details of the received command check processing (B0014) in the above-mentioned main processing (FIG. 36) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the received command check processing executed by the production control device 300.

The effect control device 300 first loads the value of the command reception counter in the command reception counter area of the RAM as the command reception number in order to check the number of commands received from the game control device 100 (B1101). Then, it is determined whether the command reception number is not 0 (B1102). If the number of received commands is 0, that is, if there is no command received from the game control device 100 (result of B1102 is “N”), there is no command to analyze, and the received command check process ends.

On the other hand, the effect control device 300, when the command reception number is not 0, that is, when the command is received from the game control device 100 (the result of B1102 is “Y”), the command reception counter in the command reception counter area. After the value is subtracted by the number of received commands (B1103), the contents of the received command buffer of RAM are copied to the command area for analysis (B1104). Here, since the received command buffer is a ring buffer, there is no problem in subtracting the number of received commands before copying the contents of the buffer into the command area. Further, even if a new command is received during copying, the data will not be overwritten.

And production control device 300 updates the command read index by +1 within the range of 0 to 31 (adds 1) (B1105). The receive command buffer is configured to store up to 32 received commands. The received commands are stored in the received command buffer in the order of command read indexes 0 to 31, and here the received commands are read in the order of index and copied to the command area for analysis. It should be noted that at the timing when copying to the command area for analysis is completed, the storage area of the received command buffer corresponding to the read command read index is cleared.

The production control device 300 determines whether or not the copying of the commands for the number of received commands loaded in the process of step B1101 is completed (B1106), and when the copying is not completed (the result of B1106 is “N )), the processes of steps B1104 to B1106 are repeated.

When the effect control device 300 receives the command transmitted from the game control device 100, the content of the received command is stored in the reception command buffer, and at the same time, the command reception counter value in the command reception counter area is added and updated. Although 32 commands can be stored in the received command buffer, the received command is analyzed separately in the command area for analysis. Then, when the content of the received command is copied to the analysis command area, the reception command buffer and the command reception counter value are cleared. As described above, by always allocating an empty area without directly analyzing the received command buffer, it is possible to prepare for a large number of command reception.

Subsequently, when the copy is completed (result of B1106 is “Y”), the effect control device 300 loads the received command content of the command area for analysis (B1107) and analyzes the content. The processing is executed (B1108), and details of the received command analysis processing will be described later with reference to Fig. 38. Further, the address of the analysis command area is updated (B1109), and then the processing of step B1101. It is determined whether the analysis of the command received by the command reception number is completed (B1110), and if the analysis is not completed (result of B1110 is “N”), the processes of steps B1107 to B1110 are executed. repeat. When the analysis is completed (result of B1110 is “Y”), the received command check processing is ended.

[Reception command analysis processing]
Next, the details of the received command analysis process (B1108) in the received command check process (FIG. 37) described above will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the received command analysis processing executed by the production control device 300.

The effect control device 300 first separates the upper byte of the received command into the MODE part and the lower byte into the ACTION part (ACT part) (B1201). The command transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 is composed of a MODE section (MODE command) and an ACTION section (ACTION command), and is normally continuously transmitted from the MODE section indicating the type of command. It Therefore, the upper part and the lower part of the received command are configured in the order of the MODE part and the ACTION part.

Next, effect control device 300 determines whether or not the MODE part is within the normal range (B1202). That is, it is determined whether or not it is a value that can be taken by the MODE part indicating the command type (value assigned as the command specification indicating the type). If the MODE part is within the normal range (result of B1202 is “Y”), it is similarly determined whether or not the ACTION part is within the normal range (B1203). That is, it is determined whether or not the value is a value (value assigned as the command specification indicating the content) that can be taken by the ACTION section indicating the content of the command (a concrete effect instruction or the like). If the ACTION part is within the normal range (result of B1203 is “Y”), it is further determined whether the ACTION part for the MODE part is a correct combination (B1204). That is, it is determined whether the value of the ACTION section is a value that can be taken by the command of the type specified by the MODE section. If the combination is correct (result of B1204 is “Y”), the command processing corresponding to the command system is executed in the processing of B1205 and thereafter.

The production control device 300 first determines whether or not the value of the MODE part is within the range of the variable system command (B1205). The variation system command is a command for instructing a variation pattern of the decorative special symbol, and there is a variation command (set in the variation start information setting process). If the MODE part indicates a variable command (the result of B1205 is “Y”), the variable command process is executed (B1206), and the received command analysis process ends.

When the MODE part does not represent a variable system command (result of B1205 is “N”), production control device 300 next determines whether or not the MODE part is within the range of the hit system command (B1207). In addition, the hit system command is a command for instructing an operation (fanfare screen, round screen display, etc.) related to the performance during the hit, and includes, for example, a big hit fanfare command (set in special figure display processing), a round command (fanfare/ Set during interval processing), Interval command (set during big winning opening processing), Ending command (set during big winning opening processing), small hit fanfare command, small hit opening command (small hit round command), It is a small hit end screen command (small hit ending command) or the like. And so on. When the MODE part indicates a hit command (the result of B1207 is "Y"), hit command processing is executed (B1208), and the received command analysis processing is ended.

When the MODE part does not represent a hit command (the result of B1207 is “N”), the effect control device 300 then determines whether or not the MODE part is within the range of the symbol command (B1209). Note that the symbol-based commands include a decoration special drawing 1 command (A4018) and a decoration special drawing 2 command (A4112) corresponding to the stop design pattern. Then, when the MODE part represents a symbol-based command (result of B1209 is “Y”), symbol-based command processing is executed (B1210), and the received command analysis processing is ended.

When the MODE part does not represent the symbol type command (result of B1209 is “N”), production control device 300 next determines whether or not the MODE part is within the range of the one-shot type command (B1211). Then, when the MODE part indicates a one-shot system command (result of B1211 is “Y”), one-shot system command process is executed (B1212), and the received command analysis process is ended.

Production control device 300, if the MODE part does not represent a one-shot system command (the result of B1211 is "N"), then the MODE part determines whether or not it is within the range of the prefetch symbol system command (B1213). .. The read-ahead symbol system command includes the above-mentioned read-ahead stop symbol command (A3014 in FIG. 15). When the MODE part represents the prefetching symbol type command (the result of B1213 is "Y"), the prefetching symbol type command process is executed (B1214), and the received command analysis process is ended.

Production control device 300, if the MODE part does not represent the look-ahead symbol system command (the result of B1213 is "N"), then the MODE part determines whether or not the range of the look-ahead variable system command (B1215). ). The look-ahead variation system command includes the above-mentioned look-ahead variation pattern command (A3018 in FIG. 15). When the MODE part indicates the prefetching variable system command (result of B1215 is “Y”), the prefetching variable system command process is executed (B1216), and the received command analysis process is ended.

On the other hand, the effect control device 300 may receive an unexpected command (for example, a command to be used only in the test mode) when the MODE part does not represent the look-ahead variable system command (the result of B1215 is “N”). Therefore, the received command analysis processing ends. Also, when the MODE part is not in the normal range (the result of B1202 is “N”), the ACTION part is not in the normal range (the result of B1203 is “N”), or when the ACTION part for the MODE part is not a correct combination ( When the result of B1204 is "N"), the received command analysis processing ends.

[Single-shot command processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 39, details of the one-shot system command processing (B1212) in the above-described received command analysis processing (FIG. 38) will be described. FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing a procedure of single-shot system command processing executed by the production control device 300.

The effect control device 300 first determines whether or not the MODE section represents a model designation command indicating the type of gaming machine (B1301). When the MODE part indicates a model designation command (result of B1301 is "Y"), model setting processing for setting the type of gaming machine is executed (B1302), and the single-shot command processing is terminated.

When the MODE part does not represent the model designation command (result of B1301 is “N”), the effect control device 300 next determines whether or not the MODE part represents a RAM initialization command (B1303). ). When the MODE part indicates a RAM initialization command (result of B1303 is “Y”), RAM initialization setting processing for notifying RAM initialization is executed (B1304), and single-shot command processing is executed. finish.

When the MODE part does not represent the RAM initialization command (result of B1303 is “N”), the effect control device 300 next determines whether or not the MODE part represents a power failure recovery command. (B1305). If the MODE part indicates a command for power failure recovery (result of B1305 is “Y”), power failure recovery setting processing is executed (B1306), and the single-shot system command processing ends.

Production control device 300, if the MODE part does not represent the command at the time of power failure recovery (the result of B1305 is "N"), then it determines whether or not the MODE part represents the customer waiting demo command. B1307). If the MODE section indicates a customer waiting demo command (result of B1307 is "Y"), customer waiting demo setting processing is executed (B1308), and the one-shot system command processing ends.

If the MODE part does not represent the customer waiting demo command (result of B1307 is “N”), then the MODE part displays the decoration special figure 1 hold number command (A2917, A3207). It is determined whether or not (B1309). If the MODE part indicates the decoration special figure 1 reservation number command (result of B1309 is "Y"), the special figure 1 reservation information setting processing is executed (B1310), and the single-shot system command processing is ended.

Rendering control device 300, if the MODE part does not represent the decoration special figure 1 hold number command (result of B1309 is "N"), then the MODE part decorates special figure 2 hold number command (A2917, A3203). ) Is determined (B1311). Then, when the MODE part indicates the decoration special figure 2 reservation number command (result of B1311 is "Y"), the special figure 2 reservation information setting process is executed (B1312), and the single shot system command process is ended.

When the MODE part does not represent the decoration special figure 2 hold number command (result of B1311 is “N”), the effect control device 300 next determines whether or not the MODE part represents a probability information command. (B1313). If the MODE part indicates the probability information command (result of B1313 is “Y”), the probability information setting process is executed (B1314), and the one-shot system command process is ended.

When the MODE part does not represent the probability information command (result of B1313 is “N”), production control device 300 next determines whether or not the MODE part represents an error/illegal command ( B1315). Examples of error/unauthorized commands include a fraud command (set by fraud & prize monitoring process when fraud occurs), fraud cancellation command (set by fraud & prize monitoring process when fraud is released), There are a state off command (A2204) and a state on command (A2207). As a state-on command, a signal from the glass frame opening detection switch 63 (glass frame opening error) or a signal from the front frame opening detection switch 64 (body frame opening detection switch) (body frame opening error, front frame opening error) There is a command indicating a release error). The status off command indicates that no error has occurred.

If the MODE part indicates an error/illegal command (result of B1315 is “Y”), error/illegal setting processing for notifying or canceling the error or fraud is executed (B1316), Terminates single-shot command processing.

When the MODE section does not represent an error/illegal command (the result of B1315 is “N”), the MODE control section 300 then causes the MODE section to execute a command for effect mode switching (process during special figure display). Etc.) is determined (B1317). When the MODE part indicates a command for effect mode switching (result of B1317 is “Y”), effect mode switching setting processing is executed (B1318), and the single shot system command processing ends.

When the MODE part does not represent the command for switching the effect mode (the result of B1317 is “N”), the effect control device 300 next determines whether or not the MODE part represents an out-ball number command. (B1319). If the MODE part indicates an out-ball number command (result of B1319 is "Y"), the out-ball number receiving process is executed (B1320), and the single-shot command process is terminated.

When the MODE part does not represent the out-ball number command (the result of B1319 is “N”), the production control device 300 then commands the MODE part to count (A3107, A3111 special winning opening count command). Or not is determined (B1321). If the MODE part indicates a count command (result of B1321 is “Y”), count information setting processing is executed (B1322), and single-shot command processing ends.

If the MODE part does not represent the count command (result of B1321 is “N”), production control device 300 determines whether or not the MODE part represents a set value information command (probability set value information command). (B1323). The set value information command is included in the command at the time of power recovery from step A1035 of FIG. 5B and the command at the time of RAM initialization transmitted in the process of step A1045. Further, as described above, along with the command for ending the probability setting change in step A2421, the setting value information command is transmitted from the game control device 100 at the time of ending the probability setting change. When the MODE part indicates the set value information command (result of B1323 is “Y”), the set value receiving process is executed (B1324), and the single-shot system command process is ended. In the set value reception process, the set value (probability set value) is stored in a storage unit such as a RAM and necessary processing is executed.

When the MODE section does not represent the setting value information command (result of B1323 is “N”), production control device 300 determines whether or not the MODE section represents a setting change command (B1325). Examples of setting change commands include a setting change instruction command (A1029), a probability setting change in progress command (A1041), a probability setting value change command (A2415), and a probability setting change end command (A2421). Then, when the MODE part indicates a setting change type command (result of B1325 is “Y”), the setting change type information setting process is executed (B1326), and the one-shot type command process is ended. In the setting change type information setting process, the contents of the setting change type command are stored and the process corresponding to the command is executed. For example, when the command of the setting change instruction is received, the setting change instruction information display processing displays the setting change instruction display for prompting the player to change the setting on the display device 41. When the command for changing the probability setting is received, the setting change system information setting process displays a setting change display on the display device 41 to inform the player that the setting is being changed.

When the MODE part does not represent a setting change type command (result of B1325 is “N”), production control device 300 determines whether or not the MODE part represents a setting confirmation type command (B1327). .. Examples of setting confirmation commands include a command for confirming probability setting value (A2508) and a command for confirming probability setting value (A2512). Then, when the MODE part indicates a command of the setting confirmation system (the result of B1327 is "Y"), the setting confirmation system information setting process is executed (B1328), and the single-shot system command process is ended. In the setting confirmation system information setting process, the contents of the setting confirmation system command are stored and the process corresponding to the command is executed. For example, when the command for confirming the probability set value is received, the setting confirmation system information setting process displays a setting confirmation display for notifying the player that the setting is being confirmed.

Next, it is determined whether or not the MODE section represents a symbol stop command (B1329). In addition, the symbol stop command includes, for example, the symbol stop command of special figure 1 and the symbol stop command of special figure 2. Then, when the MODE part represents a symbol stop command (result of B1329 is “Y”), the effect control device 300 next determines whether or not the command of the MODE part is a normal command ( B1330).

When the command of the MODE part is a normal command (the result of B1330 is “Y”), the effect control device 300 sets the stop mode of the corresponding special figure (B1331), and after all the symbols stop the game. The state flag is set to the normal state (B1332), and the single-shot system command processing ends. In the process of B1332, as an example, the game state flag is set to the normal state, but the game state flag is set to "changing", "big hit" or "small hit" depending on the timing of execution of this process. Is set.

On the other hand, if the MODE part does not represent the command to stop the symbol (the result of B1329 is “N”), or if the command of the MODE part is not normal (the result of B1330 is “N”), the effect control device 300 terminates the single-shot command processing.

[Pre-reading pattern command processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 40, the details of the prefetch symbol system command process (B1214) in the above-described received command analysis process (FIG. 38) will be described. FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the prefetch symbol type command processing executed by the production control device 300.

The production control device 300 first determines whether or not the latest pending information is information of special figure 1 hold (special figure 1 starting memory), for example, the latest received special special figure hold number command is the decoration special figure 1 hold number. It is determined whether the command is a command (B1601). If the latest hold information is the special figure 1 hold information (the result of B1601 is “Y”), the prefetch symbol system command (prefetch stop symbol command) is placed in the special figure 1 prefetch symbol command area corresponding to the special figure 1 hold number. It is saved (B1602).

If the latest hold information is not the information on the special figure 1 hold (the result of B1601 is “N”), the effect control device 300 receives the latest decoration special figure hold number command as the decoration special figure 2 hold number command. In this case, the prefetch symbol system command (prefetch stop symbol command) is saved in the special figure 2 prefetch symbol command area corresponding to the special figure 2 reservation number (B1603).

Rendering control device 300, after steps B1602 and B1603, sets a prefetching variable system command reception waiting flag indicating that it is waiting to receive a prefetching variable system command (B1604). This is because the pre-reading symbol system command and the pre-reading variable system command are set, so that the pre-reading variable system command is transmitted from the game control device 100 following the pre-reading symbol system command. Then, the read-ahead symbol type command processing is ended.

[Prefetch variable system command processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 41, the details of the prefetching variable system command process (B1216) in the above-described received command analysis process (FIG. 38) will be described. FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the look-ahead variable system command processing executed by the production control device 300.

The production control device 300 first determines whether or not it is waiting to receive a prefetching variation-type command (B1701). When the read-ahead variable system command reception wait flag (B1604) is set, it can be determined that the read-ahead variable system command is waiting to be received. If the prefetch variable system command is not waiting (result of B1701 is "N"), the prefetch variable system command process is ended. If the prefetch variable system command is waiting to be received (result of B1701 is “Y”), the prefetch variable system command reception waiting flag is cleared (B1702).

Next, the production control device 300 (sub-board) sets the look-ahead variation MODE conversion table corresponding to the number of holdings of the design (special figure 1 or special figure 2) of the latest pending information (B1703), and the pre-reading variation system command An intra-sub-readahead variation command MODE part is acquired corresponding to the MODE part (B1704). Next, the look-ahead variation ACT conversion table is set (B1705), and the sub-prefetch variation command ACT section corresponding to the ACTION section (ACT section) of the look-ahead variation system command is acquired (B1706).

Next, the production control device 300 determines whether or not the converted MODE part and ACT part (that is, the intra-sub-readahead change command MODE part and ACT part) are both other than 0 (B1707). If the command is normal (valid), it is converted to a value other than 0. When both the converted MODE part and ACT part are other than 0 (the result of B1707 is "Y"), the converted command composed of the converted MODE part and ACT part corresponds to the latest hold information and the hold number. The pre-reading variable command area (special figure 1 pre-reading variable command area or special figure 2 pre-reading variable command area) is saved (B1708). Then, the prefetch command consistency check process is executed (B1709), and it is determined whether or not the combination of the converted MODE part and ACT part is normal (B1710).

Note that the time of the first half fluctuation corresponding to the MODE part changes depending on the number of holds when the hold is started when the variable display game is started. When the hold starts the variable display game, if there is no other hold, the first half change becomes longer, and if a new hold occurs and the number of hold is large, the first half change becomes shorter. Therefore, even if the time value of the first-half variation is changed, the MODE part of the received prefetching variation-type command is converted into the sub-prefetching variation command MODE part so that the internal command of the effect control device 300 can be treated the same.

Further, since the type of reach is not related to the number of holdings, the latter half variation corresponding to the sub prefetch change command ACT section does not depend on the number of holdings. However, since there are different types of reach in the same system, if the production control device 300 is used as it is without converting the ACT part (value of the latter half variation) of the look-ahead variation system command, the number becomes large and the check becomes difficult. .. For example, in normal reach, there are types such as normal reach-1 stop deviation and normal reach+1 stop deviation. Therefore, by converting the ACT units showing the reach of the same system into the same sub-prefetch variable command ACT unit, the number is reduced and the load of the check process such as the prefetch command consistency check process is reduced.

Next, the production control device 300 determines that at least one of the converted MODE part and ACT part (that is, the sub prefetch change command MODE part and the ACT part) is 0 (the result of B1707 is “N”), or If the combination of the MODE part and the ACT part after conversion is not normal (the result of B1710 is “N”), it is determined that the command after conversion is abnormal, and the prefetching variable system command processing is ended.

When the combination of the converted MODE part and ACT part is normal (result of B1710 is “Y”), the production control device 300 loads the prefetch target hold information (latest hold information) from the preread variable command area. (B1711), the prefetch lottery process regarding the latest pending prefetch effect is executed (B1712). Examples of the look-ahead effect include continuous notice effect (including chance eye look-ahead effect), look-ahead zone effect, and pending change notice. Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the latest read-ahead read-ahead effect (holding change notice, etc.) occurs (B1713). When the latest hold prefetching effect occurs (result of B1713 is “Y”), point information corresponding to the selected prefetching effect is set (B1714).

Next, the effect control device 300 determines whether or not the generated look-ahead effect (holding change notice, etc.) is an effect immediately starting (B1715). When the prefetching effect that occurs is an effect that starts immediately (the result of B1715 is “Y”), the display corresponding to the selected prefetching effect is set (B1716). Then, the prefetching variable system command processing is ended.

On the other hand, the effect control device 300, when the latest pending lookahead effect does not occur (B1713 result is “N”), or when the generated lookahead effect is not an immediate start effect (B1715 result is “N”). As it is. The read-ahead variable command processing ends.

[Design command processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 42, the details of the symbol-based command processing (B1210) in the received command analysis processing (FIG. 38) described above will be described. FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing a procedure of symbol-based command processing executed by the production control device 300.

The effect control device 300 sets the special figure type corresponding to the MODE part of the received symbol system command (decorative special figure 1 command or decorative special figure 2 command) (B1801). The special map type is special map 1 or special map 2. Then, the symbol type corresponding to the combination of the MODE part and the ACTION part (ACT part) of the symbol system command is set and saved in a predetermined area such as a RAM (B1802). Here, in the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, since the distribution ratio of the symbols changes, the symbol type is set using the table for each MODE. In the present embodiment, the symbol type is a deviating symbol or the 2R certainty variation big hit symbol (2R-A1 etc.), 2R normal jackpot symbol (2R-A2 etc.), 6R certainty variation big hit symbol (6R-A1) shown in FIG. Etc.), 6R normal jackpot design (6R-A2 etc.), 16R certain variation jackpot design (16R-A1 etc.), 16R normal jackpot design (16R-A2 etc.).

[Variable command processing]
Next, the details of the variable command processing (B1206) in the received command analysis processing (FIG. 38) described above will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the variable system command processing executed by the effect control device 300.

The production control device 300 determines whether or not the special figure type (special figure 1 or special figure 2) of the received variation system command (variation command) is undetermined (B1901). When the special map type is not determined (the result of B1901 is “Y”), the variable system command processing is ended. If the special figure type is not undetermined (the result of B1901 is "N"), the combination of the received variable system command and the symbol system command is checked (B1902), and whether the variable system command and the symbol type are inconsistent or not. Is determined (B1903). Here, the inconsistency is a contradiction in performing an effect, such as when a symbol system command of a big hit symbol is received although an outlying variable system command is received. When the variable type command and the symbol type do not match (the result of B1903 is “Y”), the variable type command processing is ended.

When the variation type command and the symbol type are not inconsistent (result of B1903 is "N"), the effect control device 300 determines the variation pattern type from the variation type command (fluctuation command) (B1904), and the effect is changing. A variation effect setting process for setting a certain variation effect is executed (B1905). There are a plurality of effects for the same variable command. Next, the special state is set to change in the game state flag indicating the game state (P machine state) (B1906), and if the number of pre-reading effects of the continuous notice effect (the remaining number of continuous notice effects) is not 0, -1 is updated. (B1907).

[Variation effect setting process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 44, the details of the variation effect setting process (B1905) in the above-described variation system command process (FIG. 43) will be described. FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the variable effect setting process executed by the effect control device 300.

The production control device 300 first determines whether or not the variation pattern type is variation without reach (variation that does not reach the reach state) (B2001). When the fluctuation pattern type is fluctuation without reach (the result of B2001 is “Y”), the first half notice distribution corresponding to the number of effect points, model code, special figure type, effect mode, and set value (probability set value) The group address table is set (B2002), and the MODE part of the variable system command (fluctuation command) and the address of the first-half notice distribution group table corresponding to the number of reservations of the special map type are acquired (B2003). In the case of the fluctuation without reach, the fluctuation time is shortened as the number of holdings increases, and therefore the address of the table corresponding to the number of holdings is acquired.

If the variation pattern type is not the reachless variation (the result of B2001 is “N”), that is, if the reachable variation, the effect control device 300 determines the number of effect points, the model code, the special figure type, the effect mode, The first half notice distribution group address table corresponding to the symbol type and the setting value (probability setting value) is set (B2004), and the first half notice distribution group table corresponding to the MODE part of the variation system command (variation command) and the variation pattern type To obtain the address (B2005).

After the steps B2003 and B2005, the effect control device 300 performs the lottery of the notice that appears during the first half fluctuation (before the reach) (B2006). In addition, the probability of the advance lottery depends on the set value. Next, the second half notice distribution group address table corresponding to the number of production points, model code, special figure type, production mode, symbol type, and set value (probability set value) is set (B2007), and the variation system command The address of the latter half notice distribution group table corresponding to the ACT unit is acquired (B2008), and the notice lottery that appears during the second half change (during reach) is performed (B2009). In addition, the probability of the advance lottery depends on the set value. After that, the contents of the variation effect corresponding to the MODE part and the ACT part of the variation system command (variation command) are determined (B2010). It should be noted that the fluctuation time and main reach contents can be known from the fluctuation system command.

Next, the effect control device 300 determines the content of the effect (notice effect) corresponding to the result of the lottery for the notice (B2011). After that, for example, in accordance with the contents of the variation effect such as the reach effect and the notice effect, the stop symbol setting process for determining the stop symbol of the decorative special figure variable display game is executed (B2012). Here, the decorative stop design is specifically determined, such as determining the separation in the case of the outlying design.

Next, the effect control device 300 performs display setting of variable effect such as reach effect (B2013), and performs display setting of notice effect (B2014). Subsequently, display setting of hold reduction (hold shift) corresponding to the special figure type is performed, and for example, a display in which the hold display corresponding to the currently changing decorative special figure is reduced is set (B2015). Subsequently, a voice number that determines the effect mode (sound output mode) by the sound of the speaker and a decoration number that determines the effect mode by the light emission of the decoration device are set (B2016). The decorating device (board decorating device 46, frame decorating device 18) has a plurality of decorative light emitting portions (decorative LEDs, etc.), and emits light in a light emitting mode (color of each LED, light emitting timing, etc.) determined by a decoration number. ..

The voice number and the decoration number can be set not only based on the contents of the effect, but also by lottery with a lottery probability according to the set value (probability set value). In this way, the player can enjoy estimating the set value (probability set value) of the gaming machine 10 from the light emitting mode of the decoration device, that is, the light emitting mode of the decorative light emitting unit (LED).

Next, the effect control device 300 performs the display setting of the decoration special figure variation corresponding to the special figure type (B2017), and the fourth special symbol other than the above-mentioned first to third special symbols varying on the display device 41. The display setting of the fourth symbol variation regarding (4th symbol, identification information) is performed (B2018). The fourth symbol variation is displayed on the lamp display parts 1 and 2 (LED) of the above-described lamp display device 80 provided in addition to the display device 41.

[Winning command processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 45, details of the hit command processing (B1208) in the received command analysis processing (FIG. 38) described above will be described. FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the hit command processing executed by the effect control device 300.

The effect control device 300 first determines whether or not the MODE part of the received hit system command represents a fanfare (B2101). When the MODE part of the hit system command represents a fanfare (the result of B2101 is “Y”), that is, when the hit system command is the big hit fanfare command or the small hit fanfare command, the fanfare effect setting process for setting the fanfare effect Is executed (B2102). The fanfare command includes information about the maximum number of rounds for this big hit. Then, the fanfare is set to the game state flag indicating the current game state (P machine state) of the game machine 10 (B2103), and the hit system command processing is ended. The upper limit value of the number of rounds can be obtained from the symbol type determined from the symbol system command (decorative special symbol command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern).

If the MODE part of the received hit command does not represent fanfare (the result of B2101 is “N”), production control device 300 determines whether or not the MODE part of the hit command represents a round ( B2104). When the MODE part represents a round (the result of B2104 is “Y”), that is, when the hit system command is the round command or the small hit opening command, the effect control device 300 executes the round effect setting process, The game state flag indicating the game state (P machine state) of the game machine 10 is set to "round" (B2105, B2106), and the hit command processing is ended.

When the MODE part of the received hit command does not represent a round (result of B2104 is “N”), the effect control device 300 determines whether or not the MODE part of the hit command indicates an interval ( B2107). When the MODE part indicates an interval (the result of B2107 is “Y”), that is, when the hit command is an interval command, the effect control device 300 executes the interval effect setting process, and the current game of the gaming machine 10 is executed. The interval state is set to the game state flag indicating the state (P machine state) (B2108, B2109), and the hit system command processing ends. There is no interval command when the special winning opening is opened only once in the small hit, that is, when the small hit is one round.

When the MODE part of the received hit command does not represent the interval (result of B2107 is “N”), the effect control device 300 determines whether or not the MODE part of the hit command indicates the ending ( B2110). When the MODE part indicates the ending (the result of B2110 is “Y”), that is, when the hit system command is the ending command or the small hit end screen command, the effect control device 300 sets the ending effect for setting the ending effect. The setting process is executed, the ending state is set to the gaming state flag indicating the current gaming state (P machine state) of the gaming machine 10 (B2111, B2112), and the hit command processing is ended.

If the MODE part of the received hit command does not indicate the ending (the result of B2110 is “N”), the effect control device 300 ends the hit command processing without executing any processing. To do.

[Operation/Effect of First Embodiment]
According to the first embodiment, the gaming machine 10 displays a variable display game in which the identification information is displayed in a variable manner based on the satisfaction of the start condition (for example, the winning in the starting winning opening) (for example, the first special figure variation display unit 51). Alternatively, a game control means (game control device 100) that can be displayed on the second special figure variation display section 52) is provided, and when the stop result of the variation display game is a special result, a special game state advantageous for the player is generated. Let The setting changing means (for example, the setting key switch 93 and the setting value changing switch 102) can change the setting regarding the game condition (or the setting regarding the game) when the game machine 10 is powered on. The game control means (game control device 100) can shift to a setting variable state in which the setting can be changed when the power of the gaming machine 10 is turned on, and the power is cut off before shifting to the setting variable state. A predetermined display is displayed on the display unit regardless of the state of the gaming machine 10 (FIG. 34).

Therefore, in the setting variable state (during setting change), the setting is being changed and the game machine 10 is playing the game by the predetermined display on the display unit for the special figure variation display game which is easily visible from the front of the game machine 10. It can be suggested that the game cannot be executed (for example, a variable display game). Even in the setting variable state, the state of the gaming machine 10 at the time of power-off is maintained, and the normal display at the time of fluctuation stop (defeat symbol, big hit symbol) etc. is displayed on the display part for the special figure variation display game. In that case, for example, when the front frame 12 (main body frame) is closed before the completion of the setting change, there is a possibility that the game is erroneously recognized as being in a playable state.

According to the first embodiment, the game control means (game control device 100) can display a variable display game in which the identification information is variably displayed based on the establishment of the start condition on the light emitting section (for example, the LED lamps D1 and D2). .. The gaming machine 10 includes the light emitting unit and a display device (collective display device 50) including another light emitting unit different from the light emitting unit. The game control means may blink all the light emitting units of the display device in the setting variable state in which the setting can be changed (FIG. 34F).

Therefore, in the setting variable state (during setting change), it is possible to clearly show on the front of the gaming machine 10 that the gaming machine 10 is in a state in which the gaming machine 10 cannot play, by displaying an unusual display on the display device (collective display device 50). ..

According to the first embodiment, the game control means (game control device 100), in the setting variable state (during setting change), the display unit (for example, the first special figure variation display) indicating information indicating that the setting variable state. It may be displayed on the section 51 or the second special figure variation display section 52) (FIG. 34B).

Therefore, in the setting variable state (during setting change), it is possible to clearly show in the front of the gaming machine 10 that the gaming machine 10 is in a state in which it cannot play, by displaying an unusual display on the display unit for the variable display game.

According to the first embodiment, the game control means (game control device 100), in the setting variable state (during setting change), the display section (for example, the first special figure variation display section 51 and the second special figure variation display section 52). ) May be turned off (FIG. 34D).

Therefore, in the setting change state (during setting change), by displaying a display different from the normal display (a display different from that when the fluctuation display game stops changing) in the display unit for the fluctuation display game, It can be clearly shown on the front of the gaming machine 10.

According to the first embodiment, the game control means (game control device 100) displays the same display as the stop result (disappearance result) of the variable display game other than the special result (other than the jackpot result) in the setting variable state (for example, , May be displayed on the first special figure variation display section 51 or the second special figure variation display section 52) (FIG. 34C).

Therefore, by displaying a predetermined display on the display unit for the variable display game in the setting variable state (during setting change), it is possible to suggest in front of the gaming machine 10 that the gaming machine 10 is not executing a game. By displaying the stop result (outcome result) of the variable display game other than the special result (other than the jackpot result) while the setting is being changed, the data displayed on the display unit for the variable display game is initially set at the end of the setting change. No need to set values.

[Second Embodiment]
The second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 46 to 55. The configuration other than that described below may be the same as that of the first embodiment. Further, in the following embodiments, the same reference numerals are used for the configurations that perform the same functions as those in the first embodiment, and the duplicate description will be appropriately omitted.

In the second embodiment, when the parts identification information (first identification information) of the removable parts (parts, members) 510 and the model identification information (second identification information) corresponding to the model of the gaming machine 10 do not match. , The fact that they do not match is notified as an error.

[Amusement machine parts]
FIG. 46 shows how the removable parts 510 are attached to the gaming machine 10. The parts 510 are assigned electrically readable part identification information. For example, the parts 510 may be a plate-shaped member on which model information (model logo or the like) of the gaming machine 10 to be attached is displayed, or a movable accessory that constitutes the frame rendering device or the panel rendering device 44. It may be a decorative member having LEDs of the frame decoration device 18 or the board decoration device 46. The parts 510 can be attached to the game machine 10 in the game hall due to reasons such as being an obstacle when carrying them into the game hall (game shop), and may be attached to the wrong model by unfamiliar personnel.

As shown in FIG. 46(A), for example, when the part 510A for the model A is attached to the model A of the gaming machine 10, no problem occurs. However, for example, as shown in FIG. 46(B), a problem arises when the part 510B for the model B is attached to the model A of the gaming machine 10, so that the effect control device 300 causes the speakers 19a and 19b and the display device. An error is notified via 41.

FIG. 47 is a schematic configuration diagram schematically showing a configuration example of the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment. The game control device 100 transmits a model designation command indicating the model (type) of the game machine 10 to the effect control device 300 when the power of the game machine 10 is turned on (A1035, A1045). The production control device 300 selects and sets the model identification information corresponding to the received model designation command (B1301) from the reference table (FIG. 55 described later). In addition, production control device 300 compares the part identification information read from parts 510 with the set model identification information. Furthermore, when the parts identification information (first identification information) and the model identification information (second identification information) do not match, the effect control device 300 notifies as an error that they do not match.

The part 510 has an identification board 513 that holds the part identification information. In the identification board 513, the part identification information is set by one or a plurality of wirings 519 (electric wires) to which a predetermined voltage is applied. In FIG. 46, the wiring 519 is pulled up to a predetermined voltage via the pull-up resistor, but the pull-up resistor may not be provided. The power (voltage) to the parts 510 is supplied from, for example, the performance control device 300 or the power supply device 400 when the parts 510 are attached.

In FIG. 47, the plurality of wirings 519 (a plurality of electric wires) are respectively connected to predetermined terminals of the plurality (eight) of terminals (ports) in the parallel-serial conversion unit 516. In this way, a predetermined terminal to which a predetermined voltage is input is set as a bit having a value “1”, and a terminal to which a predetermined voltage is not input (the wiring 519 is not connected) is set as a bit having a value “0”, for example, “01111100”. Part identification information such as “” can be transmitted via the parallel-serial conversion unit 516.

That is, the identification board 513 is assigned part identification information as parallel data by the plurality of wirings 519. Then, the parallel/serial conversion unit 516 converts the input part identification information (parallel data) into serial data, and transmits the serial data to the effect control device 300 by serial communication (here, I ² C).

FIG. 48 shows another example of the identification board 513. In FIG. 48, the part identification information is set by the DIP switch 521. Each of the plurality of wirings 519 is set to a predetermined voltage or a ground voltage by the dip switch 521, and each bit (“1” or “1” or “1” or “1” or Information "0") is input. In the example of FIG. 48, the terminal connected to the wiring 519 in which the dip switch 521 is turned on has the ground voltage (bit of value “0”), and is connected to the wiring 519 in which the dip switch 521 is turned off. The voltage applied to the corresponding terminal is a predetermined voltage (bit of value "1").

[Parallel-to-serial converter]
FIG. 49 shows the configuration of the parallel/serial conversion unit 516 when the parallel/serial conversion unit 516 is a normal parallel/serial conversion IC.

The parallel/serial conversion unit 516 has a configuration of a normal parallel/serial conversion IC including a plurality of D-type flip-flops 516a (D-FF). The parallel-serial conversion unit 516 converts parallel data (for example, “01111100”) as the part identification information input from the terminals 0 to 7 (ports 0 to 7) into serial data, and performs serial communication (here, I ² C). Communication) to the effect control device 300 via the connection line SDA (data line). The production control device 300 has a master IC 300a for I ² C communication, and inputs the clock signals for the plurality of D-type flip-flops 516a to the parallel-serial conversion unit 516 via the connection line SCL (timing signal line).

The plurality of D-type flip-flops 516a (D-FF) form a shift register in which each bit data of the parallel data moves from right to left in synchronization with the clock signal. The bit data of each D-type flip-flop 516a at a certain clock timing moves to the adjacent D-type flip-flop 516a at the next clock timing. Each bit data of the parallel data is taken into a plurality of D-type flip-flops 516a at a certain clock timing, and sequentially output as serial data from the D-type flip-flop 516a at the left end. That is, the output of the serial data is completed 8 clocks after the parallel data is fetched.

[First Modification of Identification Substrate]
FIG. 50 shows a first modification of the identification board 513 of the part 510. In the first modification, the parallel/serial conversion unit 516 of the identification substrate 513 is not the normal parallel/serial conversion IC but the input I ² CI/O expander 815 (slave IC). The input I ² CI/O expander 815 inputs, as data, the part identification information input from the ports 0 to 7 to the master IC 300a of the effect control device 300.

The I ² CI/O expander 815 (slave IC) is connected to the transistor 830 connected to the connection line SDA, the filter 831 connected to the connection line SDA, the driver 832 connected to the connection line SDA, and the connection line SCL. A filter 833, a bus controller 834, and a reset signal generation circuit 839. Further, the bus monitoring WDT (watchdog timer) 840 for determining whether or not the connection line SDA is occupied by another I ² CI/O expander 815, and the I ² CI/O expander 815 itself are connected. A self-occupancy WDT 841 for determining whether or not the line SDA is occupied is provided.

The connection line SDA is a connection line for exchanging a data signal between the master IC 300a of the effect control device 300 and the I ² CI/O expander 815 (slave IC), and functions as a data line. The connection line SCL is a connection line for inputting and outputting a clock signal used for data communication on the connection line SDA, and functions as a timing signal line.

The filter 831 is connected to the connection line SDA, removes noise of data (here, response signal, address data, etc.) input from the connection line SDA, and outputs the noise-free data to the bus controller 834.

The driver 832 applies a voltage at which the transistor 830 is operable to the transistor 830 when outputting data (here, part identification information or the like) from the connection line SDA to the master IC 300a.

A field effect transistor (FET) is used for the transistor 830 in order to suppress power consumption, a gate of the transistor 830 is connected to the driver 832, and a drain of the connection line SDA to which a predetermined voltage is applied by a pull-up resistor R. Connected to and the source is grounded.

When the driver 832 outputs data (parts identification information or the like) to the master IC 300a through the connection line SDA, the transistor 830 can operate at the gate of the transistor 830 in order to pass a current between the drain and the source of the transistor 830. Apply voltage of value. Then, the driver 832 outputs data from the connection line SDA by repeatedly changing the voltage of the connection line SDA from HIGH to LOW.

The filter 833 is connected to the connection line SCL, removes noise of the data input from the connection line SCL, and outputs the noise-free data to the bus controller 834.

In ^addition, the I 2 CI / O expander 815, it is set a unique address by the address setting terminals A0~A3 provided in the ^I 2 CI / O expander 815 is input to the bus controller 834. Further, an address for resetting the I ² CI/O expander 815 is also set in advance.

The unique address (8 bits) of the I ² CI/O expander 815 is composed of a fixed address part composed of upper 3 bits and a variable address part composed of lower 5 bits. The fixed address part is preset with a predetermined value (for example, “110”) and cannot be changed by the I ² CI/O expander 815.

The variable address portion is a 4-bit I ² CI/O expander address corresponding to the pattern set in the terminals A0 to A3 of the I ² CI/O expander 815, and whether the data is a read request or a write request. And 1-bit R/W identification data indicating whether or not In the input I ² CI/O expander 815, “1” is normally registered in the R/W identification data in response to the read request.

The bus controller 834 determines whether the address of the data input from the connection line SDA matches the unique address set in the I ² CI/O expander 815, and if they match, the connection line SDA Data (part identification information) is output from the SDA to the master IC 300a. A predetermined voltage (here, five) of the eight ports 0 to 7 (terminals 0 to 7) of the I ² CI/O expander 815 is connected to a predetermined voltage by connecting a plurality of wirings 519. Is applied. Therefore, 8-bit parts identification information (for example, “01111100”) is input to the bus controller 834 as parallel data via the eight ports 0 to 7. A predetermined port to which a predetermined voltage is input corresponds to a bit having a value of "1", and the other terminals (not connected to the wiring 519) correspond to a bit having a value of "0".

Further, the bus controller 834 determines whether or not the address of the data input from the connection line SDA matches the reset address set in the I ² CI/O expander 815, and when they match, The data is fetched as initialization instruction data (initialization command RES), and the I ² CI/O expander 815 is initialized.

Further, after the number of times the signal level of the connection line SCL changes from LOW to HIGH reaches eight times and the bus controller 834 outputs the 8th bit data (part identification information), the signal level of the connection line SCL changes from HIGH to HIGH. When changing to LOW, the master IC 300a outputs a response signal to the bus controller 834 through the connection line SDA. Further, when it is confirmed that the signal level of the connection line SCL changes from LOW to HIGH, and the signal level of the connection line SCL changes from HIGH to LOW again, the connection line SDA is opened. That is, the master IC 300a outputs the reply signal at the timing when the number of changes of the signal level of the connection line SCL from LOW to HIGH becomes 9.

The reset signal generation circuit 839 is connected to a Vcc terminal connected to a connection line Vcc that supplies power to the I ² CI/O expander 815, and a RESET terminal that receives a reset signal from the outside.

The reset signal generation circuit 839 generates a reset signal when the I ² CI/O expander 815 is powered on and the voltage rises to a predetermined value, and inputs the generated reset signal to the bus controller 834 to initialize the circuit. Turn into.

Therefore, when the harness is pulled out, the connection line Vcc for supplying the power for logic is temporarily disconnected, and when the harness is reinserted, the power supply is restored and the reset signal generating circuit 839 outputs the reset signal. Become. A harness is a bundle of the connection line Vcc, the connection line SDA, the connection line SCL, and the ground line GND for supplying logic power.

The bus monitor WDT 840 is used to detect that another I ² CI/O expander 815 occupies the connection line SDA. The bus monitoring WDT 840 is connected to the reset signal generation circuit 839, and when a predetermined time has elapsed after the connection line SDA was occupied, the reset signal generation circuit 839 of its own was activated to cause the I ² CI/O extension. The panda 815 is initialized.

The self-occupancy WDT 841 is used to detect the occupancy of the connecting line SDA by itself (I ² CI/O expander 815). When the self-occupying WDT 841 continuously operates for a certain period of time, the self-occupying WDT 841 causes the reset signal generation circuit 839 to generate a reset signal to initialize the I ² CI/O expander 815.

[Second Modification of Identification Substrate]
FIG. 51 shows a second modification of the identification board 513 of the part 510. In the second modification, the parallel/serial conversion unit 516 of the identification substrate 513 is not the normal parallel/serial conversion IC, but the output I ² CI/O expander 815 (slave IC). In addition, in the second modification, the part 510 includes a rendering device and can perform rendering. The effect device is, for example, a decoration device such as an LED (light emitting unit), but may be a movable accessory.

The output I ² CI/O expander 815 outputs the output state (here, the LED and the light emitting unit) of the effect device provided in the part 510 based on the effect control data received from the master IC 300a of the effect control device 300 ( Here, the light emission state) is controlled via the ports 0 to 15 on the output side. The I ² CI/O expander 815 inputs the unique address (8 bits) of the I ² CI/O expander 815 as the part identification information to the master IC 300a of the effect control device 300.

The output I ² CI/O expander 815 has an input I ² CI/O expander 815 (FIG. 50), an output setting register 835, an output controller 836, and an output side of the I ² CI/O expander 815. Driver 837 connected to each port 0 to 15 (terminals 0 to 15) and transistors 838A to 838P connected to each port 0 to 15 are added. Therefore, description of the same configuration as the input I ² CI/O expander 815 (FIG. 50) will be appropriately omitted.

The filter 831 is connected to the connection line SDA, removes noise of data (here, effect control data, response signal, etc.) input from the connection line SDA, and outputs the noise-removed data to the bus controller 834.

The driver 832 applies a voltage at which the transistor 830 can operate to the transistor 830 when outputting data (here, part identification information, a response signal, or the like) from the connection line SDA to the master IC 300a.

The driver 832 can operate the transistor 830 at the gate of the transistor 830 in order to pass a current between the drain and the source of the transistor 830 when outputting data (part identification information, reply signal, etc.) from the connection line SDA. Apply voltage of value. Then, the driver 832 outputs data from the connection line SDA by repeatedly changing the voltage of the connection line SDA from HIGH to LOW.

The bus controller 834 determines whether the address of the data input from the connection line SDA matches the unique address set in the I ² CI/O expander 815, and if they match, the connection line SDA Data (part identification information, response signal, etc.) is output from the SDA to the master IC 300a. The part identification information output to the master IC 300a is the unique address (8 bits) of the I ² CI/O expander 815 as described above, or the identification information set separately from the unique address (first modification). It is set via a port or stored in a storage unit (memory) as in the example). In addition, it is not always necessary to output the part identification information from the bus controller 834 to the master IC 300a. When the production control device 300 receives the reply signal from the bus controller 834, the effect control device 300 recognizes the address of the transmitted data as the part identification information. It may be configured to do so.

Further, the bus controller 834 has changed the signal level of the connection line SCL from LOW to HIGH eight times, and after taking in the 8-bit effect control data from the connection line SDA, the signal level of the connection line SCL is changed. When it changes from HIGH to LOW, a response signal is output from the connection line SDA to the master IC 300a. Further, when it is confirmed that the signal level of the connection line SCL changes from LOW to HIGH, and the signal level of the connection line SCL changes from HIGH to LOW again, the connection line SDA is opened. That is, the bus controller 834 outputs the response signal at the timing when the number of changes of the signal level of the connection line SCL from LOW to HIGH becomes 9.

The operation mode of the I ² CI/O expander 815 and the output states of the ports 0 to 15 are set in the output setting register 835. When the bus controller 834 fetches the initialization instruction data from the connection line SDA and the I ² CI/O expander 815 is initialized, the output setting register 835 causes the current to flow to all the ports 0 to 15. It is set to the initial state so that it does not exist.

Based on the data set in the output setting register 835, the output controller 836 causes a current to flow through the port driver 837 to the effect devices (here, LEDs and light emitting units) connected to the respective ports 0 to 15 ( The output state (here, the light emitting state) of the effect device is actually controlled by the output of the lighting data. When the bus controller 834 takes in the effect control data from the connection line SDA, this output state is updated to the content specified in the effect control data.

That is, based on the effect control data received from the master IC 300a, the output setting register 835 is set, and when the stop condition is received, the output states of the ports 0 to 15 are updated and reflected in the effect device.

When a current is passed through the port, the driver 837 applies to the transistor a voltage at which the transistors 838A to 838P connected to the port through which the current is passed can operate.

The gates of the transistors 838A to 838P are connected to the driver 837, the drains are connected to the port terminals connected to the connection lines to which the voltage for operating the rendering device is applied, and the sources are grounded.

If the voltage applied to the gates of the transistors 838A to 838P is equal to or higher than a predetermined value for operating the transistor 838, the predetermined voltage applied to the gate from the driving power supply is grounded via the drain of the transistor 838. When the current flows to the port terminal, the output state of the effect device (here, the LED) connected to the port terminal can be controlled.

[Third Modification of Identification Substrate]
FIG. 52 shows a third modification of the identification board 513 of the part 510. In the third modified example, the parallel-serial conversion unit 516 of the identification substrate 513 does not exist, and the production control device 300 has an input provided as a part identification information (for example, “01111100”) having a predetermined voltage of 8 bits from a plurality of wirings 519. It is directly input to the port 300b (ports 0 to 7). The part identification information input to the input port 300b is taken into the main control microcomputer (CPU) 311 via the data bus 340. Note that a predetermined terminal to which a predetermined voltage is input corresponds to a bit having a value of "1", and other terminals (the wiring 519 is not connected) correspond to a bit having a value of "0".

Then, when the parts identification information (first identification information) and the model identification information (second identification information) do not match, the main control microcomputer (CPU) 311 of the effect control device 300 reports that they do not match as an error. Execute the process.

[Main processing (production control device)]
FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the main process (main program) according to the second embodiment. The main process is executed by the effect control device 300 (main control microcomputer 311) when the power of the gaming machine 10 is turned on (restored).

The main processing of the second embodiment is obtained by adding a parts collation processing (B5000) to the main processing of FIG. 36, and since other processing is the same as that of FIG. 36, the same step numbers are given and described. Is omitted.

In the parts matching process, the parts identification information read from the parts 510 and the model identification information corresponding to the model designation command (B1301) are compared to determine the parts identification information (first identification information) and the model identification information (second identification information). When the information) does not match, a warning is given by an error notification. In the present embodiment, the parts matching process (B5000) is executed after the received command check process (B0014).

The parts matching process (B5000) is first executed when the power of the gaming machine 10 is turned on, and then repeatedly executed by the loop process from steps B0008 to B0021.

[Parts collation processing]
Next, the details of the parts matching process (B5000) in the main process (FIG. 53) will be described with reference to FIG. 54. FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the parts matching process executed by the effect control device 300.

The production control device 300 first updates -1 if the matching time timer (clocking means) is not 0 (B5001). The collation time timer determines the collation timing or the collation time interval for reading the part identification information and collating (comparing) with the model identification information. Then, it is determined whether the matching time timer is 0 (B5002). If the matching time timer is not 0 (the result of B5002 is "N"), it is not the matching timing, and the parts matching process is ended.

On the other hand, when the matching time timer is 0 (result of B5002 is “Y”), production control device 300 reads the part identification information from part 510 because it is the matching timing (B5003). Then, the parts identification information (first identification information) and the model identification information (second identification information) are compared (verified) (B5004). The model identification information is set based on the model designation command as information indicating the type (model) of the gaming machine in the model setting process (B1302) when the power of the gaming machine 10 is turned on.

The effect control device 300 stores the reference table of FIG. 55 in the memory (for example, the program ROM 321). In the reference table of FIG. 55, the model designation command and the model identification information are associated with each other. In this way, the production control device 300 holds the model identification information (second identification information) corresponding to the model of the gaming machine.

Next, effect control device 300 determines whether or not the part identification information and the model identification information match (B5005). When the parts identification information and the model identification information do not match (the result of B5005 is “N”), the error notification notifies that the parts identification information and the model identification information do not match (B5006). That is, the fact that the part 510 is attached to the wrong model that does not fit (correspond) to the part 510 is notified. The effect control device 300 may execute the error notification (warning) by generating sounds from the speakers 19a and 19b or by displaying characters on the display device 41. Further, here, the effect control device 300 may refer to the reference table of FIG. 55 and notify the error type and the correct model that is compatible with (corresponds to) the part 510. The correct model is a model having the same model identification information as the part identification information of the part 510.

Then, effect control device 300 sets the initial value of the matching time timer (B5007), and ends the parts matching process. Therefore, when the power is turned on for the first time, the parts identification information and the model identification information are periodically compared (verified) every time the time corresponding to the initial value of the verification time timer elapses. The initial value of the matching time timer is, for example, a time corresponding to several minutes, but is not limited to this.

On the other hand, if the part identification information and the model identification information match (the result of B5005 is “Y”), the effect control device 300 is attached to the correct model that matches (corresponds) the part 510 to the part 510. The initial value of the matching time timer is set without notifying an error (B5007), and the parts matching process is ended.

By the above-described part matching process, for example, when the part 510B for the model B is attached to the model A of the gaming machine 10 (FIG. 46(B)), the model identification information (for example, “01111100”) and the part identification information. (For example, "01111101") does not match, and error notification is executed. Along with the error notification, the correct model (model B) that fits the part 510B may be reported. On the other hand, for example, when the part 510A for the model A is attached to the model A of the gaming machine 10 (FIG. 46(A)), the model identification information (eg “01111100”) and the part identification information (eg “01111100”). ) Match, error notification is not executed.

As a modified example, the effect control device 300 does not store the reference table of FIG. 55 in the memory (for example, the program ROM 321) and retains only model identification information (second identification information) corresponding to one model. You can do it. In this case also, the effect control device 300 compares the part identification information read from the part 510 with the held model identification information, and compares the part identification information (first identification information) and the model identification information (second identification information). If the values do not match, the error is notified as an error.

[Operation/Effect of Second Embodiment]
According to the second embodiment, in the gaming machine 10, a game control means (game control device 100) capable of executing a game (for example, a variable display game in which identification information is variably displayed based on establishment of a start condition) and a game-related And an effect control unit (effect control device 300) capable of executing an effect. The gaming machine 10 includes detachable parts (parts 510) to which electrically readable first identification information (parts identification information) is assigned. The production control means holds the second identification information (model identification information) corresponding to the model of the gaming machine 10, reads the first identification information of the part, compares the first identification information with the second identification information, and compares the first identification information (part identification If the information) and the second identification information (model identification information) do not match, the fact that they do not match is notified.

Therefore, even if the wrong part (part 510) is attached, it is possible to appropriately notify. For this reason, it is possible to prevent the gaming machine 10 from being operated due to an installation error of the component (part 510) in the game arcade (gaming store).

According to the second embodiment, in the gaming machine 10, the effect control means reads the first identification information of the part (part 510) and compares it with the second identification information at least when the power of the gaming machine 10 is turned on, and When the first identification information and the second identification information do not match, the fact that they do not match is notified. Therefore, even when the wrong part (part 510) is attached, it can be notified when the power is turned on. For this reason, it is possible to early and surely prevent the gaming machine 10 having an installation error in the part (parts 510) in the game arcade (gaming store) from operating.

According to the second embodiment, in the gaming machine 10, the effect control means receives information about the model of the gaming machine 10 from the gaming control means when the power of the gaming machine 10 is turned on, and corresponds to the model of the gaming machine 10. The second identification information (model identification information) is selected from the table (reference table), and the first identification information of the part (part 510) is compared with the selected second identification information. Therefore, when the wrong part (part 510) is attached to various models of the gaming machine 10, this can be notified. Further, it is possible to notify the correct model to which the wrong component should be attached.

According to the second embodiment, in the gaming machine 10, the first identification information (part identification information) in the part (part 510) can be set by one or a plurality of wirings pulled up to a predetermined voltage, so that it is easy to perform. The first identification information can be set.

According to the second embodiment, in the gaming machine 10, the first identification information can be set easily by the DIP switch in the part (part 510).

[Third Embodiment]
A third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 56 to 71. The configuration other than that described below may be the same as that of the first embodiment. The third embodiment relates to a fixed display period of probability setting values. The fixed display period is a period for displaying the fixed value of the probability setting value.

[Game control device according to third embodiment]
First, with reference to FIG. 56, the timing of external information output at the time of setting change according to the third embodiment will be described. FIG. 56 is a block diagram showing a configuration example of a game control system of the gaming machine 10 according to the third embodiment. The game control device 100 of the third embodiment is similar to the game control device 100 of the first embodiment, but the probability setting value display device 143 attached to the game control device 100 is incorporated in the state display device 152. It has become a shape. That is, the state display device 152 also functions as the probability setting value display device 143 of the first embodiment. Further, in the game control device 100 of the third embodiment, a RAM initialization switch 112 (RAM clear switch) is attached separately from the set value change switch 102 (set value change button).

[Transition state when power is turned on]
FIG. 57 is a diagram illustrating a transition state when the power of the gaming machine 10 according to the third embodiment is turned on (power restoration). Depending on the ON/OFF states of the RAM initialization switch 112 and the setting key switch 93 when the power is turned on, the state shifts to four states (modes) as shown in FIG.

First, when the RAM initialization switch 112 and the setting key switch 93 are turned on when the power is turned on, after the RAM is cleared, the probability setting value can be changed in a variable setting state (setting change state, setting change). Mode (A1036-A1041 in FIG. 5A). In the RAM clear here, the clear process of step A1036 is executed, and the clear area #2 is designated as the RAM area to be cleared by the RAM clear start address 2 set in A1021 of FIG. 5C. Note that, unlike the first embodiment, in the third embodiment, in steps A1024 and A1028 of FIG. 5A, it is determined whether both the RAM initialization switch 112 and the setting key switch 93 are on. Further, unlike the first embodiment, in step A1025 of FIG. 5A, it is determined whether the RAM initialization switch 112 is turned on instead of the setting value change switch 102.

Next, when the setting key switch 93 is turned on and the RAM initialization switch 112 is turned off when the power is turned on, the setting confirmation state (setting confirmation mode) in which the probability setting value can be confirmed is entered. The transition to the setting confirmation state can be executed in steps A2504 to A2508 of the probability set value confirmation processing (FIG. 11) during the timer interrupt processing after the normal power recovery (A1031-A1035) is performed.

If the setting key switch 93 is off but the RAM initialization switch 112 is on when the power is turned on, the RAM initialization processing (RAM clear processing) of steps A1042 to 1045 is executed, and FIG. As shown in (1), the clear area #2 is designated as the RAM area to be cleared by the RAM clear start address 2, and the RAM is cleared. In the RAM clear, the clear area #3 may be designated as the RAM area to be cleared by the RAM clear start address 3.

When the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 are turned off when the power is turned on, the state where the power is simply restored is obtained.

[Probability setting value change processing]
Details of the probability setting value changing process (A1308) in the timer interrupt process will be described below with reference to FIG. FIG. 58 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the probability setting value changing process according to the third embodiment.

The probability setting value changing process of the third embodiment is different from the probability setting value changing process of FIG. 10 in that the positions of steps A2412, A2414, and A2415 are changed, and the steps A2411, A2413 are deleted. Since other processes are the same as those in FIG. 10, the same step numbers are given and the description thereof is omitted.

In the processing of step A2416, the game control device 100 loads the value of the working probability setting value area when the setting key switch 93 is in the off state (the result of A2416 is “Y”), and saves it in the probability setting value area. Yes (A2412). The setting value is fixed by turning off the setting key switch 93, and values 0 to 5 corresponding to the fixed probability setting value are stored in the probability setting value area.

Subsequently, the game control device 100 sets a probability setting value changed flag indicating that the probability setting value has been changed (A2414), and issues a probability setting value change command indicating that the probability setting value has been changed. It transmits to the production control device 300 (production control board) (A2415). Then, similarly to the first embodiment, the processes of steps A2417 to A2421 are executed, the process returns to the main process (FIG. 5B), and the process proceeds to step A1049. Here, the probability setting value display data corresponding to the probability setting value is saved in the probability setting value display area in step A2420, so that the confirmed probability setting value is displayed in the state display device 152 in which the probability setting value display device 143 is incorporated. Can be displayed.

[Process when setting value is received]
Details of the set value reception process (B1324) in the single-shot command process will be described with reference to FIG. 59. FIG. 59 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the process at the time of receiving the set value according to the third embodiment.

The production control device 300 first determines whether the received command is a normal command (B5201). If the received command is not a normal command (result of B5201 is “N”), the process at the time of receiving the set value is ended.

If the received command is a normal command (result of B5201 is “Y”), effect control device 300 acquires information indicating the current date and time (current time) from RTC 338 (or timer for time) (B5202). ), it is determined whether or not the received command is a setting value information command at the end of setting change (B5203). The setting value information command at the time of ending the setting change is a setting value information command transmitted from the game control device 100 together with the probability setting change end command in step A2421 of the probability setting value change processing. When the received command is not the setting value information command at the time of ending the setting change (the result of B5203 is "N"), the setting value reception processing is ended.

When the received command is the setting value information command at the end of setting change (result of B5203 is “Y”), effect control device 300 stores the setting value and the current date and time (current time) in the memory in association with each other. (B5204), the process at the time of receiving the set value is ended. The memory here is the FeRAM 323 that can retain the stored contents even if power is not supplied.

If the received command is not the setting value information command at the end of setting change, that is, if it is the setting value information command at power failure recovery (A1035) or the setting value information command at RAM initialization (A1045) ( The result of B5203 may be “N”, and the setting value (probability setting value) may be stored in the RAM 322 without being associated with the current date and time.

[Segment LED editing process]
Details of the segment LED editing process (A1314) in the timer interrupt process will be described below with reference to FIG. FIG. 60 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the segment LED edit processing according to the third embodiment. In the segment LED editing process, the special figure 1 hold indicator 54, the special figure 2 hold indicator 55, the general figure hold indicator 56, the first game state display section 57, the second game state display provided in the collective display device 50 The settings related to the drive of the segment LEDs constituting the part 58, the third game state display part 59, and the round display part 60 are performed. Although not shown in FIG. 60, in the segment LED editing process, the special display 1 display 51, the special display 2 display 52, and the variable display section 53 for the general-use variable display game are controlled to emit light in a mode other than the variable display game. In this case, the light emission control (light-off control, lighting control, blinking control) of the special figure 1 display 51, the special figure 2 display 52, and the fluctuation display section 53 is executed in the same manner as the light emission control of the hold display 54-56. You can do it. In the variable display game, the control for causing the special figure 1 display 51, the special figure 2 display 52, and the change display section 53 to emit light (blink) is executed in the symbol change control process (FIG. 29).

The game control device 100 first updates the blink control timer by +1 (A9201), and determines whether or not it is the output on timing (A9202). When the specific bit of the blink control timer is 1, it is determined that the output is on. In this embodiment, since the specific bit is bit 5, a blinking period of 128 ms can be created (see FIG. 2B).

The game control device 100 sets the universal figure hold number display table 1 (A9203) when the output is on timing (the result of A9202 is “Y”), and when the output is not on timing (the result of A9202 is “N”). Then, the universal figure reservation number display table 2 is set (A9204), display data corresponding to the universal figure reservation number is acquired, and saved in the segment area of the universal figure reservation indicator 56 (lamps D15, D16) (A9205). If the number of reservations is 0 to 2, the display data is the same in both the general figure reservation number display tables 1 and 2, so the general figure reservation indicator 56 does not blink, but if the number of reservations is 3 to 4, Since the display data of the figure reservation number display table 1 and the display data of the general figure reservation number display table 2 are different, the general figure reservation indicator 56 blinks (see FIG. 2B).

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not it is the output on timing (A9206). If the output is on timing (the result of A9206 is “Y”), the special figure 1 hold number display table 1 is set (A9207), and if it is not the output on timing (the result of A9206 is “N”), the special figure 1 hold The number display table 2 is set (A9208), the display data corresponding to the special figure 1 reserved number is acquired, and saved in the segment area of the special figure 1 reserved indicator 54 (lamps D11, D12) (A9209).

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not it is the output on timing (A9210). If the output is on timing (the result of A9210 is “Y”), the special figure 2 hold number display table 1 is set (A9211), and if it is not the output on timing (the result of A9210 is “N”), the special figure 2 hold is set. The number display table 2 is set (A9212), the display data corresponding to the number of special figure 2 reservations is acquired and saved in the segment area of the special figure 2 reservation indicator 55 (lamps D13, D14) (A9213).

After that, the game control device 100 sets a round display LED display table in which a display mode on the round display unit 60 (lamps D3 to D7) is defined (A9214), and obtains display data corresponding to the round display LED output pointer. Then, it is saved in the segment area of the round display portion 60 (A9215).

Next, the game control device 100 sets the game state display table 1 in which the display manners on the second game state display unit 58 (lamp D9), the third game state display unit 59 (lamp D17), etc. are defined ( A9216). Further, the display data corresponding to the game status display number is acquired and saved in the segment area of each game status display section (A9217).

Next, the game control device 100 sets the game state display table 2 in which the display mode on the first game state display portion 57 (lamp D8) is defined (A9218). Further, the display data corresponding to the game status display number 2 is acquired and saved in the segment area of the first game status display portion 57 (A9219). After that, the segment LED editing process ends.

[Timing chart of fixed display period of probability setting value when setting is changed]
Next, with reference to FIG. 61, the timing of the fixed display period of the probability setting value at the time of changing the setting (setting changing mode, setting variable state) will be described. FIG. 61 is a timing chart showing an example of the timing of the fixed display period of the probability setting value at the time of changing the setting according to the third embodiment.

After the setting key switch 93 (setting key) is turned on at time x1, when the power of the gaming machine 10 is turned on with the RAM initialization switch 112 turned on at time x2, the state of the gaming machine 10 ( The gaming machine state) becomes the setting change mode (setting variable state), and the undetermined probability set value (undetermined value) is displayed on the state display device 152 (probability set value display (undetermined value)). In the probability setting value display (undetermined value) of the state display device 152, the undetermined probability setting value is displayed in blinking. Further, in response to the setting change mode being set at time x2, the display device 41 displays a display in a predetermined display mode that indicates that the setting is being changed. The collective display device 50 (first display device), the lamp display device 80 (fourth pattern), and the decoration device are maintained in the off state. The decoration device includes a frame decoration device 18 such as the decoration devices 18a and 18b, a board decoration device 46 such as the upper performance unit 40c, and a light emitting unit (LED) for decoration. Further, the decoration device may be in a dimmed state instead of being turned off, or may be turned off only in a light emitting section other than a specific color.

When the setting key switch 93 is turned off at time x3, the state of the gaming machine becomes a state in which the game can be played and the state display device 152 (second display device) displays the confirmed probability set value (set value). (Probability set value display (fixed value)). In the probability setting value display (confirmed value) of the state display device 152, the confirmed probability setting value is lit up and displayed. When the gaming machine is in the game-enabled state, the set value cannot be changed or confirmed. Further, in response to the game playable state at time x3, the identification information of the off symbol is displayed on the special figure 1 display 51 and/or the special figure 2 display 52 of the collective display device 50 (this special feature). (Figure display), a customer waiting demo is displayed on the display device 41. The customer waiting display may be performed by blinking the display portions (lamps D3 to D18) other than the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52 of the collective display device 50. The lamp display device 80 and the decoration device are normally displayed. It should be noted that when the probability setting value is determined at time x3, it may be possible to additionally perform notification by sound or voice that the probability setting value is determined.

Time x4 is a time when a predetermined time (a predetermined period, for example, 2 to 3 seconds) has elapsed from time x3. At time x4, the state display device 152 (second display device) ends the probability setting value display and starts the all-flashing display, and repeatedly performs the all-off display and all-on display of all segments at predetermined time intervals. .. It should be noted that all blinking display of the status display device 152 is executed by using the blinking control timer used in the segment LED editing processing of FIG. 60, and the blinking display of the display unit of the collective display device 50 (the customer waiting display described above) is performed. You may synchronize with the same blinking period.

The time x4 is not limited to when a predetermined time (for example, 2 to 3 seconds) has elapsed from the time x3, and also when the front frame 12 (main body frame) is closed or when a touch switch signal of the operation handle 24 is detected. Good. In this way, when the setting change state is switched to the playable state in which the set value cannot be changed, the set value confirmed on the state display device 152 can be confirmed for a predetermined time (for example, 2 to 3 seconds). Even if the setting confirmation mode is not entered again later, the confirmed setting value can be viewed, and the working efficiency of the game hall manager can be improved.

Time x5 is a time when a predetermined time (a predetermined period, for example, 0.5 sec) has elapsed from time x4. At time x5, the state display device 152 ends the all-blinking display and starts the performance display (display of the character role ratio), and the character role ratio is displayed. In addition, instead of displaying the information on the character ratio, the state display device 152 may display the information on the payout rate, the number of discharged balls, and the base value (the payout rate in the normal gaming state). Rate display, number of discharged balls display, base value display). As described above, the accessory ratio and the payout rate (including the base value) are derived based on the number of prize balls obtained by winning, and serve as performance information indicating the performance of the gaming machine. Then, the status display device 152 can execute a performance display that displays performance information.

Although the probability setting value display (undetermined value) from time x2 is a blinking display and the probability setting value display (confirmed value) of the state display device 152 from time x3 is a lighting display, these blinking display or lighting The probability setting value display (undetermined value) may be turned on and the probability setting value display (determined value) may be changed to blinking by replacing the display.

[Example of display screen of display device when setting is changed]
FIG. 62 is a diagram showing an example of a display screen of the display device 41 (third display device) when the setting is changed (setting change mode, setting variable state) according to the third embodiment. In FIG. 62, together with the display screen of the display device 41, the lamp display device 80 and the upper effect unit 40c of the decoration device are also shown above the display screen.

As shown in FIG. 62(a), the effect control device 300 receives the command that the probability setting is being changed (A1041), and thus the setting change display indicating that the setting is being changed is displayed on the display screen of the display device 41. 721 is displayed. Further, as described above, the lamp display device 80 and the upper effect unit 40c are turned off during the setting change. In addition, the effect control device 300 may give a notification indicating that the setting is being changed by sound or voice together with the setting changing display 721.

In FIG. 62 (), a customer waiting demo screen 722 is displayed on the display screen of the display device 41 in response to the game being enabled after the setting is changed. When the game is ready, the lamp display device 80 and the upper performance unit 40c are displayed normally, and a part of the upper performance unit 40c lights up or blinks in accordance with the customer waiting demo as shown in black in FIG. 62. .. As described above, the lamp display device 80 includes the lamp display portions 1 and 2 (LED) that perform the variable display (blinking) as the fourth symbol (fourth special symbol), and the number of starting memories of each special symbol variable display game. Since it comprises the lamp display unit 3-6 (LED) for notification, it is turned off in the normal display (extinguished display), but a part thereof may be turned on or blinking in accordance with the customer waiting demonstration.

FIG. 62 (s) is a display when the customer waiting demo is finished and the special figure variation display game (variation display game) is started by the special figure 2 variation start process (A3202) or the special figure 1 variation start process (A3206). 3 is a display screen of the device 41. The customer waiting demo screen 722 shown in FIG. 62() is hidden, and the decorative first symbols A to C are variably displayed in the variable display area 610 (left area 610A, right area 610B, middle area 610C). .. Further, the lamp display device 80 and the upper effect unit 40c are in an effect mode in which a part of the lamp display device 80 and the upper effect unit 40c are turned on or blinked in accordance with the special figure variation display game. In the pending digest area 640, a pending special figure pending display 643 (starting memory display, special figure pending pending display) corresponding to the running (digesting) special drawing variation display game is displayed. The pending display portion 630 displays the pending first start memory and second start memory. For example, when the special figure variation display game is started after the customer waiting demonstration, the pending display unit 630 does not have the pending first starting memory or the second starting memory as shown in FIG. ..

[Modified example of timing chart of fixed display period of probability setting value when setting is changed]
Next, with reference to FIG. 63, a modified example of the timing of the fixed display period of the probability setting value when the setting is changed (setting change mode, setting variable state) will be described. FIG. 63 is a timing chart showing a modified example of the timing of the fixed display period of the probability setting value at the time of changing the setting according to the third embodiment. In the following description of FIG. 63, FIG. 64, FIG. 66, and FIG. 67, description that overlaps with FIG. 61 will be omitted as appropriate.

As described above, when the setting key switch 93 is turned off at the time x3 and the gaming machine state is switched from the setting change mode to the playable state, the state display device 152 starts all blinking.

Then, at a time x4' when a predetermined time (a predetermined period, for example, 0.5 sec) has elapsed from the time x3, the state display device 152 switches the display from all blinking to the probability set value display (confirmed value). After switching the display to the probability setting value display, the state display device 152 starts performance display (characteristics ratio display or ball output rate display) at time x5′ when a predetermined time (predetermined period, for example, 2 to 3 seconds) has elapsed. Then, the duty ratio is displayed. In this way, the setting key switch 93 is turned off, and the state display device 152 is displayed in a blinking state in response to the setting change mode being changed to the game-enabled state. Can be clearly indicated to the person. Further, thereafter, since the set value confirmed by the probability set value display is displayed for a predetermined time (for example, 2 to 3 sec), the amusement hall manager can confirm the confirmed set value as it is, and work efficiency is improved. You can

Similar to FIG. 61, after displaying the probability setting value, the performance display may be started after all blinking is performed for a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 sec) at time x5'.

[Second Modification of Timing Chart of Probability Setting Value Confirmation Display Period at Setting Change]
Next, with reference to FIG. 64, a second modified example of the timing of the fixed display period of the probability setting value when the setting is changed (setting change mode, setting variable state) will be described. FIG. 64 is a timing chart showing a second modified example of the timing of the fixed display period of the probability setting value at the time of changing the setting according to the third embodiment.

As described above, when the setting key switch 93 is turned off at time x3 and the gaming machine state is switched from the setting change mode to the playable state, the state display device 152 starts the probability set value display.

Then, at time x4 when a predetermined time (for example, 2 to 3 sec) has elapsed from time x3, the state display device 152 switches the display from the probability setting value display to the notification display. The notification display is a display for notifying that the setting has been confirmed, as described later with reference to FIG. After switching the display to the notification display, the state display device 152 starts the performance display (the character ratio display or the ball output ratio display) at time x5 when a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 sec) has elapsed, and displays the character ratio. indicate.

At time x3, before the probability setting value display (confirmed value) is displayed on the status display device 152, all blinking or notification display may be performed for a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 sec). Further, at the time x3, if the notification display is performed before the probability setting value display (confirmed value) is displayed on the state display device 152, from the time x4 to the time x5 after the probability setting value display (confirmed value). All blinks may be performed instead of the notification display.

[Display mode when setting of status display device is changed]
FIG. 65 is a diagram showing an example of a display mode at the time of changing the setting of the state display device 152 according to the second modified example of the third embodiment.

First, FIG. 65(a) shows a display mode of the status display device 152 when the power is turned off up to time x2 in FIG. 64. If you include it, all 8 segments are turned off.

FIG. 65B is a display mode of the state display device 152 when the probability setting value display (undetermined value, confirmed value) is displayed from time x2 to time x4. The current probability setting value (for example, "6") is displayed in the digit 3, and the seven segments (digit 2, digit 1, digit 0) other than the digit 3 are extinguished. The current probability setting value (for example, “6”) displayed in the leftmost digit 3 of the state display device 152 is a blinking display in the probability setting value display (undetermined value) from the time x2 to the time x3. The probability setting value display (confirmed value) from x3 to time x4 is turned on.

FIG. 65C is a display mode of the state display device 152 when the notification display is performed from time x4 to time x5. On the digits 0 to 3 of the state display device 152, upper and lower bars indicating that the probability setting value has been fixed are displayed. The notification display displayed on the digits 0 to 3 of the state display device 152 is not limited to the display by the upper and lower bars, and may be displayed in a display mode different from the probability set value and the performance display.

FIG. 65D is a display mode of the status display device 152 whose performance is displayed after time x5. As shown in FIG. 65(d), the state display device 152 displays a ball output rate (for example, "b1.35") for the most recent predetermined number (for example, 10,000 shots) of discharged balls as a performance display. .. It should be noted that the status display device 152 may display the overall payout rate (for example, “bL.35” shown in FIG. 102) from the power-on of the gaming machine 10 to the present time, the base value, and the accessory ratio. The display may be switched and displayed at predetermined intervals (for example, 2 to 3 seconds).

[Third Modification Example of Timing Chart during Confirmation Display Period of Probability Setting Value at Setting Change]
Next, with reference to FIG. 66, a third modified example of the timing of the fixed display period of the probability setting value when the setting is changed (setting change mode, setting variable state) will be described. FIG. 66 is a timing chart showing a third modified example of the timing of the fixed display period of the probability setting value at the time of changing the setting according to the third embodiment.

As described above, after the setting key switch 93 is turned off at the time x3, the special figure 2 variation start processing (A3202) or the special figure 1 variation start processing (A3206) is performed at the time x4″, the batch display is performed. This special map display (display of identification information) starts the variable display from the off-design that was stopped and displayed on the special map 1 display 51 or the special map 2 display 52 of the device 50, and the special map variable display game (variable display) Game) is started. At the same time, on the display screen of the display device 41, the customer waiting demonstration ends and the decorative special figure variable display game (variable display game) starts. In response to the start of the special figure variation display game of the collective display device 50 (first display device) and the display device 41 (third display device), the lamp display device 80 uses the fourth symbol special figure variation display game (variation display). Game) and the number of holdings are started, and the decoration device displays an effect corresponding display corresponding to the effect of the special figure variation display game.

Then, at a time x5'' when a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 sec) has elapsed from the time x4'', the state display device 152 ends all blinking and starts performance display (characteristics ratio display or ball output rate display). To do. In this way, information about the game can be displayed early by starting all blinking and performance display in response to the start of the special figure variation display game without waiting for the elapse of a predetermined time. ..

The state display device 152 performs the special figure 2 variation start process (A3202) or the special figure 1 variation start process (A3206), that is, the normal variation winning device 37 or the winning of the game ball to the starting winning opening 36. It is not limited to the mode in which all blinking is started when there is, and all blinking may be started when a game ball is won in the general winning opening 35 or when the game ball passes through the universal figure starting gate 34. .. Further, similarly to the example in FIG. 61 described above, all blinking may be started when the front frame 12 (main body frame) is closed or when a touch switch signal of the operation handle 24 is detected.

[Fourth Modification Example of Timing Chart during Confirmation Display Period of Probability Setting Value at Setting Change]
Next, with reference to FIG. 67, a fourth modified example of the timing of the fixed display period of the probability setting value when the setting is changed (setting change mode, setting variable state) will be described. FIG. 67A is a timing chart showing a fourth modified example of the timing of the fixed display period of the probability setting value at the time of changing the setting according to the third embodiment.

When the power of the gaming machine 10 is turned on at time x2, the gaming machine state changes to the setting change mode, and the collective display device 50, the lamp display device 80, and the decoration device of the fourth modification start all blinking. At that time, the blinking cycle of the collective display device 50 is controlled by the segment LED editing process of FIG. 60, and the blinking cycle of the lamp display device 80 and the decoration device is also set to be the same as that of the collective display device 50. Then, the blinking timing of each device is synchronized. The game control device 100 may send a command to the effect control device 300 to synchronize the blinking timing between the lamp display device 80 and the decoration device controlled by the effect control device 300 and the collective display device 50. When the state display device 152 blinks to display the probability set value, the blinking of the state display device 152 is controlled by using the blinking control timer used in the segment LED editing process, and the batch display device 50 is controlled. The blinking timing and the blinking timing of the status display device 152 may be synchronized.

The all-blinking display of the collective display device 50 may be performed by all the display sections (light emitting sections, LED lamps D1 to D18) as shown in FIG. 34F, and the display section 51 for the special figure variation display game may be performed. , 52 (LED lamps D1 and D2) may be used. Further, all the blinking display of the collective display device 50 may be performed by LED lamps (for example, LED lamps D3 to D18) other than the display units 51 and 52 (D1 and D2) for the special figure variation display game.

Then, when the setting key switch 93 is turned off at time x3, the gaming machine state changes from the setting change mode to the playable state, and the collective display device 50, the lamp display device 80 and the decoration device end all blinking. At time x3, the identification information of the outlying symbols is stopped and displayed on the collective display device 50 (this special map display), and the lamp display device 80 and the decoration device are normally displayed. Further, the confirmed probability set value (determined value) is displayed on the state display device 152 (probability set value display), the setting change display is ended on the display screen of the display device 41, and the customer waiting demonstration is started.

Then, when a predetermined time (for example, 2 to 3 sec) has elapsed from time x3 and time x5''' is reached, the state display device 152 ends the probability set value display (confirmed value) and the performance display (characteristics ratio display). And display the payout rate). As described above, in the state display device 152 according to the fourth modified example, after the probability setting value display (fixed value) is finished, all the blinking is omitted and the performance display (characteristics ratio display and ball output rate display) is immediately performed. Since this is performed in the above manner, the game hall manager can confirm the payout rate and the like early after changing the setting. By the time x5″′, the special display variation display game (variation display game) is started on the collective display device 50 and the display device 41, and the special display variation display game based on the fourth symbol is displayed on the lamp display device 80 ( (Variable display game) and the number of holdings are displayed, and a display corresponding to the effect of the special figure variable display game is performed on the decoration device (effect corresponding display).

[Timing chart of confirmation display period of probability setting value at setting confirmation]
Next, with reference to FIG. 68, the timing of the fixed display period of the probability setting value at the time of setting confirmation (setting confirmation mode, setting confirmation state) will be described. FIG. 68 is a timing chart showing an example of the timing of the confirmation display period of the probability setting value when the setting is confirmed according to the third embodiment.

After the setting key switch 93 (setting key) is turned on at time x11, when the power of the gaming machine 10 is turned on with the RAM initialization switch 112 turned off at time x12, the state of the gaming machine 10 ( The gaming machine state) becomes the setting confirmation mode (setting confirmation state), and the confirmed probability set value (confirmed value) is displayed on the state display device 152 (probability set value display). Then, on the display screen of the display device 41, a stop symbol is displayed as shown in FIG. 69 described later (stop symbol display). Note that when the gaming machine state is in the setting confirmation mode, the collective display device 50, the lamp display device 80, and the decoration device are, for example, all lighting states in which all segments and LEDs are all lighted (partial lighting state But it may be). Further, the collective display device 50 may display the stop symbol of the identification information of the previous special figure variation display game in the setting confirmation mode. In addition, when shifting to the setting confirmation mode, the stop symbol displayed on the display screen of the display device 41 becomes the stop symbol of the identification information of the previous special figure variation display game.

When the setting key switch 93 is turned off at time x13, the state of the gaming machine is changed from the setting confirmation mode to the playable state, and the state display device 152 displays a performance display (a character ratio display or a ball output rate display). It In addition, the symbol (identification information) displayed immediately before (when the power is turned off) is displayed as the special map on the collective display device 50 in response to the game machine state being changed to the game-enabled state at time x13. This special map display (previous display pattern)). Then, the customer waiting demonstration is started on the display screen of the display device 41, and the lamp display device 80 and the decoration device are displayed normally. In this way, when the setting confirmation state is switched to the playable state, the performance information can be immediately displayed as the performance display on the state display device 152 (second display device), so that the work efficiency of the amusement hall manager is improved. Can be improved.

Although the performance display is immediately displayed on the status display device 152 at time x13, a predetermined time (for example, 0. 5 sec) All blinking may be performed. In this way, by displaying the display (all blinking display) different from the probability setting value and the performance display between the setting confirmation mode and the playable state on the state display device 152, the game hall manager can: It becomes easier to more surely understand that the game has been switched to the playable state.

[Example of display screen of display device when setting is changed]
FIG. 69 is a diagram showing an example of a display screen of the display device 41 (third display device) during setting confirmation (setting confirmation mode, setting confirmation state) according to the third embodiment. In FIG. 69, the lamp display device 80 and the upper effect unit 40c of the decoration device are shown above the display screen together with the display screen of the display device 41. In the following description of FIG. 69 and FIG. 71, description that overlaps with FIG. 62 will be omitted as appropriate.

As shown in FIG. 69 (se), the effect control device 300 receives the command for confirming the probability setting (A2508, B1327) to turn on all the lamp display device 80 and the upper effect unit 40c of the decoration device. In this way, the lamp display device 80 and the decoration device have different light emission modes during the setting confirmation and during the setting change (FIG. 62). The effect control device 300 may perform notification (by sound or the like) that the lamp display device 80 and the upper effect unit 40c are all lit and that the setting is being confirmed. On the other hand, on the display screen of the display device 41, the stop symbol (stop result) of the identification information of the previous special figure variation display game is displayed, which is a display mode in which it is not known that the setting is being confirmed.

In FIG. 69 (s), a customer waiting demo screen 722 is displayed on the display screen of the display device 41 in response to the game being enabled after the setting is confirmed. When the game can be played, the lamp display device 80 and the upper effect unit 40c are normally displayed.

FIG. 69(a) shows a case where the customer waiting demo is finished and the special figure variation display game (variation display game) is started by the special figure 2 variation start processing (A3202) or the special figure 1 variation start processing (A3206). 6 is a display screen of the display device 41. Similarly to FIG. 62 (s), the customer waiting demonstration screen 722 is hidden, the decorative first symbols A to C are variably displayed in the variable display area 620, and the lamp display device 80 and the upper performance unit 40c are the special symbol changes. The effect mode is to turn on or blink according to the display game.

[Modified example of timing chart during confirmation display period of probability setting value when setting is confirmed]
Next, with reference to FIG. 70, a modified example of the timing of the fixed display period of the probability setting value at the time of setting confirmation (setting confirmation mode, setting confirmation state) will be described. FIG. 70 is a timing chart showing a modification of the timing of the confirmation display period of the probability setting value at the time of confirming the setting according to the third embodiment. In the following description of FIG. 70, descriptions that overlap with FIG. 68 are omitted as appropriate.

As described above, when the power of the gaming machine 10 is turned on with the RAM initialization switch 112 turned off at the time x12, the gaming machine state is switched to the setting confirmation mode. In the setting confirmation mode of the present modified example, a list of setting confirmation in-progress display 723 that shows the setting history of the probability setting values so far is displayed on the display screen of the display device 41, as will be described later with reference to FIG. The display mode shows that the setting is being confirmed (setting confirmation display (setting history display)). Further, the confirmed set value is displayed on the state display device 152 (probability set value display (determined value)), and the lamp display device 80 and the decoration device start all blinking. The collective display device 50 is maintained in the off state. Note that the setting confirmation display is not limited to the setting history display, and may be a display mode in which it is possible to know that the setting is being confirmed. In addition to the setting confirmation display, it may be notified by sound or voice that the setting is being confirmed.

After that, when the setting key switch 93 is turned off at time x13, the game machine state is changed from the setting confirmation mode to the playable state, and the display screen of the display device 41 ends the setting confirmation display (setting history display). Start customer waiting demonstration. Corresponding to the game machine state being set to the game-enabled state at time x13, a performance display (a character ratio display or a ball output rate display) is displayed on the state display device 152, and the previous display (on the collective display device 50). The symbol (identification information) displayed when the power is turned off is displayed as this special symbol (this special symbol display (immediately displayed symbol)). In addition, the lamp display device 80 and the decoration device display normally.

[Example of display screen of display device when setting is changed]
FIG. 71 is a diagram showing a modified example of the display screen of the display device 41 at the time of setting confirmation (setting confirmation mode, setting confirmation state) according to the third embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 71(se'), the effect control device 300 displays the setting confirmation display 723 on the display screen of the display device 41 by receiving the command of probability setting confirmation (A2508, B1327). The setting confirmation display 723 is a display in which the setting history of the probability setting values so far can be listed, and for example, the setting history number, date, changed setting contents, etc. are displayed in a list as shown in FIG. It As described with reference to FIG. 59, the effect control device 300 receives the setting value information command at the end of the setting change (the result of B5203 is “Y”), and the setting change date and time when the setting value is fixed. It is stored in the FeRAM 323 in association with (date and time when the setting is changed) (B5204). Therefore, effect control device 300, by reading the setting value and the setting change date and time from the FeRAM323, to display a list of setting history of probability setting value on the setting confirmation display 723. The lamp display device 80 and the upper presentation unit 40c of the decoration device are all blinked during the setting confirmation mode.

In FIG. 71 (s'), a customer waiting demo screen 722 is displayed on the display screen of the display device 41 in response to the game being enabled after confirming the settings, and the lamp display device 80 and the upper performance unit 40c are normally displayed. Will be displayed.

FIG. 71 (ta') is the display screen of the display device 41 when the customer waiting demonstration is finished and the special figure variable display game (fluctuation display game) is started, as in FIGS. 62 (s) and 69 (ta). Is. On the display screen of the display device 41, the customer waiting demo screen 722 is hidden, the decorative first symbols A to C are variably displayed in the variable display area 620, and the lamp display device 80 and the upper performance unit 40c are special figure variable display games. It becomes a production mode that lights up or blinks according to.

[Operation/Effect of Third Embodiment]
In the gaming machine 10 according to the third embodiment, the display result of the variable display game (special symbol variable display game) in which the identification information (identification symbol, this special symbol) is variably displayed is a special result (big hit result mode, big hit stop symbol, It is provided with control means (game control device 100) capable of generating a special game state in which a player is given a game value in the case of a special result mode). The gaming machine 10 is provided in the game area 32 and has a winning area in which gaming balls can be won (general winning hole 35, starting winning hole 36, normal variation winning device 37, large variation winning device 39 of special variation winning device 39), and games. When a ball wins a prize area, a payout control means (payout control device 200) capable of paying out the number of prize balls determined for each prize area, and a first display device capable of displaying a display regarding a game (collective display). Device 50), setting changing means (setting changing device 42, RAM initialization switch 112) capable of changing setting values (setting values, probability setting values) relating to game conditions, setting values, and prize balls obtained by winning. A second display device (state display device) capable of displaying performance information derived based on the number (characteristic ratio, ball output rate for the latest predetermined number of discharged balls, total ball output rate, base value) 152), and. The control means, in response to the setting change state (setting change mode, setting change state) in which the setting value can be changed by the setting change means, displays the display of the first display device in a predetermined display mode (for example, an off display). , All blinking display), and in response to the setting change state being changed to a game enable state in which the setting value cannot be changed by the setting change means, the set value confirmed on the second display device is set for a predetermined period (predetermined time, For example, it can be displayed for 2 to 3 seconds.

According to such a gaming machine 10, since the set value confirmed on the second display device can be confirmed for a predetermined period (predetermined time) when the setting change state is switched to the game possible state in which the set value cannot be changed, the game is played. The work efficiency of the place manager can be improved.

Further, in the gaming machine 10 according to the third embodiment, the control means (game control device 100) is changed from the setting change state (setting change mode, setting change state) to the game enable state, and the second The set value determined on the display device (state display device 152) is a signal relating to the game (for example, a detection signal when a game ball that has won the normal variation winning device 37, the starting winning opening 36 or the general winning opening 35 is detected, The signal indicating that the game ball has passed through the figure starting gate 34, the signal of the front frame opening detection switch 64, the touch switch signal of the operation handle 24) is displayed until detected. According to such a gaming machine 10, since performance information is displayed when a signal relating to a game is detected, the game hall manager can confirm the performance information immediately after changing the setting.

In the gaming machine 10 according to the third embodiment, the display result of the variable display game (special symbol variable display game) in which the identification information (identification symbol, this special symbol) is variably displayed is a special result (big hit result mode, big hit stop symbol, It is provided with control means (game control device 100) capable of generating a special game state in which a player is given a game value in the case of a special result mode). The gaming machine 10 is provided in the game area 32, and has a winning area in which gaming balls can be won (general winning opening 35, starting winning opening 36, normal variation winning device 37, large variation winning device 39 of special variation winning device 39), and games. When a ball wins a prize area, a payout control means (payout control device 200) capable of paying out the number of prize balls determined for each prize area, and a first display device capable of displaying a display regarding a game (collective display). Device 50), setting confirmation means (setting key switch 92, RAM initialization switch 112) capable of confirming setting values (setting values, probability setting values) relating to game conditions, setting values, and prize balls obtained by winning. A second display device (state display device) capable of displaying performance information derived based on the number (characteristic ratio, ball output rate for the latest predetermined number of discharged balls, total ball output rate, base value) 152), and. In response to the setting confirmation state (setting confirmation mode) in which the setting value can be confirmed by the setting confirmation unit, the control unit displays the display of the first display device in a predetermined display mode (for example, all-lit display, previous display). The special design variable display game identification information stop pattern is displayed), and the performance information is displayed on the second display device in response to the change from the setting confirmation state to the playable state in which the setting value cannot be confirmed by the setting confirmation means. Can be displayed.

According to such a gaming machine 10, since performance information can be immediately displayed on the second display device when the setting confirmation state is switched to the game possible state in which the set value cannot be confirmed, the game hall manager's Work efficiency can be improved.

Further, the gaming machine 10 according to the third embodiment can change the setting value (setting value, probability setting value) when the setting is changed (setting change mode, setting change state). The device 42 and the RAM initialization switch 112) are further provided. The control means (game control device 100) displays the display of the first display device (collective display device 50) in the setting change state (probability set value display) in response to the setting confirmation state. , Or a mode different from the display related to the game (for example, all-lit display). According to such a gaming machine 10, since the display mode of the first display device is different between the setting confirmation state and the setting change state, the game hall manager can easily perform the setting confirmation state and the setting change state. The work efficiency can be improved.

Further, the gaming machine 10 according to the third embodiment, a third display device (display device 41) capable of displaying effects related to the variable display game (special figure variable display game), and display of effects on the third display device. And an effect control unit (effect control device 300) capable of controlling the. The effect control means displays the history of setting changes on the third display device in response to the setting confirmation state (setting confirmation mode). According to such a gaming machine 10, even when the first display device (collective display device 50) is not in the display mode in which it can be seen that it is in the setting confirmation state, the game hall manager sets from the third display device. It is possible to confirm the setting status and confirm the setting history.

In response to the setting confirmation state (setting confirmation mode), the control means (game control device 100) changes the display mode of the first display device (collective display device 50) immediately before the variable display game (special figure fluctuation). The display result of the display game (stop design, identification information) is displayed. According to such a gaming machine 10, since the display mode of the first display device is different between the setting confirmation state and the setting change state, the game hall manager can easily perform the setting confirmation state and the setting change state. The work efficiency can be improved. In addition, since it is not necessary to cause the first display device to perform a dedicated display mode in the setting confirmation state, it is possible to suppress the processing load and the amount of data corresponding to that.

The control means (game control device 100) responds to the changeable state from the setting confirmation state (setting confirmation mode) to the second display device (state display device 152) with performance information (proportion of character role, latest item). Immediately display the payout rate, the total payout rate, and the base value) for the predetermined number of discharged balls. According to such a gaming machine 10, the game hall manager can immediately confirm the performance information by changing the setting confirmation state to the playable state, so that the work efficiency can be improved.

The control means (game control device 100) sets the display of the second display device (state display device 152) to the setting confirmation state in response to the change from the setting confirmation state (setting confirmation mode) to the playable state. The display (probability set value display) or performance information (role ratio, ball output rate for the latest predetermined number of discharged balls, total ball output rate, base value) in a different mode, The performance information is displayed on the second display device after the display of the display device is changed to a different mode. According to the gaming machine 10 as described above, since the display of a mode different from these displays is displayed on the second display device immediately after the game is ready, the game hall manager switches to the game ready state. It will be easier to understand what is happening.

[Fourth Embodiment]
The fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 72 and 73. The configurations other than those described below may be similar to those of the first to third embodiments. Further, in the following embodiments, the same reference numerals are used for the configurations that perform the same functions as those of the first to third embodiments, and the duplicate description will be appropriately omitted.

FIG. 72 is a block diagram showing a configuration example of a game control system according to the fourth embodiment. FIG. 73 is a diagram showing an address of an input port in the game control device 100 according to the fourth embodiment and a signal input to each input port.

The game control system in the fourth embodiment is basically the same as that in the third embodiment (FIG. 56), but there are some differences as follows.

In the third embodiment, the setting key switch 93, the setting value changing switch 102, and the RAM initialization switch 112 are all connected to the same input port (input port 123) (FIG. 56).

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 72, in the fourth embodiment, the RAM initialization switch 112 is connected to the input port 123, and the setting value change switch 102 and the setting key switch 93 are connected to the input port 124. That is, the RAM initialization switch 112, the setting value changing switch 102, and the setting key switch 93 are different from the third embodiment in that they are connected to different input ports.

As described above, when the RAM initialization switch 112 and the setting key switch 93 are turned on when the power is turned on, the setting variable state is entered (see FIG. 57).

At that time, in the third embodiment, the gaming microcomputer 111 which constitutes the gaming control device 100 designates the address of the input port 123 and outputs the ON signal of the RAM initialization switch 112 from the input port 123 and the setting key switch 93. The ON signal is acquired.

On the other hand, in the fourth embodiment, the gaming microcomputer 111 specifies the address (81H, FIG. 73) of the input port 123 to obtain the ON signal of the RAM initialization switch 112 from the input port 123, and the address of the input port 124. (82H, FIG. 73) is designated to obtain the ON signal of the setting key switch 93 from the input port 124.

That is, in the fourth embodiment, the input ports (122, 123, 124) from which the above-described ON signal is acquired may be different from each other. For example, the gaming microcomputer 111 does not specify the address (82H, FIG. 73) of the input port 124 to obtain the ON signal of the RAM initialization switch 112, but obtains the ON signal of the setting key switch 93. The address (81H, FIG. 73) of the input port 123 is not designated.

As shown in FIG. 73, the input port 122 (address: 80H (hexadecimal notation)), the input port 123 (address: 81H (hexadecimal notation)), the input port 124 (address: H82 (hexadecimal notation)) They have different addresses.

Further, each input port is assigned so that various signals (on signal, off signal) are input. In the same input port, various signals can be identified by the positions of bits (b0-b6). By increasing or decreasing the number of bits, the number of signals that can be connected to one input port can be increased or decreased.

Further, in the following, regarding the presence/absence of an abnormality in a signal, the presence/absence of a switch operation, etc., a negative logic (for example, when a signal is off, an abnormality or operation is performed) and a positive logic (when a signal is on, an abnormality or an operation is performed) Yes) are mixed, but may be unified into either negative logic or positive logic.

To the input port 122 (80H), for example, a frame radio wave incorrect signal (b0), a payout busy signal (b1), a payout abnormality status signal (b2), a shoot ball out switch signal (b3), an overflow switch signal (b4), The touch switch signal (b5) and the out ball detection switch signal (b6) are input. It should be noted that various signals including the following are described in the first embodiment.

If the frame radio wave incorrect signal (b0) is on (High:1), it indicates that a frame radio wave error has occurred, and if it is off (Low:0), it indicates normal (no abnormality). There is.

When the payout busy signal (b1) is on (High:1), the payout command transmission is prohibited, and when it is off (Low:0), the payout command transmission is possible.

When the payout abnormality status signal (b2) is on (High:1), it indicates that there is an abnormality in the payout, and when it is off (Low:0), it indicates normal (no abnormality).

When the shoot-ball out switch signal (b3) is on (High:1), it indicates that the shoot-ball is out, and when it is off (Low:0), it indicates normal (no abnormality). ..

When the overflow flow switch signal (b4) is on (High:1), it indicates an overflow state, and when it is off (Low:0), it indicates normal (no abnormality).

When the touch switch signal (b5) is on (High:1), the operation handle 24 (FIG. 3) is touched, and when it is off (Low:0), the touch switch signal (b5) is not touched. There is.

The out sphere detection switch signal (b6) indicates that the out sphere is detected when it is on (High:1), and indicates that the out sphere is not detected when it is off (Low:0). There is. Note that instead of the configuration for detecting the out ball, a configuration for detecting the launch ball may be applied.

To the input port 123 (81H), for example, a board radio wave sensor signal (b0), an abnormality detection signal (b1), a magnetic sensor signal (b2), a glass frame opening detection switch signal (b3), a main body frame opening detection switch signal ( b4), the RAM initialization switch signal (b5), and the power failure monitoring signal (b6) are input.

When the board radio wave sensor signal (b0) is on (High:1), it indicates normal (no abnormality), and when it is off (Low:0), it indicates that a board radio wave error has occurred.

If the abnormality detection signal (b1) is on (High:1), it indicates that an abnormality related to the abnormality detection signal (first embodiment) has occurred, and if it is off (Low:0), it is normal (no abnormality). Is shown.

If the magnetic sensor signal (b2) is on (High:1), it indicates normal (no abnormality), and if it is off (Low:0), it indicates that a magnetic error has occurred. (FIG. 72) shows that it is detected.

The glass frame opening detection switch signal (b3) indicates that the glass frame opening detection switch 63 (FIG. 72) has detected that the glass frame 15 (FIG. 1) is in the closed state when it is on (High:1). , OFF (Low: 0) indicates that the open state is detected.

If the body frame opening detection switch signal (b4) is ON (High: 1), the front frame opening detection switch 64 (FIG. 72) detects that the body frame (front frame 12, FIG. 1) is closed. If it is off (Low:0), it means that the open state is detected.

When the RAM initialization switch signal (b5) is on (High:1), it indicates that the RAM initialization switch 112 is off (not pressed), and when it is off (Low:0) it is on ( It indicates that it has been pressed) (the setting changeable transition state).

When the power failure monitoring signal (b6) is on (High:1), it indicates normal (no abnormality), and when it is off (Low:0), it indicates that a power failure has occurred.

To the input port 124 (82H), for example, a gate switch signal (b0), a winning opening switch signal (b1), a special winning opening switch signal (b2), a starting opening 1 switch signal (b3), a starting opening 2 switch signal ( b4), the set value change switch signal (b5), and the setting key switch signal (b6) are input.

If the gate switch signal (b0) is on (High:1), it indicates that the gate switch 34a (FIG. 72) has detected a game ball passing through the universal figure starting gate 34 (FIG. 2), and is off (Low: If it is 0), it means that it is not detected.

If the winning opening switch signal (b1) is on (High: 1), it indicates that the winning opening switch 35a (FIG. 72) has detected a game ball that has won the general winning opening 35 (FIG. 2), and is off (Low). : 0) indicates that the detection is not performed.

If the big winning opening switch signal (b2) is on (High: 1), the big winning opening switch 39a (count switch 39a) (FIG. 72) will be assigned to the game ball that has won the big winning opening (special variation winning device 39). It indicates that it is detected, and if it is off (Low:0), it indicates that it is not detected.

If the starting opening 1 switch signal (b3) is on (High: 1), it indicates that the starting opening 1 switch 36a has detected that the game ball has entered the starting winning opening 36, and is off (Low: 0). If there is, it indicates that it is not detected.

If the starting opening 2 switch signal (b4) is on (High: 1), it indicates that the starting opening 2 switch 37a has detected that the game ball has won the normal variation winning device 37, and is off (Low: 0). If it is, it means that it is not detected.

When the set value change switch signal (b5) is on (High:1), it indicates that the set value change switch 102 is off (not pressed), and when it is off (Low:0), it is on ( It indicates that it has been pressed).

When the setting key switch signal (b6) is on (High:1), it indicates that the setting key switch 93 is off (setting change prohibited state), and when it is off (Low:0), it is on (setting). It indicates that the change is permitted.

Here, when the power of the gaming machine 10 is turned on, when the setting key switch signal (b6) input to the input port 124 is on (Low:0) (setting change allowable state), input to the input port 123 When the RAM initialization switch signal (b5) is turned on (Low: 0), the setting changeable state is entered, and the set value can be changed by operating the set value change switch 102.

Among the above signals, the signals related to the setting change are the setting value change switch signal input to the input port 124, the setting key switch signal input to the input port 124, and the RAM initialization switch signal input to the input port 123. However, each signal can be arbitrarily input to any of the input port 122, the input port 123, and the input port 124.

However, if the switches are connected so that the set value change switch signal, the setting key switch signal, and the RAM initialization switch signal are input to the same input port, the same setting is made when a malicious player or the like makes an illegal setting change. There is a danger that the illegality will be easily made by just making a work on the input port of.

Therefore, at least one of the set value change switch signal (set value change switch 102), the set key switch signal (set key switch 93), and the RAM initialization switch signal (RAM initialization switch 112) is the other input port. It is preferable to design to input to.

Alternatively, it is preferable that the setting key switch signal (setting key switch 93) and the RAM initialization switch signal (RAM initialization switch 112) are designed to be input to different input ports.

It is also preferable to design so that the setting key switch signal (setting key switch 93) and the setting value change switch signal (setting value change switch 102) are input to the same input port. As a result, the RAM initialization switch 112 is connected to the same input port 123 as the front frame opening detection switch 64, for example. Therefore, by removing the wiring from the setting key switch 93 and the setting value change switch 102 to the input port 124 and mounting the game control device 100 of the fourth embodiment, the game is regarded as a game machine having no setting change function. Since the machine can be operated, the versatility of the game control device 100 can be enhanced.

[Operation/Effect of Fourth Embodiment]
As described above, the gaming machine 10 of the fourth embodiment includes at least two switches (any two of the setting key switch 93, the RAM initialization switch 112, and the setting value change switch 102), and supports the settings related to the game. Setting changing means (setting key switch 93, RAM initialization switch 112, setting value changing switch 102) capable of changing the setting value and control means capable of controlling the result of the game based on the setting value (game microcomputer 111) And The signals from the two switches are input to the control means (game microcomputer 111) via the different input ports (for example, the input port 123 and the input port 124).

Further, the gaming machine 10 of the fourth embodiment allows the setting change of the setting value setting means (gaming microcomputer 111) and the setting value setting means (gaming microcomputer 111) in which the setting value corresponding to the setting related to the game is set. Setting permission switching means (setting key switch 93) capable of switching between the state and the setting change prohibited state, and the setting value setting means (gaming microcomputer 111) can be changed by being operated under the setting change permitted state. And a setting changeable transfer means (RAM initialization switch 112) for transferring to. The setting approval/disapproval switching means (setting key switch 93) and the setting changeable transfer means (RAM initialization switch 112) are respectively set value setting means (game) via mutually different input ports (for example, input port 123, input port 124). Connected to the microcomputer 111).

With the above configuration, the switch relating to the setting change (setting permission/prohibition switching means (setting key switch 93) and setting changeable transfer means (RAM initialization switch 112)) is connected to different input ports, so that a malicious player is illicit. It is possible to prevent the setting change due to.

Further, the gaming machine 10 of the fourth embodiment allows the setting change of the setting value setting means (gaming microcomputer 111) and the setting value setting means (gaming microcomputer 111) for setting the setting value according to the setting related to the game. State and setting change prohibition state (setting key switch 93) capable of switching to the setting change prohibition state, and setting value setting means (gaming microcomputer 111) shifts to the setting changeable state by operating under the setting change permission state A setting changeable transition means (RAM initialization switch 112) and a setting operation means (setting value change switch 102) capable of operating the setting value setting means (gaming microcomputer 111) to change the setting value. Prepare Setting permission/prohibition switching means (setting key switch 93), setting changeable transition means (RAM initialization switch 112), and setting operation means (set value change switch 102) are set via input ports (input ports 122-124). It is connected to a value setting means (game microcomputer 111). At least one of the setting approval/disapproval switching means (setting key switch 93), the setting changeable transfer means (RAM initialization switch 112), and the setting operation means (setting value change switch 102) is different from the remaining one. It is connected to the input ports (for example, the input port 123 and the input port 124).

With the above configuration, at least one of the switches related to setting change (setting permission/prohibition switching means (setting key switch 93), setting changeable transition means (RAM initialization switch 112), setting operation means (setting value change switch 102)) is provided. Since the input port is connected to another input port, it is possible to prevent the setting change due to fraud by a malicious player or the like.

In the fourth embodiment, the setting permission/prohibition switching means (setting key switch 93) and the setting operation means (setting value change switch 102) are connected to the same input port (input port 124).

With the above configuration, the setting changeable transfer means (RAM initialization switch 112) is connected to the same input port 123 as the front frame opening detection switch 64, for example. Therefore, if the game control means (game control device 100) is mounted by removing the wiring from the setting permission/prohibition switching means and the setting operation means to the input port 124, the game machine is regarded as a game machine having no setting change function. Since it can be operated, the versatility of the game control means (game control device 100) can be enhanced.

[Fifth Embodiment]
The fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 74 and 75. The configurations other than those described below may be the same as those in the first to fourth embodiments. Further, in the following embodiments, the same reference numerals will be used for the configurations having the same functions as those of the first to fourth embodiments, and the duplicate description will be appropriately omitted. The fifth embodiment relates to a setting suggestion effect that suggests a setting value corresponding to a setting related to a game.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there are gaming machines that perform a setting suggestion effect that is an indication of a setting value under a specific condition. On the other hand, when a hot effect appears, the player has a problem of stopping the launch of the game ball even in the situation where the hold is accumulated. Therefore, in the fifth embodiment, it is an object to improve the enjoyment of the game by performing an effect in which the suggestion of the set value and the hold are associated with each other.

FIG. 74 is a front view of the game board 30 according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 75 shows the relationship between the number of holdings and the probability of occurrence of the setting suggestion effect according to the fifth embodiment (FIG. 75(A)), and the relationship between the number of holdings, the set value, and the lighting probability of red lighting (FIG. 75(B)). ) Is a figure which shows.

As shown in FIG. 74, an LED 36b (effect means, lighting means) is arranged in the start winning opening 36 arranged in the lower part of the game board 30. The game board 30 of FIG. 74 is the same as the game board 30 of FIG. 2A except for the LED 36b. The LED 36b is configured, for example, as a part of the board decoration device 46 (FIG. 4) and, as described later, is based on lighting information (information of setting suggestive effect) transmitted from the effect control device 300 (main control microcomputer 311). The setting suggestion effect for suggesting the set value is performed.

The LED 36b is, for example, a light emitting device that can individually drive a light emitting member (LED) that emits red light, a light emitting member (LED) that emits white light, and a light emitting member (LED) that emits blue light, and each light emitting member according to lighting information. (LED) emits light.

The LED 36b can be attached to, for example, the general winning opening 35 or the normal variation winning device 37 instead of the starting winning opening 36, or the special winning opening LED 39d can be used instead.

As shown in FIG. 75(A), the main control microcomputer 311 of the effect control device 300 shows the relationship between the number of holdings (the first starting memory number or the second starting memory number) and the occurrence probability of the setting suggestive effect. The table is stored in the RAM 322 (FIG. 4), for example. The table also includes the probability of occurrence in the case of overflow that is greater than the maximum number of start-up memories (4).

Further, the main control microcomputer 311 selects the occurrence probability from the table shown in FIG. 75(A) based on the hold number command (decorated special figure hold number command) transmitted from the game control device 100, and the selected occurrence It also has a calculation function of determining whether or not to perform the setting suggestion effect by randomly selecting.

Then, the main control microcomputer 311 sends information (lighting information) on the setting suggestive effect to the LED 36b (via the panel decoration LED control circuit 332 (FIG. 4) when it is determined to win the lottery and perform the setting suggestive effect. It is transmitted to the board decoration device 46).

In FIG. 75(A), the larger the number of holdings, the higher the probability of occurrence of the setting suggestive effect. For example, the occurrence probability of the setting suggestion effect when the number of holdings is zero is 1/500, the occurrence probability of the setting suggestion effect when the number of holdings is 1 is 1/300, and the setting probability when the number of holdings is 2 The occurrence probability of the suggestive effect is set to 1/100, the occurrence probability of the set suggestive effect when the number of holdings is 3 is set to 1/30, and the occurrence probability of the setting suggestive effect when the number of holdings is 4 is set to 1/10. And the occurrence probability of the setting suggestive effect when the number of holdings is overflown is 1/5. As described above, in the fifth embodiment, even if a hot effect appears during a game, by accumulating the number of holdings, it is possible to provide the fun of determining the set value, in addition to the fun of prefetching. The interest can be increased. In particular, when the probability of occurrence of the setting suggestion effect increases as the number of holdings increases, the motivation for accumulating the number of holdings can be further increased, and the interest of the game can be further increased.

The game control device 100 (FIG. 72) can send not only the number-of-holds command but also set value information indicating a set value to the effect control device 300. The main control microcomputer 311 (FIG. 4) of the effect control device 300 turns on the LED 36b a predetermined number of times (for example, 20 times) based on the lighting information, and how many times, for example, red (other colors may be used) are turned on. The setting suggestion effect that suggests the setting value is performed by, and the setting value and the number of holdings are reflected in the setting suggestion effect. That is, the lighting probability of the red lighting of the LED 36b changes depending on the set value and the number of holdings.

As shown in FIG. 75(B), the main control microcomputer 311 stores, in the RAM 322 (FIG. 4), for example, a table showing the relationship between the number of holding of the lighting probability of red lighting and the set value. Here, in FIG. 75(B), the lighting probability is set on the assumption that the higher the set value is, the higher the jackpot probability and the small hit probability are, as shown in FIG. 24(A).

The main control microcomputer 311 generates lighting information (information of setting suggestive effect) that the LED 36b lights 20 times, but in each lighting, a predetermined lighting signal for lighting any one of red lighting, white lighting, and blue lighting is turned on. Probably incorporate. Among them, the lighting probability of the red lighting is extracted from the table of FIG. 75(B) using the information of the set value and the information of the number of holdings transmitted from the game control device 100. For example, if the lighting probability of red lighting is set to 20%, the lighting probability of white lighting and the lighting probability of blue lighting can be set to 40%.

As shown in FIG. 75(B), when the number of holdings is zero, the lighting probability of red lighting is 20% for the setting value 1-3, and the lighting probability of red lighting is 40% for the setting value 4-6. As a result, among the 20 lightings, the red lighting is on average 4 times for the setting value 1-3, and 8 times for the setting value 4-6 on average, and any one of the setting values 1-3 depending on the difference in the average number of times of lighting. It is possible to indicate whether the value is 4 or the set value 4-6.

When the number of holdings is 1, the setting probability of red lighting is 10%, the setting probability of red lighting is 20%, and the setting value of 4-6 is 40%. Percentage. As a result, among the 20 lightings, the red lighting is lit 2 times on average at the setting value 1-2, 4 times averaging at the setting value 3 and 8 times averaging at the setting value 4-6. Depending on the difference, it is possible to suggest whether the setting value is 1-2, the setting value 3 or the setting value 4-6.

When the number of holdings is 2, the setting probability of red lighting is 5%, the setting probability of red lighting is 15%, and the setting value of 3 is 25%. In the value 4-6, the lighting probability of red lighting is 40%. As a result, among the 20 lightings, the red lighting is lit on average once at the setting value 1, averaging 3 times at the setting value 2, averaging 5 times at the setting value 3 and averaging 8 at the setting value 4-6. It is possible to indicate the set value 1, the set value 2, the set value 3, or the set value 4-6 depending on the difference in the average number of times of lighting. ..

When the number of holdings is 3, setting value 1 sets the lighting probability of red lighting to 5%, setting value 2 sets the lighting probability of red lighting to 15%, and setting value 3 sets the lighting probability of red lighting to 25%. The value 4 sets the lighting probability of red lighting to 35%, and the setting value 5-6 sets the lighting probability of red lighting to 40%. As a result, among the 20 lightings, the red lighting is lit on average once at the setting value 1, averaging 3 times at the setting value 2, averaging 5 times at the setting value 3, and averaging 7 times at the setting value 4. However, the set value 5-6 is lit on average 8 times, and it is set value 1, set value 2, set value 3, set value 4, or set value depending on the difference in the average number of times of lighting. It becomes possible to suggest which one of 5-6.

When the number of holdings is 4, setting value 1 sets the lighting probability of red lighting to 5%, setting value 2 sets the lighting probability of red lighting to 15%, and setting value 3 sets the lighting probability of red lighting to 25%. The value 4 sets the lighting probability of red lighting to 35%, the setting value 5 sets the lighting probability of red lighting to 40%, and the setting value 6 sets the lighting probability of red lighting to 45%. As a result, among the 20 lightings, the red lighting is lit on average once at the setting value 1, averaging 3 times at the setting value 2, averaging 5 times at the setting value 3, and averaging 7 times at the setting value 4. On the other hand, the set value 5 is lit on average 8 times, and the set value 6 is lit on average 9 times, and it is possible to suggest which one of the set values 1 to 6 the difference in the average number of times of lighting.

In addition, as described above, the interval (5%) of the difference between the lighting probabilities of the setting value 4, the setting value 5, and the setting value 6 of the red lighting is the interval of the difference between the lighting probabilities of the setting value 1-4 of the red lighting (10%). It is possible to make it difficult to suggest the set value 6 having the highest jackpot probability and the highest jackpot probability.

In the above description, the LED 36b lights three colors of red, white, and blue. However, the LED 36b may be lit only in red, and the number of times of lighting may be changed according to the set value regardless of the number of holdings. For example, the set value and the number of times of lighting may be associated by some function such as the number of times of lighting=set value+2 and the number of times of lighting=set value×2. More simply, the number of times of lighting=the set value. However, in the above mode, the setting value is indirectly and directly specified, and the player may concentrate on the gaming machine 10 having the setting value with a high jackpot probability. (Probability of occurrence of lighting information) is preferably set lower than the probability of occurrence shown in FIG.

In the fifth embodiment, the effect control device 300 can execute a setting suggestion effect (transmission of lighting information) at a predetermined timing regarding a game. For example, as shown in FIG. 74, when a game ball wins the starting winning opening 36, the effect control device 300 can transmit the lighting information and light the LED 36b based on the occurrence probability of FIG. 75(A). is there. More specifically, the effect control device 300 receives the hold number command (decorative special figure hold number command) transmitted from the game control device 100 to generate lighting information (setting suggestion) based on the occurrence probability of FIG. 75(A). Performance information) will be transmitted to the LED 36b. As a result, since the setting suggestion effect can be generated with a predetermined probability of occurrence along with the winning of the game ball into the starting opening 36, the player naturally sees the player's eyes and draws the player's attention to enhance the interest of the game. Can be improved. In particular, when the hold is in an overflow state, the probability of occurrence of setting suggestive effect (1/5) becomes extremely high, and the average number of times of lighting becomes easy to understand, so that the interest of the game can be further improved.

As another timing, when the power supply device 400 (FIG. 4) is turned on, when the special figure fluctuation display game is executed at a predetermined number of revolutions after the power is turned on, the special figure fluctuation display game is predetermined after the first (or last) jackpot. When it is executed a certain number of times, when the outfall after the reach occurs a predetermined number of times, during small hit, during big hit, during big hit ending, during big hit music performance, during regular performance by RTC 338 (FIG. 4), during normal time There may be a character effect and a customer waiting, and the lighting information may be transmitted based on the probability of FIG. 75(A) at any of these timings. Also, the timing of these events may be combined appropriately.

In the fifth embodiment, in addition to the LED 36b, a small hit occurrence frequency, a delayed effect occurrence frequency, a stop frequency of a specific symbol in the special figure variation display game, a specific result in the special figure variation display game (specific outage stop) The setting suggestion effect of the set value may be performed depending on the occurrence frequency of the (pattern), or some setting suggestion effect may be performed on the display device 41 in accordance with the above timing.

In addition, you may perform the setting suggestion production which is the production which suggests the setting value (B1323) according to the setting regarding a game by the following method. Another example of the setting suggesting effect will be described below.

As another example, the setting suggestion effect may be executed on the display device 41 during the big hit state (special game state), which improves the enjoyment of the game. The production control device 300 displays each color on the display device 41 each time a game ball wins the special winning opening of the special variation winning device 39, that is, each time a special winning opening count command (command for counting B1321) is received. A colored coin image (an image simulating a coin) is displayed. For example, the color of the coin image is red when the set values are 1 and 6, yellow when the set values are 2 and 5, and blue when the set values are 3 and 4. Here, each color of the coin image corresponds to each combination of the low setting value (1, 2, 3) and the high setting value (4,5, 6). The color of the coin image may be red when the set values are 1, 2, and 3, and may be yellow when the set values are 4, 5, and 6. As a part of the ending effect set in the ending effect setting process (B2111), the display device 41 notifies the total number of coin images displayed in the big hit state.

The color of the coin image may be determined by lottery. Red may be selected when the set values are 1 and 6, yellow when the set values are 2 and 5, and blue when the set values are 3 and 4 with a higher selection probability than other colors. For example, when 120 game balls are won in the special winning opening in the big hit state, and 60 red coin images, 30 yellow coins, and 30 blue coins are displayed, the player sets It can be inferred that the value is 1 or 6.

Further, as still another example, the setting suggestion effect may be executed on the display device 41 during a setting notification period (for example, 10 minutes) provided every predetermined time (for example, 1 hour), which improves the enjoyment of the game. .. The effect control device 300 executes the setting suggestion effect by using the falling edge stop design (B2012) of the decorative special figure variation display game in the setting notification period. It should be noted that the effect control device 300 can determine from the RTC 338 or the time timer whether or not it is the setting notification period.

For example, if the setting value is 5, the effect control device 300 sets the detachment stop design of the first decoration special figure variation display game in the setting notification period to “1, 2, 3”, and the second decoration special character. The detachment stop design of the figure variation display game is set to "1, 3, 3", and the detachment stop design of the third decorative special figure variation display game is set to "2, 5, 6". In this way, the production control device 300 gradually shifts the value around the set value to be included in the number of the stop symbol as time passes, and shifts the number corresponding to the set value at the end of the setting notification period. Be included in the numbers on the stop pattern. In addition, you may make it approach a set value, increasing or decreasing the number of the deviation stop design.

In addition, without being limited to the above, the effect control device 300 executes the setting suggestion effect by using only the detachment stop design (B2012) of the decorative special figure variation display game of a specific predetermined number (for example, the first time) in the setting notification period. You may do so.

[Operation/Effect of Fifth Embodiment]
As described above, the gaming machine 10 of the fifth embodiment is capable of executing an effect with the game control means (game control device 100) capable of controlling the result of the game based on the set value corresponding to the setting related to the game. A variable display game is provided which includes effect production means (LED 36b, display device 41) and effect control means (effect control device 300) capable of controlling the effect production means (LED 36b, display device 41) and which variably displays identification information as a game. It is feasible. The game machine 10 is provided with a start storage means (game control device 100) capable of storing a start memory which is the right to execute the variable display game. The game control means (game control device 100) transmits the set value information indicating the set value to the effect control means (effect control device 300), and the effect control means (effect control device 300), based on the set value information, A setting suggesting effect that suggests a set value can be executed by the producing means, and the setting suggesting effect is executed at a predetermined probability (occurrence probability), and the probability (occurrence probability) is set to the number of starting memories (holding number). Set based on.

With the above configuration, even if a hot performance appears during the game, by accumulating the number of holdings, it is possible to provide the enjoyment of determining the set value, in addition to the enjoyment of the prefetch, thereby enhancing the enjoyment of the game. ..

In the fifth embodiment, the effect control unit (effect control device 300) sets the probability (occurrence probability) to be higher as the number of starting memories (holding number) increases.

As a result, the motivation for accumulating the number of holdings can be further increased, and the interest of the game can be further increased.

In the fifth embodiment, the effect control means (effect control device 300) changes the setting suggestion effect based on the number of start memories (holding number) (and set value).

As a result, various setting suggestion effects such as setting suggestion effects in which setting values can be easily determined, setting suggestion effects in which setting values are difficult to determine, etc. can be performed, and the enjoyment of the game can be enhanced.

In the fifth embodiment, the effect control means (effect control device 300) can execute the setting suggestion effect at a predetermined timing related to the game.

As a result, the chances of suggesting the set value are increased, and the interest of the game can be enhanced.

In the fifth embodiment, the production means (LED 36b) includes a lighting means (LED 36b) capable of suggesting a set value by a light emission mode (e.g., 20 times lighting) as a setting suggestion production, and the production control means (production control device 300) is It is possible to control the lighting means (LED 36b) based on the lighting information indicating the light emission mode, generate the lighting information based on the probability (occurrence probability), and transmit the lighting information to the lighting means (LED 36b).

As a result, the setting value can be suggested with a simple configuration.

In the fifth embodiment, the lighting means (LED 36b) is capable of lighting a plurality of lights of different colors, and the lighting information includes a plurality of pieces of lighting information each time the lighting means is lighted a plurality of times (20 times, for example). This is information for selecting any one of colored lights, and suggests a set value by the number of times of lighting of a specific color (red).

With the above configuration, the setting value can be more clearly suggested with a simple configuration.

In the fifth embodiment, the lighting means (LED36b) is attached to a starting opening (starting winning opening 36) capable of generating a starting memory (holding) when a game ball wins, and an effect control means (effect control device 300). Can generate lighting information based on the above probability (occurrence probability) at the time of winning a game ball at the starting opening (starting winning opening 36) and transmit it to the lighting means (LED 36b).

With the above configuration, the setting suggestion effect can occur with a predetermined probability of occurrence along with the winning of the game ball to the starting opening, so that the player can naturally enter the eyes of the player and draw the player's attention to enhance the interest of the game. Can be improved.

[Sixth Embodiment]
The sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 76 to 78. The configurations other than those described below may be similar to those of the first to fifth embodiments. Further, in the following embodiments, the same reference numerals will be used for the configurations having the same functions as those of the first to fifth embodiments, and the duplicate description will be appropriately omitted. The sixth embodiment relates to an error code that collectively displays the presence or absence of a plurality of errors.

FIG. 76 shows the relationship between the error priority level and the bit of the error code (FIG. 76(A)) and the notation of the error code (binary) and the error code (hexadecimal) according to the sixth embodiment (FIG. It is a figure which shows B)). FIG. 77 is a display example of error codes and error contents according to the sixth embodiment. When there are two errors (left: binary notation, right: hexadecimal notation) (FIG. 77(A)), the error The case where one error is resolved (FIG. 77(B)) and the case where all errors are resolved (FIG. 77(C)) are shown.

The sixth embodiment is characterized in that, when any error occurs in the gaming machine 10, an error code (error code 341, 342) including the error is displayed on the display device 41 (FIG. 77).

As shown in FIGS. 76(A) and (B), the error code is a collective display of presence/absence information that encodes the presence/absence of a plurality of error contents occurring in the gaming machine 10, and is represented in binary notation. , Can be displayed in hexadecimal notation. In hexadecimal notation, binary notations b0 to b3 are lower bits, and binary notations b4 to b7 are upper bits.

Here, the error content displayed in FIG. 76(A) is an example of a part of the error content that occurs in the gaming machine 10, and there are actually more error content, but the explanation will be given. Other error details are omitted for simplicity. Therefore, the number of bits in binary notation and hexadecimal notation changes depending on the number of error contents.

Priority information is associated with the error content displayed in FIG. The priority information is a list of priorities of error contents to be solved by a game hall manager or a staff member. Therefore, the relationship between each error content and the priority order is basically unchanged.

On the other hand, the relationship between the priority order (error content) and the bits (b0-b6) is arbitrary. Therefore, in FIG. 76A, the order of bits and the priority order (error content) are matched, but the priority order (error content) can be set at random for the bits.

The RAM 322 or the FeRAM 323 of the effect control device 300 (FIG. 4) stores information on the table according to FIG. 76(A). The information in the table also includes character information (character information 343) representing the error content.

The effect control device 300 generates error codes 341 and 342 (FIG. 76(B)) based on the error command transmitted from the game control device 100.

The game control device 100 detects an error in the gaming machine 10. The game control device 100 has an illegal magnet monitoring process for detecting a magnetic error, which is an abnormality detection of the magnetic sensor switch 61 (A1315 in FIG. 6), and an illegal radio wave monitoring process for detecting a radio wave error, which is an abnormality detection of the radio sensor 62. (FIG. 6, A1316), fraud & prize management processing (FIG. 8, A2004, A2006) for detecting a big prize hole error, which is an illegal prize to the big prize hole, to the normal variable prize device 37 (second start prize hole) The fraud & prize management process (A2008 in FIG. 8) of detecting the ordinary electric error, which is the fraudulent prize, is performed, and the error command (including the fraudulent command) corresponding to each error is transmitted. Further, by referring to the game state monitoring table 1 (first embodiment), a frame radio wave error which is an abnormality in the frame radio wave incorrect signal, and a glass which is an open state of the glass frame 15 by the glass frame open detection switch 63 are detected. Frame open error, body frame open error that detects the open state of front frame 12 (body frame) by front frame open detection switch 64 (body frame open detection switch), and switch error error that generates an error detection signal are detected. Then, an error command indicating the presence or absence of each error content is transmitted (FIG. 9, A2204, A2207). By executing the error/illegal setting process (FIG. 39, B1316), the effect control device 300 receives the error command.

As shown in FIG. 77A, the effect control device 300 can display the error codes 341 and 342 on the display device 41. At this time, the error code 341 can be represented in binary notation as shown on the left side, and the error code 342 can be represented in hexadecimal notation as shown on the right. Accordingly, by grasping the correspondence between the error codes 341 and 342 and the error contents in advance, the error contents can be immediately grasped by displaying the error codes 341 and 342. Further, by using the binary notation, the presence or absence of each error and the number of errors can be immediately grasped.

In addition, as for the error code 341 (binary notation: 00010010) and the error code 342 (hexadecimal notation: 12) in FIG. 77(A), "board radio error" and "frame radio error" occur at the same time. Are shown respectively.

Further, as shown in FIG. 77(A), the effect control device 300 can display the character information 343 indicating the error content adjacent to the error codes 341 and 342. The character information 343 represents, for example, the error content having the highest priority among the error contents corresponding to the code (presence/absence information) that is present in the error code 341, that is, is binary code “1”. ing. According to FIG. 77(A), since the error content with the highest priority is “board radio error” here, the display device 41 displays the character information 343 of “board radio error”. By displaying the character information 343 in this manner, it is possible to immediately grasp the error content to be preferentially solved.

The error codes 341 and 342 and the character information 343 are always displayed if any error occurs after the power is turned on, and the same applies during the game. Further, even during the variable display game, the error codes 341, 342 and the character information 343 are overlapped and displayed on the variable display area 610 (first variable display area) in which the large symbols of the decorative special symbols are displayed in a variable manner. However, it may not be displayed overlaid on the variable display area 615 (second variable display area) where the variable display of the small symbols of the decoration special symbol is performed.

By the way, the process of preparing the error command (A1135, A1316, A2004, A2006, A2008, A2204, A2207) and the error/illegal setting process (B1316) are constantly updated and executed. That is, if the error content is updated, the error codes 341 and 342 and the character information 343 are also updated.

Therefore, for example, when the “board radio error” is eliminated, as shown in FIG. 77(B), the error code 341 (binary notation: 00010010) is updated to the error code 341 (binary notation: 00010000), The error code 342 (hexadecimal notation: 12) is updated to the error code 342 (hexadecimal notation: 10), and the character information 343 is updated from "board radio error" to "frame radio error".

Then, when the "frame radio wave error" is resolved, all the errors are resolved, and the error codes 341 and 342 and the character information 343 are not generated. At this time, the presence/absence information of the binary notation forming the error code 341 is all “0”. As a result, as shown in FIG. 77C, the display of the error codes 341 and 342 and the character information 343 is erased on the display device 41. As a result, it is possible to easily understand that all the errors have been resolved.

FIG. 78 is an example of switching the display of the error content according to the sixth embodiment, an example in which a panel radio wave error is displayed as an initial state (FIG. 78(A)), and the frame radio wave error is operated by operating the operation unit once. Is displayed (FIG. 78(B)), and an example in which the switch abnormality error is displayed by operating the operation unit once (FIG. 78(C)) is shown. In the present embodiment, the operation unit (operation means) is the effect button 25, but may be a cross key or the like not shown.

In the sixth embodiment, when the error code 341 and the character information 343 are displayed on the display device 41, the error content having the highest priority is initially displayed as the character information 343. In FIG. 78(A), an error code 341 indicates that, for example, a “panel radio error”, a “frame radio error”, or a “switch abnormality error” has occurred (see FIG. 76). Then, “board radio error” having the highest priority is initially displayed as the character information 343.

Moreover, the production control device 300 can display an underline 344 (predetermined image) adjacent to the presence/absence information “1” of the error code 341 corresponding to the displayed character information 343. In FIG. 78(A), an underline 344 (predetermined image) indicating the presence/absence information “1” of the second from the right (bit: b1) of the error code 341 corresponding to the character information 343 of “board radio error” is displayed. To be done. The underline 344 is displayed so as to be adjacent to the presence/absence information “1”. As a result, the correspondence between the character information 343 and the presence/absence information “1” in the error code 341 becomes clear. In addition to the underline 344, a predetermined image in which the presence/absence information “1” is surrounded by a square or a circle may be applied.

By the way, the effect control device 300 (main control microcomputer 311) is connected via a switch input circuit 336 to an effect button 25 (effect button switch 25a) which is an operation section operated by a player in a variable display game or the like. (Fig. 4). Then, the effect control device 300 can switch and display the character information 343 corresponding to the plurality of presence/absence information that is included in the error code 341 each time the signal transmitted by the button operation of the effect button 25 is received. Has become. As a result, all the error contents that have occurred can be understood from the character information 343.

Therefore, when the effect button 25 is pressed once, as shown in FIG. 78(B), “frame radio wave error” is displayed as the character information 343, and the fifth (from the right) of the error code 341 corresponding to the character information 343 ( An underline 344 is displayed below the presence/absence information “1” of bit: b4).

Further, when the effect button 25 is pressed once, as shown in FIG. 78(C), “switch abnormality error” is displayed as the character information 343, and the error code 341 corresponding to the character information 343 is displayed first (from the left). An underline 344 is displayed below the presence/absence information “1” of the bit: b7). Then, when the effect button 25 is further pressed once, the display returns to that of FIG. 78(A).

Even during the variable display game, when the error code 341 and the character information 343 are displayed, the operation related to the effect of the variable display game by the effect button 25 is limited, and the character information 343 is switched by the effect button 25. The operation will be performed preferentially.

[Operation/Effect of Sixth Embodiment]
As described above, the gaming machine 10 of the sixth embodiment is capable of displaying a game control means (game control device 100) for transmitting a command related to a game and an effect corresponding to the command on the display means (display device 41). In the gaming machine 10 including the control means (production control device 300), the game control means (game control device 100) causes the error when any of a plurality of errors that can occur in the gaming machine 10 occurs. To the effect control means (effect control device 300), the effect control means (effect control device 300) error code (341, 342) for collectively displaying the presence or absence of a plurality of errors error command And display it on the display means (display device 41).

With the above configuration, by grasping the correspondence between the error codes 341 and 342 and the error contents in advance, it is possible to immediately grasp the error contents collectively by displaying the error codes 341 and 342.

In the sixth embodiment, the effect control means (effect control device 300) generates an error code (341) by a plurality of presence/absence information (binary notation) individually indicating the presence or absence of an error.

Accordingly, by using the binary notation, the presence or absence of each error and the number of errors can be immediately grasped.

In the sixth embodiment, the effect control means (effect control device 300) arranges presence/absence information in the error code based on the priority order of the errors.

Thereby, in the error code, the error to be preferentially dealt with can be grasped.

In the sixth embodiment, the effect control means (effect control device 300) includes the character information 343 indicating the content of the error and has the highest priority among the presence/absence information “1” that is included in the error code 341. The character information 343 relating to the error is displayed on the display unit (display device 41).

Accordingly, even if the correspondence between the presence/absence information of the error code 341 and the error content is not known, the error information having the highest priority can be notified by the character information 343, so that the error content can be easily understood. You can

In the sixth embodiment, the effect control means (effect control device 300) is provided with character information 343 indicating the content of the error and priority order information (FIG. 76(A)) indicating the priority order of the error. The character information 343 relating to the error with the highest priority among the errors that are present in 341 and 342 is displayed on the display means (display device 41) based on the priority information.

As a result, the error content having the highest priority can be notified by the character information 343 without knowing the content of the error codes 341 and 342, so that the error content can be easily understood.

In the sixth embodiment, an operation unit (production button 25) capable of generating a signal in response to an operation by a player is provided, and the production control unit (production control device 300) receives a signal from the operation unit (production button 25). Each time, the character information 343 relating to the error that is present in the error codes 341 and 342 is switched and transmitted to the display means (display device 41).

As a result, all the error contents that have occurred can be understood from the character information 343.

In the sixth embodiment, an operation unit (production button 25) capable of generating a signal in response to an operation by a player is provided, and the production control unit (production control device 300) receives a signal from the operation unit (production button 25). Each time, the character information 343 related to the presence/absence information “1” in the error code 341 is switched and transmitted to the display means (display device 41) and is displayed on the display means (display device 41). A predetermined image (underline 344) showing the presence/absence information “1” related to the character information 343 is displayed.

As a result, the correspondence between the character information 343 and the presence/absence information “1” in the error code 341 becomes clear.

In the sixth embodiment, the effect control unit (effect control device 300) does not generate the error codes 341 and 342 when the error codes 341 and 342 are all error-free.

As a result, the error codes 341 and 342 and the character information 343 displayed on the display means (display device 41) are erased, and it is possible to easily grasp that all the errors have been resolved.

[Seventh Embodiment]
The seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 79 to 85. The configurations other than those described below may be the same as those of the first to sixth embodiments. Further, in the following embodiments, the same reference numerals are used for the configurations that perform the same functions as those of the first to sixth embodiments, and the duplicate description will be appropriately omitted. The seventh embodiment relates to the attachment of the part 510, like the second embodiment.

FIG. 79 is a diagram showing an example in which the detachable part 510 according to the seventh embodiment is attached to the gaming machine 10. The seventh embodiment is a modification of the second embodiment. The collation procedure of the part identification information (first identification information) and the model identification information (second identification information) of the seventh embodiment is the same as that of the second embodiment.

In the second embodiment, as shown in FIG. 46(B), a part 510B for model B having part identification information (first identification information) that does not match the model identification information (second identification information) of model A is When it is attached to the model A of the gaming machine 10, the effect control device 300 gives an error notification via the speakers 19a and 19b and the display device 41.

On the other hand, in the seventh embodiment, when the part 510B for the model B is attached to the model A of the gaming machine 10, the effect control device 300 drives the board decoration device 46 (or the frame decoration device 18) (here. Is allowed, and the drive (here, light emission) of the frame decoration device 18 (or the board decoration device 46) (FIG. 4) is prohibited. That is, as shown in FIG. 79, the frame decoration device 18 (decoration device 18b) decorates the game board 30 by lighting (light emission) of an LED or the like, but the parts 510B for model B are the parts of the game machine 10. When mounted on the model A, the lighting (light emission) of the LED of the frame decoration device 18 is prohibited.

Specifically, when the parts identification information (first identification information) and the model identification information (second identification information) do not match, the effect control device 300, the frame decoration LED control circuit 333 (or the board decoration LED control circuit). The drive (light emission) of the frame decoration device 18 (or the board decoration device 46) (FIG. 4) is prohibited by stopping the drive of the frame decoration device 334) (FIG. 4).

Accordingly, the illumination member such as the LED included in the frame decoration device 18 (or the illumination member such as the LED included in the board decoration device 46) does not emit light indicating that the unit is wrong. Therefore, it is easy for the game hall manager or the staff to understand the unit installation error, and the cause can be removed smoothly. Further, since it is not used in the wrong state, it is possible to reduce the factor of failure and prolong the service life.

As shown in FIG. 79, also in the seventh embodiment, the unit error can be notified by the voice information (voice of "unit error") using the speakers 19a and 19b. Here, the output of the voice information can be stopped by operating the effect button 25 (FIG. 4). Further, on the display device 41, it is possible to display the notification information 345 for notifying the "unit error" by characters. The notification information 345 is displayed with priority over an image related to initialization (for example, the character 431 of “Initializing” in FIG. 90 of an eighth embodiment described later) or an image related to power failure recovery (A1035). R.

FIG. 80 is a diagram showing an example in which the notification information 345 according to the seventh embodiment is displayed on the display device 41 which is displaying the out-of-stop symbol of the special figure variation display game. As shown in FIG. 80, the notification information 345 for notifying the "unit error" is displayed on the display device 41 as long as the parts 510B having the parts identification information different from the model identification information are attached, and during the game (variation). The same applies during the display game).

In the special figure variation display game, the notification information 345 is displayed in an overlapping manner on the variation display area 610 (first variation display area) in which a large symbol variation display is performed, but a variation display area in which a small symbol variation display is performed. 615 (second variable display area) is not displayed in an overlapping manner. Thereby, even if the notification information 345 (“unit error”) is displayed, the player can confirm the progress and result of the special figure variation display game in the variation display area 615.

FIG. 81 is a diagram showing an example in which the display mode of the notification information according to the seventh embodiment is changed according to the operation of the movable body. The notification information 345 of the seventh embodiment is displayed on the display device 41 even during the initial operation when the movable bodies 44c and 44d (movable accessory) are powered on. Details of the initial operation of the movable bodies 44c and 44d will be described in an eighth embodiment described later.

As shown in FIG. 81(A), the movable bodies 44c and 44d are arranged at positions such that a part thereof slightly overlaps the front surface of the display device 41 in the initial state (standby state). As shown in 81(B), the movable bodies 44c and 44d move to the center of the front surface of the display device 41 during the initial operation. Therefore, the notification information 345 is displayed on the display device 41 at a position where it does not overlap the movable bodies 44c and 44d, so that the notification content (“unit error”) can be reliably notified.

On the left side of FIG. 81(A), the notification information 345 is displayed large in the central portion of the display device 41. However, in FIG. However, it is displayed smaller than the display mode of FIG. 81(A). By thus changing the display mode of the notification information 345 corresponding to the positions of the movable bodies 44c and 44d, it is possible to strongly warn the game hall manager or the staff.

Further, as shown on the right side of FIG. 81(A), the notification information 345 may be displayed from the beginning on the display device 41 at a position where it does not overlap even if the movable bodies 44c and 44d operate. At least, by arranging the notification information 345 in a region different from the region covered by the movable bodies 44c and 44d in the display device 41, it is possible to call the attention to the game hall manager or the staff.

FIG. 82 is a diagram showing an example in the case where the drive (light emission) of the frame decoration device 18 is prohibited in the part collation process according to the seventh embodiment. The part matching process of the seventh embodiment is almost the same as that of the second embodiment (FIG. 54), but as shown in FIG. 82, after the error notification (B5006) (or before), the frame decoration device 18 ( A process (B5006a) for prohibiting driving of the board decoration device 46 is added. The drive of the frame decoration device 18 is prohibited by the main control microcomputer 311 (FIG. 4) stopping the output of the signal to the frame decoration device 18 or by stopping the drive of the frame decoration LED control circuit 333.

FIG. 83 is a diagram showing a configuration example of the identification board 513 of the part 510 according to the seventh embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 83, the identification board 513 (I ² CI/O expander 815) of the part 510 of the seventh embodiment is the same as the identification board 513 of the second embodiment, but the bus controller 834 has The ROM 834a stores the part identification information (first identification information) of the identification board 513.

Therefore, the bus controller 834 determines whether or not the address of the data input from the connection line SDA matches the unique address (address determined by A3, A2, A1, A0) set in the I ² CI/O expander 815. It is determined whether or not they match, and the part identification information (first identification information) stored in the ROM 834a is output from the connection line SDA to the master IC 300a.

FIG. 84 is a diagram showing a reference table (FIG. 84(A)) for associating the model designation command and model identification information according to the seventh embodiment, and a reference table (FIG. 84(B)) showing the classification of incompatible models. ..

As shown in FIG. 84(A), in the memory (RAM 322, FeRAM 323 (FIG. 4), etc.) of the effect control means 300, a table of model compatible with the gaming machine 10 and model identification information corresponding thereto is stored. .. In FIG. 84(A), models A to D are registered as models that the gaming machine 10 can identify. For example, assuming that the model of the gaming machine 10 is model A (any one of model A-D), the part identification information of the attached parts 510 does not match the model identification information of model A. The driving (light emission) of the decoration device 18 (or the board decoration device 46) is prohibited, and an error notification is given.

Here, if the part identification information matches any of the model identification information of the models A to D, it is determined that the part 510 is a standard product compatible with the gaming machine 10. It can be determined that 510 is a nonstandard product that is not suitable for the gaming machine 10.

As described above, in the seventh embodiment, when the part 510B for the model B is attached to the model A of the gaming machine 10, the effect control device 300 causes the frame decoration device 18 (or the board decoration device 46) (FIG. The drive of 4) can be prohibited.

By the way, in the conventional game machine, as a device for providing the game machine at a low cost, a part (part 510) is changed as a part (model element) of the frame decoration device 18, but If the parts (parts 510) were incorrect when changed in the field, there was a possibility of causing a failure. Moreover, there is a possibility that the frame decoration device 18 may be used incorrectly.

However, in the seventh embodiment, even if the wrong unit (part 510B) is attached, it is not always necessary to prohibit the drive of the frame decoration device 18 (or the board decoration device 46), and the progress of the game is affected. By allowing a part of the part 510 to be driven within the range in which there is no problem, it is possible to reduce the factor of failure.

As shown in FIG. 84(B), in the memory (RAM 322, FeRAM 323 (FIG. 4), etc.) of the effect control device 300, when the part 510 does not fit the gaming machine 10, it is classified into three types as an error. Reference table is stored. The case where the parts 510 do not match the gaming machine 10 is a case where the parts identification information of the parts 510 and the model identification information (specific model identification information) of the gaming machine 10 to which the parts 510 are attached do not match.

The parts 510, which decorate the game board 30 (FIG. 2), are provided with LEDs and movable members that can be controlled by the effect control device 300. As shown in FIG. 84(B), the part 510 can be classified into a part including only an LED and a part including an LED and a movable member according to the corresponding part identification information.

For example, when the last two digits of the part identification number are “00” or “01”, it can be determined that the part 510 includes only the LED. Further, when the last two digits of the part identification information are “10” or “11”, it can be determined that the part 510 includes the LED and the movable member.

As shown in FIG. 84(A), the parts identification information has a form in which the corresponding model A-D can be identified by the lower two digits, but the model A-D can be identified by the upper two digits. It may be in a form that can. In this case, the first two digits of the part identification information can be used to determine whether the part 510 includes only the LED or the LED and the movable member. By comparing a part of the part identification information in this way, the types of the parts 510 can be classified.

From the above, the effect control device 300 (main control microcomputer 311), the part identification information (first identification information) transmitted from the part 510, and specific model identification information (second identification information) included in the effect control device 300. And the parts 510 can be classified into non-conforming products that do not match the conforming products that match the specific model identification information.

In the case of a conforming product, the part 510 can be driven without any limitation.

On the other hand, when the product is a non-conforming product, it is a standard product which is a standard product and has only LEDs according to the reference table of FIG. It can be classified into the third classification.

Regarding the first classification, as long as the part 510 is a standard product, since the LED rating of the part 510 corresponds to the gaming machine 10, it is possible to allow the lighting of the LED.

Regarding the second classification, the LED and the movable member of the part 510 can be driven as long as the part 510 is a standard product because its rating also corresponds to the gaming machine 10. However, there is a possibility that the parts 510 may be damaged when the operation mode of the movable member corresponding to the game machine 10 is different due to the difference in the model such as the reciprocating operation and the revolving operation. Therefore, in the second classification, it is necessary to prohibit the driving (moving, rotating, etc.) of the movable member of the part 510 while allowing the driving (light emission) of the LED.

Regarding the third classification, if the part 510 is a nonstandard product, the ratings of the LED and the movable member may be different from those of the gaming machine 10, and driving these may damage the board or the like on the gaming machine 10 side. Therefore, it is necessary to prohibit the driving of the LED and the movable member of the part 510 regardless of the presence or absence thereof.

When the part 510 is configured as a part of the board decoration device 46, the main control microcomputer 311 may limit only the signal related to the part 510 among the signals transmitted to the board decoration device 46. When the part 510 belongs to the second classification, the signal transmission of the LED of the part 510 is permitted and the signal transmission of the movable member is prohibited. For example, when the part 510 belongs to the third classification, It suffices to prohibit the transmission of signals relating to the LEDs and movable members of 510.

For example, when the I ² CI/O expander 815 shown in FIG. 83 drives the board decoration device 46, for example, PORT1 is a port for driving the LED of the part 510, and PORT2 is a movable member (motor) of the part 510. In the case of a port that drives, the output of signals belonging to the addresses of PORT1 and PORT2 may be prohibited.

Further, when the part 510 is configured as an independent part of the panel decoration device 46, the main control microcomputer 311 allows the transmission of the signal related to the LED of the part 510 when the part 510 belongs to the second classification. In addition, the transmission of the signal related to the movable member is prohibited, and when the part 510 belongs to the third classification, the transmission of the signal related to the LED of the part 510 and the movable member may be prohibited.

FIG. 85 is a diagram showing an example of a case where the driving mode is changed by classifying the parts 510 in the parts matching process according to the seventh embodiment. The parts matching process of the seventh embodiment is similar to the parts matching process of the second embodiment (FIG. 54), but if the parts identification information and the model identification information do not match (the result of B5005 is “N”), an error occurs. While notifying (B5006), error classification processing of part identification information is performed (B5006b). Note that, similarly to FIG. 82, a configuration in which the processing of step B5006a is executed between steps B5006 and B5006b in order to prohibit the driving of the frame decoration device 18 is also possible.

In the error classification process (B5006b), when it is determined that the part identification information belongs to the first classification, driving of the LED of the part 510 is permitted (B5006c).

In the error classification process (B5006b), when it is determined that the part identification information belongs to the second classification, the LED of the part 510 is allowed to be driven while the movable member of the part 510 is prohibited from being driven (B5006d).

In the error classification process (B5006b), when it is determined that the part identification information belongs to the third classification, the driving of the LED and the movable member of the part 510 is prohibited (B5006e).

In this way, even if the attached parts 510 are used in the wrong state, the progress of the game is not affected, and the factors causing the failure can be reduced, which can lead to a longer life.

[Operation/Effect of Seventh Embodiment]
As described above, the gaming machine 10 according to the seventh embodiment has a game control means (game control device 100) capable of executing a game, and an effect control means (effect control device 300) capable of executing an effect associated with the game. And a decoration device (board decoration device 46, frame decoration device 18) that is driven by the effect control means (effect control device 300) and performs a light emission effect. The gaming machine 10 includes a detachable part (part 510) to which electrically readable first identification information (part identification information) is assigned. The production control means (production control device 300) holds the second identification information (model identification information) corresponding to the model of the gaming machine 10, and reads the first identification information (part identification information) of the part (part 510). If the first identification information (part identification information) and the second identification information (model identification information) do not match as compared with the second identification information (model identification information), a part of the decoration device (frame decoration device 18, Alternatively, the drive of the board decoration device 46) is prohibited.

As a result, since the wrong part (part 510) is attached, the driving of a part of the decoration device (for example, the frame decoration device 18) is prohibited, so that the attached part (part 510) is wrong. A place manager or a person in charge can easily and quickly make a judgment, and the cause can be smoothly removed by exchanging a part (part 510).

In the seventh embodiment, the decoration device (the frame decoration device 18, the board decoration device 46) decorates the frame decoration device 18 that performs a light emission effect for decorating the frame of the game machine 10 and the game board 30 of the game machine. In the case where the first identification information (parts identification information) and the second identification information (model identification information) do not match, the production control means (production control device 300) includes a panel decoration device 46 for performing a light emission production for. In addition, the drive of the board decoration device 46 is permitted and the drive of the frame decoration device 18 is prohibited.

As a result, a game hall manager or a staff member can easily understand that the attached component (part 510) is wrong by whether or not the frame decoration device 18 is driven. Therefore, by exchanging the component (part 510), it becomes smooth. The cause can be removed.

In the seventh embodiment, the component (part 510) is configured as a part of the board decoration device 46. The production control means (production control device 300) is a standard product that is compatible with the gaming machine 10 and includes a light emitting member (LED) that can be driven by the production control device (production control device 300). The first classification, which is a standard product and includes a light emitting member (LED), and a movable member which can be driven by the performance control unit (production control device 300), and a non-standard product (a nonstandard product) It becomes possible to classify into the 3rd classification. The production control means (production control device 300) allows the drive of the component (part 510) in the case of the first classification, and the drive control of the light emitting member (LED) of the component (part 510) in the case of the second classification. The drive is allowed to prohibit the drive of the movable member, and in the case of the third classification, the drive of the part (part 510) is prohibited.

As a result, even if the attached component (part 510) is used in the wrong state, the progress of the game is not affected, and the factor of failure can be reduced, which can lead to a longer life.

Further, the gaming machine 10 of the seventh embodiment, a game control means (game control device 100) capable of executing a game, an effect control means (effect control means 300) capable of executing an effect associated with the game, and light emission. And a decoration device (board decoration device 46, frame decoration device 18) that produces an effect. The gaming machine 10 includes a detachable part (part 510) that is configured as part of the decoration device and is assigned electrically readable first identification information (part identification information). The production control means (production control device 300) holds the second identification information (model identification information) corresponding to the model of the gaming machine 10, and reads the first identification information (part identification information) of the part (part 510). Compared with the second identification information (model identification information), if the first identification information (part identification information) and the second identification information (model identification information) do not match, the part (part 510) is transferred to the gaming machine 10. The first category which is a conforming standard product and which includes a light emitting member (LED) that can be driven by the performance control unit (production control device 300), and a standard product, which is a light emitting member (LED), and a performance control unit (production). It can be classified into a second classification including a movable member that can be driven by the control device 300) and a third classification that is not a standard product (becomes a nonstandard product). The production control means (production control device 300) allows the drive of the component (part 510) in the case of the first classification, and the drive control of the light emitting member (LED) of the component (part 510) in the case of the second classification. The drive is allowed to prohibit the drive of the movable member, and in the case of the third classification, the drive of the part (part 510) is prohibited.

As a result, even if the attached component (part 510) is used in the wrong state, the progress of the game is not affected, and the factor of failure can be reduced, which can lead to a longer life.

In the seventh embodiment, the gaming machine 10 includes a display device 41 that displays an image related to the game, and the effect control means (effect control device 300) uses the first identification information (parts identification information) and the second identification information. When the (model identification information) does not match, the notification information 345 (“unit error”) indicating the mismatch is displayed on the display device 41.

Accordingly, by displaying the notification information 345 on the display device 41, it is possible to reliably notify the game hall manager or a staff member of the error.

In the seventh embodiment, the effect control means (effect control device 300) displays a variable display game in which the identification information is variably displayed on the display device 41, and a large symbol as a display area in the display device 41 of the variable display game. A first variable display area (variable display area 610) that performs variable display, and a second variable display area that is smaller than the first variable display area and that is smaller than a large symbol (615A, 615B, 615C). The variable display area (variable display area 615) is displayed, and the notification information 345 is displayed on the first variable display area without being displayed on the second variable display area.

Accordingly, even if the notification information 345 (“unit error”) is displayed, the player can confirm the progress and result of the variable display game in the variable display area 615.

In the seventh embodiment, the game machine 10 includes a board effect device 44 including movable movable bodies (44c, 44d). The production control means (production control device 300) can drive the movable bodies (44c, 44d) of the board production device 44, and the first identification information (parts identification information) and the second identification information (model identification information) do not match. In this case, the notification information 345 is displayed on the display device 41 in an area that does not overlap the area covered by the movable bodies (44c, 44d) by driving the board effect device 44.

Thereby, since the notification information 345 is not hidden by the movable bodies (44c, 44d), the notification information 345 can always be visually recognized.

In the seventh embodiment, the effect control means (effect control device 300) changes the display mode of the notification information 345 according to the position of the movable bodies (44c, 44d).

As a result, the display mode of the notification information 345 can be optimized to the highest visibility state according to the change in the position of the movable bodies (44c, 44d).

In the seventh embodiment, the gaming machine 10 includes sound output means (speakers (19a, 19b)) that outputs a sound effect according to the gaming state. When the first identification information (parts identification information) and the second identification information (model identification information) do not match, the production control means (production control device 300) outputs voice information indicating that they do not match (“unit error”). Is output to the sound output means (speakers 19a and 19b).

As a result, an error has occurred also in the game hall manager or a clerk in a position where the game board 30 (frame decoration device 18 or board decoration device 46) and the display device 41 on which the notification information 345 is displayed cannot be visually recognized. Can be made known.

[Eighth Embodiment]
The eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 86 to 96. The configurations other than those described below may be similar to those of the first to seventh embodiments. The seventh embodiment relates to initial operation control processing.

[Game board according to eighth embodiment]
First, with reference to FIG. 86, a game board 30 according to the eighth embodiment will be described. FIG. 86 is a front view of the game board 30 provided in the game machine 10 according to the eighth embodiment. The game board 30 according to the eighth embodiment is obtained by adding a light guide plate 251 and internal accessories 44c and 44d (inner movable member) to the game board 30 (FIG. 2A) of the first embodiment.

The light guide plate 251 is attached to the center case 40 and reflects a part of the light emitted from the light emitting member (for example, an LED) attached to the end portion and guided to the front, so that the light guide plate 251 can be visually recognized from the front. A pattern or the like (for example, a spark-like pattern as shown in FIG. 86) is made to appear on the surface in a known manner (see JP-A-2016-83463 and JP-A-2017-148150). The light guide plate 251 is arranged in front of the display device 41 (on the player side).

The internal accessories 44c and 44d (internal movable members) are provided in the board effect device 44, and cooperate with the effect display on the display device 41 to enhance effect effects.

In order to make the character “geki” of the internal character 44c conspicuous with the character “heavy” of the internal character 44c and a motor (not shown) that can be positioned in front of the display device 41 (player side). And a light emitting member (for example, an LED) capable of emitting light around the character.

Further, the internal accessory 44d is referred to as "heat" with a motor or the like (not shown) that can position the character "heat" of the internal accessory 44d in front of the display screen of the display device 41 (player side). A light emitting member (for example, an LED) capable of emitting light around the character to make the character stand out.

Therefore, by moving both the internal accessories 44c and 44d, the characters “intense heat” that can be visually recognized by the player are arranged in front of the display device 41 (FIGS. 86, 90, and 93). reference). As shown in FIG. 86, in the game board 30 according to the eighth embodiment, when the internal accessory 44c, 44d is moved when the pattern is raised on the surface of the light guide plate 251, the pattern and the internal accessory are moved. The display screens of the display device 41 are overlapped with 44c and 44d.

[Light guide plate control processing]
FIG. 87 is a flowchart showing a procedure of light guide plate control processing according to the eighth embodiment. The light guide plate control process may be executed by the effect control device 300 as a part of the decoration control process (B0020) in the main process (FIG. 36), for example.

The effect control device 300 first determines whether or not the power is on (B7001). Note that it may be determined whether or not the power is being restored.

When it is determined that the power is not turned on (the result of B7001 is “N”), the effect control device 300 performs the normal control process according to the effect contents set in the variable effect setting process (FIG. 44) and the like. It starts (B7003) and ends the light guide plate control process. On the other hand, when the effect control device 300 determines that the power is on (the result of B7001 is “Y”), the effect control device 300 determines whether or not the command for which the probability setting is being changed is received (B7002).

In the processing of step B7002, if the MODE section indicates the setting change system by the command of which probability setting is being changed in the one-shot system command processing (FIG. 39) (the result of B1325 is “Y”), It is determined that it is being received. That is, the front frame 12 (main body frame, main body portion) is opened (the result of A1023 or A1027 in FIG. 5A is “Y”), and the setting key switch 93 of the setting changing device 42 is turned on (A1024 or A1028). The result is “Y”), and the command for changing the probability setting is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 (A1041 in FIG. 5B). By pressing the set value change switch 102 of the setting change device 42 while changing the probability setting, the set value regarding the game condition is changed. In addition, the information of the set value regarding the changed game condition is displayed on the probability set value display device 143.

When the effect control device 300 determines that the command for which the probability setting is being changed is not received (the result of B7002 is “N”), that is, when the power is turned on normally, the internal accessory 44c, It is determined whether 44d is in the initial operation (B7005).

On the other hand, when the effect control device 300 determines that the command for which the probability setting is being changed is being received (the result of B7002 is “Y”), whether or not the command for ending the probability setting change is received. A determination is made (B7004).

In the process of step B7004, when the MODE section indicates the setting change system by the command of the probability setting change completion in the one-shot system command process (FIG. 39) in the process of B7004 (the result of B1325 is “Y”), It is determined that it is being received. That is, the probability setting value has been changed (the result of A2406 in FIG. 10 is “Y”), and the setting key switch 93 is turned off (the result of A2416 is “Y”), and the command for ending the probability setting change is the game. It is transmitted from the control device 100 to the effect control device 300 (A2421).

Then, production control device 300 ends the light guide plate control process when it is determined that the command for ending the probability setting change is not received (the result of B7004 is “N”), that is, when the probability setting is being changed. To do.

On the other hand, if the effect control device 300 determines that the command for ending the probability setting change is received (the result of B7004 is “Y”), that is, if the probability setting change is completed (after the setting ends), It is determined whether the internal accessories 44c and 44d are in initial operation (B7005).

In the process of step B7005, the performance control device 300 determines whether the internal accessory parts 44c and 44d are in the initial operation (B7005). Details of the initial operation of the internal accessories 44c and 44d will be described later with reference to FIG. 88.

When the effect control device 300 determines that the internal accessory parts 44c and 44d are in the initial operation (the result of B7005 is “Y”), the light guide plate control process is ended. In this way, the light emission (initial operation) of the light guide plate 251 is not executed during the initial operation of the internal accessories 44c and 44d. During the initial operation of the internal accessories 44c and 44d, the effect control device 300 is not limited to the light emission by the initial operation of the light guide plate 251, and may not perform the light emission by the light emission effect.

On the other hand, when the effect control device 300 determines that the internal accessory parts 44c and 44d are not in the initial operation (the result of B7005 is “N”), the effect control device 300 performs the initial operation control process of the light guide plate 251 (B7006). ..

In the initial operation control process (B7006) of the light guide plate 251, the effect control device 300 causes all the light emitting members attached to the end portion of the light guide plate 251 to emit light as the initial operation, as shown in FIG. 89, for example. Control is performed to reflect the light from the member forward from the light guide plate 251 (initial operation control).

FIG. 89 is a front view of the game board 30 when the light guide plate 251 according to the eighth embodiment is initially operated. The game hall manager or the like (including the hall staff) can confirm that the light guide plate 251 and the light emitting member operate normally by visually recognizing the floating pattern on the surface of the light guide plate 251. When the initial operation control process (B7006) of the light guide plate 251 ends, the production control device 300 ends the light guide plate control process. If the initial operation control condition of the external accessory 95a described later with reference to FIG. 88 is satisfied (the result of B7109 is “N”), the external accessory 95a is controlled together with the initial operation control of the light guide plate 251 as shown in FIG. The initial operation control may be performed. The external accessory 95a is a part of the frame production device, and is an accessory that can operate so as to project from above the glass frame 15 (opening portion), for example. Further, the display screen of the display device 41 is in an off state so that the pattern of the light guide plate 251 can be easily seen, but it may be displayed in a state where the brightness is lower than usual, and a dark color such as black is used as a basic tone. A character such as "initializing" (for example, character 431 in FIG. 90) may be displayed at a position not overlapping the pattern of the light guide plate 251 (a position visible from the front by the amusement hall manager or the like) on the created screen. ..

[Movable body control processing]
FIG. 88 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the movable body control process according to the eighth embodiment.

The production control device 300 first determines whether or not the power is on (B7101). Note that it may be determined whether or not the power is being restored.

When the effect control device 300 determines that it is not when the power is turned on (the result of B7101 is “N”), the normal effect control process according to the effect contents set in the variable effect setting process (FIG. 44) and the like is performed. It starts (B7103) and ends the movable body control process. On the other hand, when the effect control device 300 determines that the power is on (the result of B7101 is “Y”), the effect control device 300 determines whether or not the command for which the probability setting is being changed is received (B7102).

When it is determined that the command for changing the probability setting is received (the result of B7102 is “Y”), the effect control device 300 determines whether the command for ending the probability setting change is received (B7104). .. On the other hand, if the effect control device 300 determines that the command for changing the probability setting is not received (result of B7102 is “N”), that is, when the power is turned on normally, the light guide plate 251 is It is determined whether or not the initial operation is being performed (B7105).

In the process of Step B7104, the effect control device 300 determines that the command for ending the probability setting change has been received (the result of B7104 is “Y”), that is, if the probability setting change ends (setting end). After that, it is determined whether the light guide plate 251 is in the initial operation (B7105). On the other hand, when the effect control device 300 determines that the command for ending the probability setting change has not been received (the result of B7104 is “N”), that is, when the probability setting is being changed, the internal accessory 44c, Only 44d starts the initial operation control process (B7107).

In the initial operation control processing (B7107) of the internal accessory parts 44c and 44d, for example, the motor for moving the internal accessory object 44c and the motor for moving the internal accessory object 44d of the board effect device 44 are driven, respectively, and the characters "intense heat" are written. After the internal accessory parts 44c and 44d are moved to the front of the display screen of the display device 41 so that can be recognized, the control is performed to move them to the initial position (initial operation control). Note that, for example, the initial operation control of the internal accessory 44c and the initial operation control of the internal accessory 44d are performed in order so that the initial operation control of the internal accessory 44d is performed after the initial operation control of the internal accessory 44c is completed. May be run on. Similarly, when another internal accessory different from the internal accessory 44c, 44d is further attached, the initial operation control of each internal accessory is similarly executed.

In addition, in the process of step B7105, when the effect control device 300 determines that the light guide plate 251 is in the initial operation (the result of B7105 is “Y”), the process proceeds to step B7109, and the main frame is It is determined whether or not a body frame opening error due to being opened has occurred (B7109). On the other hand, when the effect control device 300 determines that the light guide plate 251 is not in the initial operation (result of B7105 is “N”), the process proceeds to step B7106, and the main body frame opening error occurs. It is determined whether there is any (B7106). For example, when a status ON command indicating a body frame opening error (front frame opening error) is received as an error/illegal command (B1315), it can be determined that the body frame opening error is occurring.

In the process of step B7106, when the effect control device 300 determines that the main body frame opening error has occurred (the result of B7106 is “Y”), the initial operation control process of only the internal accessory parts 44c and 44d is started ( B7107). On the other hand, when the effect control device 300 determines that the main body frame opening error has not occurred (the result of B7106 is “N”), as shown in FIG. 90, the internal role objects 44c and 44d and the external role object 95a are not displayed. The initial operation control process is started (B7108).

FIG. 90 is a front view of the game board 30 when the internal accessories 44c and 44d and the external accessory 95a according to the eighth embodiment are initially operated. In the process of step B7108, the effect control device 300 performs the initial operation control process of the external accessory 95a together with the initial operation control process of the internal accessory 44c, 44d as shown in FIG. 90, for example. Further, as shown in FIG. 90, when the internal accessory parts 44c and 44d are operated in front of the display screen of the display device 41, positions where they do not overlap from the front (positions where the game hall manager or the like can visually recognize from the front). The character 431 "Initializing" is displayed on the screen. When the initial operation control processing (B7108) of the internal accessory 44c, 44d and the external accessory 95a ends, the effect control device 300 ends the movable body control processing.

In addition, in the process of step B7109, when the effect control device 300 determines that the main body frame opening error has occurred (the result of B7109 is “Y”), the movable body control process ends. On the other hand, when the effect control device 300 determines that the main body frame opening error has not occurred (the result of B7109 is “N”), only the external accessory 95a starts the initial operation control process (B7110). While the light guide plate 251 is in the initial operation (the result of B7105 is “Y”), the initial operation control processing of the external accessory 95a is started, so that the game hall manager or the like can play the external role as shown in FIG. The operation of the object 95a and the pattern of the light guide plate 251 can be confirmed at the same time. Then, effect control device 300 ends the movable body control process. Also, during the initial operation of the light guide plate 251 (when the result of B7105 is “Y”), only the external accessory 95a is initialized (B7110), but the internal accessory 44c, 44d is initialized. No action is taken. During the initial operation of the light guide plate 251, the effect control device 300 is not limited to the initial operation of the internal accessories 44c and 44d, and may not be moved by the effect. The light emitting member may not emit light.

[Timing chart of initial operation control processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 91, the timing of the initial operation control process of the effect control device 300 according to the eighth embodiment will be described. FIG. 91 is a timing chart showing an example of the timing of the initial operation control process according to the eighth embodiment.

When the power is turned on in the normal state at time T71, the initial operation control process of the light guide plate 251 is started (B7006), and the light emitting member (LED) at the end of the light guide plate 251 emits light as shown in FIG. Start.

Further, when the initial operation control processing of the light guide plate 251 is started (the result of B7105 is “Y”), the movable body control processing starts the initial operation control processing of the external accessory 95a (B7110), and the external accessory. 95a moves (operates) to a position where it projects from above the game board 30. On the other hand, the internal accessories 44c and 44d are stopped without initial operation control, and the display screen of the display device 41 is in a turned-off state (off state).

At time T72, the initial operation control processing of the light guide plate 251 ends (the result of B7105 is “N”), the light emission of the light emitting member of the light guide plate 251 ends, and the initial operation control of the internal accessory parts 44c and 44d is performed. It starts (B7108), and as shown in FIG. 90, the internal accessory parts 44c and 44d move (operate) to the front of the display screen of the display device 41. The initial operation control processing of the external accessory 95a is continuously performed. Further, the character string 431 "Initializing" is displayed on the display screen of the display device 41 at a position (for example, the lower right of the screen) that does not overlap the internal accessories 44c and 44d (initialization display).

At time T73, the movement (operation) of the external accessory 95a and the internal accessory 44c, 44d ends, and the light emitting members of the internal accessory 44c, 44d start emitting light at their respective positions. When the light emission ends at time T74. In order to return to the original position, the movement of the external accessory 95a and the internal accessory 44c, 44d starts. As described above, while the internal accessories 44c and 44d (movable accessories) themselves are moving (operating), the light emitting members of the internal accessories 44c and 44d do not emit light (initial operation) in front of the display device 41. .. The movement of the external accessory 95a and the movement of the internal accessories 44c and 44d may not be started or ended at the same time.

At time T75, when the movement of the internal accessories 44c and 44d is completed, the initialization display displayed on the display screen of the display device 41 disappears and the display screen changes to the normal display screen (normal display). After that, at time T76, the movement of the external accessory 95a ends, and thus the initial operation control process of the effect control device 300 ends. The display screen of the display device 41 may be switched to the normal display when the movement of the external accessory 95a is completed at time T76.

Although the initial operation control process for the internal accessory parts 44c and 44d is performed after the initial operation control process for the light guide plate 251 is completed, the order may be reversed. That is, the initial operation control process of the light guide plate 251 may be performed after the initial operation control process of the internal accessories 44c and 44d is completed.

[Game board when the variable display game is played in normal time]
Next, with reference to FIG. 92 and FIG. 93, a case where the variable display game is played in the normal state in the effect control device 300 according to the eighth embodiment will be described. FIG. 92 is a front view of the game board 30 when the variable display game according to the eighth embodiment is being executed.

When the variable display game is played normally (when the initial operation control process, the probability setting is being changed, or the probability setting is not being confirmed), as shown in FIG. 92, the display on the game board 30 according to the eighth embodiment. On the display screen of the device 41, a plurality of variable display areas 610 (left area 610A, right area 610B, middle area 610C) decorative first symbols A to C (identification information, identification symbol, decorative special symbol) are variably displayed. It For example, the decoration first symbols A to C are displayed in the reach state as "7↓7" as shown in FIG. In addition, the internal accessory 44c, 44d is stopped at the position (initial position) before moving (moving), and a part of the lower portion of the internal accessory 44c overlaps the upper end portion of the display screen of the display device 41, A part of the upper portion of the internal accessory 44d overlaps with the lower end portion of the display screen.

FIG. 93 is a front view of the game board 30 when the reach effect, which is an effect corresponding to the reach state, is performed during execution of the variable display game according to the eighth embodiment.

When the reach effect is performed, for example, as shown in FIG. 93, a light emission effect in which lighting members around the frame decoration devices 18a and 18b and the upper speaker 19a emit light is performed, and the internal accessory parts 44c and 44b are displayed on the display device 41. By moving (moving or moving) to the front of the display screen, the player can recognize that the characters “intense heat” are displayed side by side. Further, a light-emission effect in which the light-emitting members of the internal accessory parts 44c and 44b emit light is performed, and an effect corresponding to the reach effect is also displayed on the display screen of the display device 41.

Then, by performing the reach effect from the state of FIG. 92, as shown in FIG. 93, the decorative first symbols A to C in the variable display area 610 are displayed small in the lower right part of the display screen. Instead of the decorative first designs A to C in the variable display area 610, the decorative reduced pattern (small pattern) in the variable display area 615 may be displayed small in the lower right of the display screen.

[Game board when a variable display game is played during the initial operation control process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 94, a case where the variable display game is played during the initial operation control process of the effect control device 300 according to the eighth embodiment will be described. FIG. 94 is a front view of the game board 30 when the reach effect is performed in the variable display game while the initial operation control process according to the eighth embodiment is being executed.

When the variable display game is played during the initial operation control process, as shown in FIG. 94, the display area of the display device 41 of the game board 30 according to the eighth embodiment is displayed at the lower right corner in the same manner as in the normal state. While the variable display “7↓7” of the 1 symbols A to C is displayed small, the effect on the display screen corresponding to the reach effect in FIG. 93 is not displayed. For example, the display screen of the display device 41 is displayed as a black screen without any display other than the decorative first symbols A to C. The display screen of the display device 41 may display an initialization display together with the variable display “7↓7” of the decorative first symbols A to C, or the entire screen when performing the initialization display. It may be displayed dark.

In addition, in the internal accessory objects 44c and 44d stopped at the initial position, the light-emitting effect in which the light-emitting member emits light is performed on the spot without moving. Therefore, the player can visually recognize that part of the lower end of the internal accessory 44c and part of the upper part of the internal accessory 44d are emitting light.

Although the internal accessory parts 44c and 44d emit light during the initial operation control process, the internal accessory parts 44c and 44d move to the front of the display screen of the display device 41, unlike the light emission effect accompanying the reach effect. After that, light emission is performed by the initial operation control processing. Further, the time for emitting light by the initial operation control process (from time T73 to time T74 shown in FIG. 91) may be any time that the game hall manager or the like can confirm the light emitting operation (for example, 5 sec), and reach production is performed. This is a relatively short time compared to the time (for example, 30 sec) for emitting light in the accompanying light emission effect. Therefore, when the player visually recognizes the light emission effect of the light emitting members of the internal accessory 44c, 44d, it can be recognized that the light emission effect is not the light emission by the initial operation control process but the light emission effect associated with the reach effect.

[Modification of game board when variable display game is played during initial operation control process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 95, a modification example in which the variable display game is played during the initial operation control process of the effect control device 300 according to the eighth embodiment will be described. FIG. 95 is a modification of the front view of the game board 30 when the reach effect is performed in the variable display game while the initial operation control process according to the eighth embodiment is being executed.

When the variable display game is played during the initial operation control processing, as shown in FIG. 95, the lower right part of the display screen of the display device 41 of the game board 30 of the modified example according to the eighth embodiment is the same as the normal time. On the other hand, the variable display “7↓7” of the decorative first symbols A to C is displayed small, but the effect on the display screen corresponding to the reach effect in FIG. 93 is not displayed. For example, the display screen of the display device 41 is displayed as a black screen without any display other than the decorative first symbols A to C. The display screen of the display device 41 may display an initialization display together with the variable display “7↓7” of the decorative first symbols A to C, or the entire screen when performing the initialization display. It may be displayed dark.

Further, in accordance with the reach effect, as shown in FIG. 95, a light emission effect in which an illumination member around the frame decoration devices 18a and 18b and the upper speaker 19a emits light is performed. On the other hand, the internal accessories 44c and 44d continue to stop at the initial position, and the light emitting member also keeps turning off. It should be noted that the time (for example, 5 sec) during which light is emitted by the initial operation control processing of the illumination members around the frame decoration devices 18a and 18b and the upper speaker 19a is similar to that of the internal accessory parts 44c and 44d described in FIG. The time is comparatively shorter than the time (for example, 30 sec) for emitting light in the light emission effect associated with. Therefore, when the player visually recognizes the light emission effect of the illumination members around the frame decoration devices 18a and 18b and the upper speaker 19a, the player recognizes that the light emission effect is not the light emission by the initial operation process but the light emission effect associated with the reach effect. You can

[Modification of game board when variable display game is played during initial operation control process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 96, a second modification example will be described in which the variable display game is played during the initial operation control process of the effect control device 300 according to the eighth embodiment. FIG. 96 is a second modification of the front view of the game board 30 when the reach effect is performed in the variable display game while the initial operation control process according to the eighth embodiment is being executed.

When the variable display game is played during the initial operation control process, as shown in FIG. 96, the lower right corner of the display screen of the display device 41 of the game board 30 of the second modified example according to the eighth embodiment is at the normal time. Similarly to the above, the variable display “7↓7” of the decorative first symbols A to C is displayed small, and the effect corresponding to the reach effect (original reach effect) of FIG. 93 is displayed on the entire display screen. Therefore, the player can recognize that the reach effect is performed by visually recognizing the effect displayed on the display screen of the display device 41.

On the other hand, the internal accessories 44c and 44d continue to stop at the initial position, and the light emitting member also keeps turning off. Further, the illumination members around the frame decoration devices 18a and 18b and the upper speaker 19a are also maintained in the off state.

[Operation/Effect of Eighth Embodiment]
The gaming machine 10 according to the eighth embodiment is a production related to a variable display game (special figure variable display game) in which the identification information (identification symbol, decorative special symbol, decorative first symbol A to C, this special symbol) is changed. Is provided on the display device 41 with an effect control unit (effect control device 300). The gaming machine 10 includes a movable accessory (internal accessory 44c, 44d) capable of executing a predetermined operation in front of the display device 41, and a light emission effect means (guide) capable of executing a predetermined light emission effect in front of the display device 41. The light plate 251 and its light emitting member or the light emitting members of the internal accessories 44c and 44d) are provided. The effect control means can execute the initial operation of the movable winning object and the light emitting effect means when the gaming machine 10 is powered on, and during the initial operation of the light emitting effect means, the initial operation of the movable accessory object. And does not execute a predetermined operation.

According to such a gaming machine 10, as a plurality of members that perform an effect related to the game, a movable accessory (internal accessory 44c, 44d) and a light emitting effect means (a light guide plate 251 and its light emitting member, or an internal accessory). With respect to the light-emitting members 44c and 44d), the initial operation can be easily confirmed, so that the maintenance can be efficiently performed.

Further, in the gaming machine 10 according to the eighth embodiment, the light emitting effect means (the light guide plate 251 and the light emitting members thereof, or the light emitting members of the internal accessories 44c and 44d) is predetermined based on the irradiation of light from the ends. The light guide plate 251 in which the pattern is raised, and an irradiation unit (light emission of the light guide plate 251) which is disposed at the end of the light guide plate 251 so as to face the facing surface of the light guide plate 251 and is capable of irradiating the light guide plate 251 with light. And a member). The effect control means (effect control device 300) performs the initial operation and the predetermined operation of the movable accessory (internal accessory 44c, 44d) while the irradiation means of the light emission effect means irradiates light by the initial operation. Do not run. According to such a gaming machine 10, the game hall manager or the like can confirm the initial operations of the light guide plate 251 and the movable accessory separately, so that the maintenance can be efficiently performed.

Further, in the gaming machine 10 according to the eighth embodiment, the light emitting effect means is a light emitting source (light emitting member) installed in the movable accessory (internal accessory 44c, 44d). According to such a gaming machine 10, the operation of the movable accessory itself and the light emitting operation of the light emitting effect means of the movable accessory can be individually confirmed as initial operations, so that maintenance can be performed efficiently as in the above. You can

The gaming machine 10 according to the eighth embodiment is a production related to a variable display game (special figure variable display game) in which the identification information (identification symbol, decorative special symbol, decorative first symbol A to C, this special symbol) is changed. Is provided on the display device 41 with an effect control unit (effect control device 300). The gaming machine 10 includes a movable accessory (internal accessory 44c, 44d) capable of executing a predetermined operation in front of the display device 41, and a light emission effect means (guide) capable of executing a predetermined light emission effect in front of the display device 41. The light plate 251 and its light emitting member or the light emitting members of the internal accessories 44c and 44d) are provided. The effect control means can execute the initial operation of the movable accessory and the light emitting effect means by turning on the power of the gaming machine 10, and during the initial operation of the movable accessory, the light effect effect of the light emitting effect means. And do not execute the initial operation.

According to such a gaming machine 10, as a plurality of members that perform an effect related to the game, a movable accessory (internal accessory 44c, 44d) and a light emitting effect means (a light guide plate 251 and its light emitting member, or an internal accessory). With respect to the light-emitting members 44c and 44d), the initial operation can be easily confirmed, so that the maintenance can be efficiently performed.

Further, in the gaming machine 10 according to the eighth embodiment, the light-emission production means causes the light guide plate 251 in which a predetermined pattern emerges based on the irradiation of light from the end, and the light guide plate 251 so that the light guide plate 251 faces the light guide plate 251. An irradiation unit (a light emitting member of the light guide plate 251) disposed at an end of the light plate 251 and capable of irradiating the light guide plate 251 with light. The effect control means (effect control device 300) does not cause the irradiation means to emit light during the initial operation of the movable accessory (internal accessory 44c, 44d). According to such a gaming machine 10, the game hall manager or the like can confirm the initial operations of the light guide plate 251 and the movable accessory separately, so that the maintenance can be efficiently performed.

[Ninth Embodiment]
The ninth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. The configurations other than those described below may be the same as those in the first to eighth embodiments. The ninth embodiment relates to an effect of a variable display game before and after power failure recovery.

[Timing chart of display mode of variable display game according to ninth embodiment]
FIG. 97 is a timing chart showing an example of the display mode (effect mode) timing of the variable display game before and after the power failure recovery according to the ninth embodiment.

At time T81, when there are two deviation hold and hit hold in the starting memory in this order, when the variable display game based on the deviation hold is started, the special figure LED used for executing the variable display game. (Special figure display (special figure 1 display 51 and special figure 2 display 52), light emission part) light emission starts (ON), and on the display screen of the display device 41, decoration identification pattern (identification information, identification pattern, decoration) The variable display by the special design, the decorative first design A to C, this design) is started. It should be noted that the off hold is a hold (starting memory) in which the display result (stop result) of the variable display game is in the out stop mode, and the hit hold is a hold when the display result of the variable display game is the big hit result (special result). Is.

On the other hand, the game state is not the special game state (big hit state) but the normal game state, and the internal accessory (44c, 44d) is stopped.

Then, the power is turned off at time T82 due to the power failure, and after the power failure state continues until time T83, when the power is turned on (power recovery) at time T83, the variable display game based on the detachment hold is restarted, LED light emission starts again (on). On the other hand, on the display screen of the display device 41, a power failure recovery screen (startup screen) is displayed instead of the decorative identification pattern. After that, the initial operation control processing of the internal accessory parts 44c and 44d is started along with the power recovery, so that the initial operation of the internal accessory parts 44c and 44d is performed as the first operation.

In the game control device 100 (starting storage means), a power failure occurs in a state in which the starting memory stored in the RAM includes a starting memory in which the display result of the special figure variation display game is a big hit result (special result). In this case, the backup power supply unit 420 can hold the starting memory having the special result.

At time T84, when the variable display game based on the out-of-order hold ends, the special figure LED is turned off (OFF). The special figure LED may be made to emit light (ON) in a state where the detachment stop mode is set.

Then, at time T85, when the variable display game based on the hit hold is executed, the special figure LED starts to emit light (ON). Further, on the display screen of the display device 41, when the power failure recovery screen ends, the decoration identification symbol is variably displayed corresponding to the variable display game based on the winning hold, and the reach effect is started. After that, the effect of the internal accessory 44c, 44d corresponding to the reach effect is executed as the reaching operation (second operation).

At time T86, when the variable display game based on winning hold ends, the special figure LED is turned off (OFF), and the reach operation of the internal accessory 44c44d ends. In addition, you may light (ON) the special figure LED in the state which becomes a big hit result mode (special result mode). Then, the decoration identification pattern on the display screen of the display device 41 stops the variable display, and the jackpot result mode (special result mode) such as “777” is displayed, and the fanfare production from time T86 to time T87 (not shown). ), a big hit effect (big hit medium screen, big hit round effect) is started from time T87.

When the big hit production is started at time T87, the game state becomes a big hit (big hit state, special game state), and the production of the internal accessory 44c, 44d corresponding to the big hit production is a big hit medium movement (third movement). To be executed. In this way, in any of the first operation, the second operation, and the third operation, the internal accessory objects 44c and 44d that are the same movable accessory objects operate.

When the initial display operation (first operation) of the internal accessory items 44c and 44d is not completed when the variable display game based on the hit hold is executed, the reach operation operation (second operation) is performed. It is also possible to skip without performing and perform the big hitting action (third action) after the first action.

In addition, when the power is turned on (power recovery) at time T83, the variable display game based on disconnection suspension may be restarted from the beginning without being restarted. In this way, by starting over from the beginning, even if the variation time of the variable display game based on the outlier suspension is short (in the case of variation without reach), there is a time margin, and during the variable display game, the internal accessory 44c, 44d is generated. Since the initial operation (1st operation) of 1 is easily completed, it is possible to execute the in-reach operation (second operation) without skipping after the initial operation.

It should be noted that the same movable accessory (internal accessory 44c, 44d) is operated in both the initial operation (first operation) and the reaching operation (second operation), and a big hit is made with the movable accessory. The middle operation (third operation) may not be executed. Further, the big hitting action (third action) may be executed by another movable accessory (a movable accessory other than the internal accessories 44c and 44d (for example, an external accessory 95a)). Even in such a mode, since the initial action of the movable accessory is executed during the variable display game based on the deviation hold, the action during the reach by the movable accessory is immediately started during the reach effect of the variable display game based on the hit hold. It is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game.

[Operation and effect of ninth embodiment]
The gaming machine 10 according to the ninth embodiment, the variation display game (special figure variation display game) in which the identification information (identification pattern, decorative special symbol, decorative identification symbol, decorative first symbol A to C, this special symbol) is changed. When the display result of is a special result (big hit result mode), it is possible to generate a special game state (middle jackpot, big hit game state) that gives a player a game value. The gaming machine 10 is a movable winning object (internal winning object 44c, 44d) that performs a game effect, and a starting memory (holding) that becomes the right to execute the variable display game based on the satisfaction of the starting condition (for example, winning at the starting winning opening). A starting storage means (game control device 100) capable of storing the, a control of a movable accessory, and a control for displaying a starting memory display (special figure changing pending display 643, pending display 633) corresponding to the starting memory. Executable effect control means (effect control device 300). When a power failure occurs in a state in which the stored starting memory includes a starting memory for which the display result of the variable display game is a special result, the starting memory holds the starting memory for the special result. When the power failure (power-off) occurs in a state where the start memory stored in the start memory means includes the start memory in which the display result of the variable display game is a special result, the effect control means restores the power failure. After that, the movable accessory is operated in the first operation (initial operation), and in the variable display game executed after the first operation, the movable accessory is operated in the second operation (reaching operation). In the special game state executed after the action of, the movable accessory is operated in the third action (the action during the big hit), and is the same in any of the first action, the second action, and the third action. Move the movable accessory of.

According to such a gaming machine 10, the second operation (reach) is performed by performing the first operation (initial operation) by the movable accessory (internal accessory 44c, 44d) after recovery from power failure (power recovery). Since it becomes possible to immediately start the production of the movable accessory by the middle action) and the third action (big hit medium action), it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game.

Further, in the gaming machine 10 according to the ninth embodiment, the effect control unit (effect control device 300) has a variable display game (special figure change) in the start memory (holding) stored by the start memory unit (game control device 100). In the case where a power failure (power off) occurs in a state in which a starting memory in which the display result of the display game) is a special result (big hit result mode) is included, the movable accessory (internal accessory 44c, 44d) is operated in the first motion (initial motion), and in the variable display game executed after the first motion, the movable accessory is operated in the second motion (reaching motion), and the first motion is performed. , And the second operation, the same movable accessory is operated. According to such a gaming machine 10, the second operation (reach) is performed by performing the first operation (initial operation) by the movable accessory (internal accessory 44c, 44d) after recovery from power failure (power recovery). Since it is possible to immediately start the production of the movable accessory by the middle action), it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game as well.

[Tenth Embodiment]
The tenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 98 and 99. The configurations other than those described below may be the same as those in the first to ninth embodiments. The tenth embodiment relates to display of identification information (decoration special symbol, ornament identification symbol) when a big hit occurs.

[Example of display screen of display device according to tenth embodiment]
FIG. 98 shows the display device 41 when the identification information (identification pattern, decorative special symbol, decorative identification symbol, decorative first symbol A to C, this special symbol) is displayed in each display mode in the tenth embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of a display screen.

First, in FIG. 98(a), when the gaming state is the normal gaming state, that is, during the first period, the stop result (display result) of the variable display game (special figure variable display game) is a big hit result mode (special result). Mode), that is, the display screen of the display device 41 in the first display mode. Decorative first symbols A to C (variable display area 610 (left area 610A (left variable display area 610A), right area 610B (right variable display area 610B), middle area 610C (central variable display area 610C)) The left symbol 611a, the right symbol 611b, and the middle symbol 611c) are stopped in a jackpot result mode, for example, "777", and the characters "!bonanza!" are displayed at the top of the display screen.

In the decoration first symbols A to C in the first display mode, the character (tiger Taro) and the character of the character name "tiger Taro" are displayed together with "7" of the identification information (design).

When the variable display game has a stop result, the starting memory (holding) corresponding to the variable display game is exhausted, and the special figure of the reserved exhaustion area 640 (specific display unit, changing pending display area) is changing. The hold display 643 (starting memory display, special figure digestion hold display) is not displayed. Further, although the hold display unit 630 (starting memory display unit) and the hold display 633 (holding, start memory) are not displayed, the hold display unit 630 may be displayed. Moreover, the effect control device 300 uses the decoration first symbols A to C in the first display mode to cause the character (tiger Taro, etc.) to perform a predetermined operation at the time of temporary stop, and thus the jackpot symbol (for example, “777”). You may make it produce the effect of stopping.

Next, FIG. 98(b) shows the stop result of the variable display game (special figure variable display game) when the game state is in the specific game state (probability variation state, probability variation state, time saving state), that is, during the second period. It is a display screen of the display device 41 when the (display result) is the big hit result mode (special result mode), that is, the second display mode. Variation display area 610 (left area 610A, right area 610B, middle area 610C) decoration 1st pattern A~C (left pattern 611a, right pattern 611b, middle pattern 611c), for example, "777" and stop in the jackpot result mode The word “!bonus!” is displayed at the top of the display screen. When the gaming state is the specific gaming state, for example, a right-handing instruction notification 691 may be displayed in the lower right corner of the display screen, which is an information for instructing the player to right-hand. Further, similar to the first display mode, the special figure changing pending display 643 and the like are not displayed.

In the decoration first symbols A to C in the second display mode, only “7” of the identification information (design) is displayed large, and the character and the character of the name of the character are not displayed.

FIG. 98(c) is a display screen of the display device 41 when the game state is the special game state (big hit state), that is, during the third period. On the display screen, a round effect is displayed as an operation related to the effect during the big hit. In the upper left corner of the display screen, a round number display 676 that displays the current number of big hit rounds is displayed, for example, “8 ROUND”.

Further, as the identification information (design) of the third display mode, in the variable display area 610D (stop pattern display area 610D) in the lower left corner of the display screen, the variable display game (special figure variable display) when the big hit result mode is achieved. Only one piece of identification information (stop pattern 611d) of the stop result (display result) of the game) is displayed (for example, "7"). Therefore, by visually recognizing the identification information (stop symbol 611d) of the third display mode, the player can confirm which symbol has been a big hit during the round. As a result, the player can easily recognize the type of the specific game state (probability variation state, probability variation state, time saving state) to be transferred after the end of the round from the symbol type (probability variation jackpot symbol or normal jackpot symbol) during the round. As a result, the interest in the game can be improved. The identification information of the third display mode (stop pattern 611d) may be displayed in the same display mode as the first display mode or the second display mode. Further, the identification information (design) of the third display mode may be displayed on the display screen not only during the round but also during the ending. Further, the identification information of the third display mode may be an effect of rotating the shaft as it is (eg, “7”). Further, the identification information of the third display mode may be axially rotated according to the effect during the round with the symbol as it is (for example, “7”).

In either case of the big hit state (special result) in the first display mode or the big hit state in the second display mode, the effect control device 300, the big hit game state (special game state (Round, fanfare production, ending production)), the identification information (stop pattern 611d) can be displayed in the third display mode. Therefore, the player can check the stop symbol 611d every time when the special game state is entered, and easily understand in advance an advantageous state (specific game state, privilege) that occurs after the special game state ends. Become.

In addition, the identification information (design) may be configured to include one or more common elements in any of the first to third display modes, for example, all the numbers of the design are displayed in red. Good.

[Screen transition diagram of display screen of display device according to tenth embodiment]
FIG. 99 is a screen transition diagram showing the display screen of the display device 41 in time series in the tenth embodiment, and the display result of the variable display game (special figure variable display game) is a special result mode (big hit result mode). It is an example of the screen transition of the entire game from when the special game (big hit round) is started.

FIG. 99(b1) is the same diagram as FIG. 98(a), and when the gaming state is the normal gaming state (during the first period), the stop result (display result) of the variable display game is the big hit result mode ( Special result mode), that is, the display screen of the display device 41 in the first display mode.

As shown in FIG. 99(b2), the effect control device 300 hides the decorative first symbols A to C in the first display mode. Further, the effect control device 300, as a part of the fanfare effect, the numbers (identification information, symbol) of the decorative first symbol B (right symbol 611b) of the variable display area 610B displayed when the big hit result mode is achieved ( For example, the identification information (stop pattern 611d) of the third display mode of the variable display area 610D is displayed at a position where "7") exists. In addition, although the character "!bonus!" is left at the top of the display screen, it may be hidden.

Then, as indicated by a broken line arrow in FIG. 99(b3), the effect control device 300 smoothly moves the identification information (stop design 611d) of the third display mode of the variable display area 610D to the lower center of the display screen. This allows the player to visually recognize the manner in which the "7" of the stop symbol 611d moves.

Then, as shown in FIG. 99 (b4), the effect control device 300 smoothly moves the identification information (stop pattern 611d) of the third display mode of the variable display area 610D to the lower left corner of the display screen by the start of the round. By doing so, "7" is displayed in the lower left corner of the display screen as in the stop pattern 611d of the third display mode described above in FIG. 98(c), and the round effect is started ("1 ROUND" is Is displayed).

Thus, when the display result of the variable display game is the big hit result mode, the decoration first pattern B (right pattern 611b) of the first display mode is displayed from the fanfare effect to the round effect, By displaying the identification information (stop symbol 611d) of the third display mode and smoothly moving the stop symbol 611d to the lower left corner of the display screen, the type of the specific game state after the end of the round can be easily played by the player. Can be recognized by the player, and a visual effect can be produced, so that the enjoyment of the game can be improved.

In FIG. 99, the identification information (stop pattern 611d) of the third display mode is displayed at the place where the decoration first pattern B (right pattern 611b) was displayed in the identification information (pattern) of the first display mode. Is displayed and the stop symbol 611d is moved to the lower left corner of the display screen, but the ornament first symbol A (left symbol 611a) or ornament first symbol C (middle symbol 611c) of the first display mode is displayed. The stop symbol 611d may be displayed at the place where it was displayed, and the stop symbol 611d may be moved to the lower left corner of the display screen.

[Operation/Effect of Tenth Embodiment]
The gaming machine 10 according to the tenth embodiment is an effect related to a variable display game (special figure variable display game) in which the identification information (identification symbol, decorative special symbol, decorative first symbol A to C, this special symbol) is changed. Is provided on the display device 41 with an effect control unit (effect control device 300). The production control means displays the identification information in the first display mode (the big hit result mode in the normal game state (FIG. 98(a))) during the first period (normal game state), and the second period. In the middle (specific game state), the identification information is displayed in the second display mode (the big hit result mode in the specific game state (FIG. 98(b))), and the display result of the variable display game is a special result (big hit). State), the identification information is displayed in the third display mode (the display mode in the special game state (FIG. 98(c)) during the special game state (big hit game state) in which the player is given a game value. )) is displayed.

According to such a gaming machine 10, since the display mode of the identification information changes according to the gaming state, it is possible to inform the player whether or not the gaming state is advantageous, so that the enjoyment of the game is improved. You can Further, by displaying the identification information during the special gaming state, it becomes easy to grasp in advance the advantageous state (specific gaming state, privilege) that occurs after the special gaming state ends.

Further, in the gaming machine 10 according to the tenth embodiment, the effect control means (effect control device 300), the identification information (identification symbol, decorative special symbol, decorative first symbol A to C, this special symbol) is the first. During the period (normal game state), when the special display (big hit state) is achieved in the first display mode (the big hit result mode in the normal game state (Fig. 98(a))), and during the second period (specific In the case of a special result in the second display mode (the big hit result mode in the specific game state (FIG. 98(b))) in the game state), in any case, during the special game state (big hit game state) , The identification information is displayed in the third display mode (the display mode in the special game state (FIG. 98(c)).) According to such a gaming machine 10, a special result is displayed in the first display mode. In either case, the identification information is displayed in the third display mode during the special game state, so that after the player finishes the special game state, It becomes easy to grasp the advantageous state (specific game state, privilege) that occurs in advance.

[Eleventh Embodiment]
The eleventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 100 to 103. The configurations other than those described below may be similar to those of the first to tenth embodiments. Further, in the following embodiments, the same reference numerals will be used for the configurations having the same functions as those of the first to tenth embodiments, and the duplicate description will be appropriately omitted.

The eleventh embodiment relates to a configuration mode (configuration mode) of the decoration special symbol of the decoration special figure variable display game executed on the display device 41 and a variation mode (variation display mode) of the decoration special symbol.

[Structure and variation of decorative special design]
FIG. 100 is a diagram showing a configuration mode and a variation mode of a decoration special pattern (decoration identification information, decoration pattern) displayed on the display screen of the display device 41. On the display screen, as the decoration special symbol, the left symbol 611a (first identification information), the right symbol 611b (second identification information), and the middle symbol 611c (third identification information) can be variably displayed. .. The variable displays of the left symbol 611a, the right symbol 611b, and the middle symbol 611c are displayed in the left variable display area 610A, the right variable display area 610B, and the central variable display area 610C, respectively. These variable displays are set by the effect control device 300 as part of the variable effect in steps B2010 and B2013 of the variable effect setting process. Regarding the variation in the decorative special figure variation display game, the variation before the reach is established may be referred to as the first half variation, and the variation after the reach is established (during the reach) may be referred to as the second half variation.

As in (A1) of FIG. 100, in the variable display before reaching the reach state, that is, before the reach is established, the left symbol 611a has a character image 612a (character component, character portion) and a number (character) indicating the character. Is formed of a character image 613a (character component, character part). Similarly, in the variable display before the reach is established, the right symbol 611b is composed of a character image 612b (character component, character part) showing a character and a character image 613b (character component, character part) showing a number. The numbers are letters that represent numbers, and include Chinese numerals, Roman numerals, etc. in addition to the Arabic numerals shown in the figure.

In the present embodiment, when the decoration special pattern includes a character and a number as an image, the character corresponds to the number in a one-to-one correspondence and differs for each number. May be used.

On the other hand, in the variable display before the reach is established in (A1), the middle pattern 611c displayed in the center is composed only of the character image 613c (character component, character part) indicating a number. In this way, the middle symbol 611c is displayed smaller than the left symbol 611a and the right symbol 611b, and the central variable display area 610C is smaller (narrower than the left variable display area 610A and the right variable display area 610B). ). Therefore, in the display screen, the area other than the variable display area 610 is widened, and the effect area for performing the effect other than the variable display can be effectively secured, and the enjoyment of the game is improved. In addition, the middle pattern 611c is composed of only the character image 613c indicating a number and is small, so that it does not overlap the left pattern 611a and the right pattern 611b (or the left variable display area 610A and the right variable display area 610B). The player can easily visually recognize each variable display of the left symbol 611a, the right symbol 611b, and the middle symbol 611c, and the enjoyment of the game is improved.

In (A1), not only the middle symbol 611c but also one of the left symbol 611a and the right symbol 611b may be composed of only the character images 613a and 613b showing numbers. In this case, the area other than the variable display area 610 is further expanded on the display screen.

Incidentally, in order to impress the character to the player, if the three decorative special symbols of the left symbol 611a, the right symbol 611b, and the middle symbol 611c each include a character image showing the character, three decorative symbol special symbols are obtained. The display screen occupies most of the display screen of the display device 41, and there is a possibility that the effect cannot be displayed effectively in areas other than the variable display area 610.

Further, before the reach of (A1) is established, the left symbol 611a and the right symbol 611b are variably displayed by vertical scrolling. For example, in vertical scrolling, a series of nine patterns (decorative identification patterns) corresponding to the numbers 1 to 9 appear on the display screen in order and cross the display screen in the vertical direction (vertical direction). After moving, it disappears from the display screen. The left symbol 611a and the right symbol 611b may be variably displayed by horizontal scrolling in which a series of a plurality of symbols moves in the horizontal direction.

On the other hand, before the reach of (A1) is established, the middle symbol 611c (third identification information) is the left symbol 611a (first identification information) and the right symbol 611b (second identification information) and the direction of the variable display. Are different from each other, and are variably displayed by the rotation fluctuation visually recognized by the player as if rotating around the axis. The rotation fluctuation is not limited to a mode in which one symbol rotates, but may be a mode in which a series of a plurality of symbols is switched and displayed every one rotation. In addition, instead of the rotation fluctuation, the front-back fluctuation (front-back scroll) that is shown by perspective etc. so that a series of overlapping symbols moves in the front-back direction, or simply switch the series of symbols at the same position in order. A switching change to be displayed or a shake change such that one symbol shakes slightly may be performed.

In addition, the rotational fluctuation of the middle symbol 611c (forward/backward fluctuation, switching fluctuation, swing fluctuation is also possible) is a fluctuation in which the symbol does not cross the display screen, and unlike the vertical scrolling of the left symbol 611a and the right symbol 611b, the left variable display It does not require a wide variable display area that extends long in one direction (scrolling direction) like the area 610A and the right variable display area 610B. Therefore, due to the rotational fluctuation of the middle symbol 611c, the central variable display area 610C becomes smaller (narrower) than the left variable display area 610A and the right variable display area 610B. Therefore, it is possible to effectively secure an effect area for effects other than the variable display, and it becomes easy to visually recognize the variable display of the left symbol 611a, the right symbol 611b, and the middle symbol 611c, and the enjoyment of the game is improved.

Further, in (A1), two hold displays 633 are displayed in the hold display section 630 in the lower part of the display screen in correspondence with the hold (here, the first start memory). In addition, a reserved digestion area 640 having a rectangular frame is displayed at the lower center of the display screen. A pending change display 633 a indicating a pending state of the special figure variation display game being executed (starting memory that was the execution right of this special figure variation display game) is displayed in the pending digestion area 640. However, due to the rotational fluctuation of the middle pattern 611c, the central fluctuation display area 610C becomes smaller and does not overlap the hold display section 630 or the hold exhaustion area 640, so the middle pattern 611c also overlaps the hold display 633 or the changing hold display 633a. Without, the visibility of the middle pattern 611c, the hold display 633, or the changing hold display 633a becomes good, and the enjoyment of the game is improved. Further, the special figure 1 hold number display 650 displays the number "2" of the current special figure 1 hold (first starting memory), and the special figure 2 hold number display 660 shows the current special figure 2 hold (second The number "0" of the starting memory) is displayed.

As shown in (A2) of FIG. 100, when the reach is established (when the reach is established), the left symbol 611a and the right symbol 611b temporarily stop and fluctuate. Therefore, the variation mode from the vertical scroll before the reach is established ( That is, the mode of variable display is changed and changed. The configuration of the left symbol 611a does not change, and the left symbol 611a is composed of a character image 612a showing a character and a character image 613a showing a number as in (A1). Similarly, the configuration mode of the right design 611b does not change, and the right design 611b is composed of a character image 612b showing a character and a character image 613b showing a number as in (A1). However, the overall size of the left symbol 611a and the right symbol 611b is smaller than that before the reach is established (before the temporary stop).

On the other hand, when the reach of (A2) is established, the middle symbol 611c is variably displayed by vertical scrolling, and the variation mode is changed from the variation display of the rotation variation before the reach is established. In addition, the direction of the variable display of the middle symbol 611c is the same as the direction of the variable display before the temporary stop of the left symbol 611a and the right symbol 611b (that is, the vertical direction or the vertical direction of the display screen), and it corresponds. (Variable display direction is aligned). Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the player's discomfort due to the rotation fluctuation of the middle pattern 611c, to surprise the player, and to increase the enjoyment of the game. In addition, in (a2), among the series of plural symbols (decorative identification symbols) that move on the display screen by vertical scrolling, the middle symbol 611c and the middle symbol 611c' of the numeral 5 are shown consecutively. There is.

Furthermore, when the reach of (A2) is established, the configuration of the middle pattern 611c is changed and changed, and from the configuration of the character image 613c before the reach is established, the character image 612c indicating the character and the character image indicating the number are displayed. The configuration changes to 613c. Therefore, the configuration mode of the middle symbol 611c becomes the same as the configuration mode of the left symbol 611a and the right symbol 611b, and there is commonality in these three (3 types) decorative special symbols and the player's discomfort is eliminated. In addition, it is possible to surprise the player and enhance the interest of the game. Further, since the player pays attention to the middle pattern 611c (611c') that is added to the character image 612c (612c') and changed to the new configuration mode, it becomes easier to understand the progress of the game such as the establishment of the reach. ..

In addition, the overall size of the left symbol 611a and the right symbol 611b is reduced from before the reach is established (before the temporary stop), so that the middle symbol 611c including the character image 612c and the character image 613c is variably displayed in the vertical scroll. Even, the left symbol 611a and the right symbol 611b (or the left variable display area 610A and the right variable display area 610B) do not overlap.

In addition, before and after the reach is established, the small symbol, which is a decorative special symbol that is variably displayed in the small variable display area 615, does not change the configuration mode and the variation mode, which gives the player a sense of security. it can. In addition, the left symbol 611a, the right symbol 611b, and the middle symbol 611c are large symbols, which are variably displayed in a small variable display area 615 compared to the variable display area 610 of the large symbol, and small decorative special symbols smaller than the large symbol are small symbols. And The small symbol may be the above-mentioned fourth special symbol (fourth symbol).

[Modifications of configuration and variation of decorative special design]
101: is a figure which shows the structural example of the decoration special symbol displayed on the display screen of the display apparatus 41, and the modification of a variation mode. The configuration other than the configuration described below is common to both FIG. 101 and FIG.

In (A1) of FIG. 101, the configuration mode and the variation mode of the decorative special symbol before the reach is established are changed from (A1) of FIG.

As in (1), in the variable display before the reach is established, the left symbol 611a is composed of only the character image 613a showing a numeral. Further, the right design 611b is composed only of the character image 613b showing a numeral. The left symbol 611a and the right symbol 611b are variably displayed by the rotational fluctuation visually recognized by the player so as to rotate about the axis. Instead of the rotation fluctuation, the above-mentioned front-back fluctuation and switching fluctuation may be used.

In (a1), the left fluctuation display area 610A and the right fluctuation display area 610B become smaller (narrower) than the central fluctuation display area 610C due to the rotation fluctuations of the left symbol 611a and the right symbol 611b. Therefore, it is possible to effectively secure an effect area for effects other than the variable display, and it becomes easy to visually recognize the variable display of the left symbol 611a, the right symbol 611b, and the middle symbol 611c, and the enjoyment of the game is improved.

On the other hand, in (a1), in the variable display before the reach is established, the middle symbol 611c is composed of a character image 612c showing a character and a character image 613c showing a number. The middle pattern 611c is variably displayed by vertical scrolling.

In (A2) of FIG. 101, when the reach is established (when the reach is established), the left symbol 611a and the right symbol 611b temporarily stop and fluctuate, so that the variation mode is changed from the rotation variation before the reach is established. Change. The configuration of the left design 611a is changed and changed, and the configuration of the character image 613a before the reach is established is changed to the configuration of the character image 612a showing the character and the character image 613a showing the number. .. The configuration of the right design 611b is also changed and changed, and the configuration of the character image 613b before the reach is established is changed to the configuration of the character image 612b showing the character and the character image 613b showing the number. .. By changing the configuration of the left symbol 611a, the right symbol 611b, and the middle symbol 611c, it is possible to give a surprise to the player and enhance the interest of the game.

Further, in (a2), when the reach is established, the middle symbol 611c is variably displayed due to the rotation variation, and the variation mode is changed from the variation display in the vertical scroll before the reach is established. Instead of the rotation fluctuation, the above-mentioned front-back fluctuation and switching fluctuation may be used. The direction of the variable display of the middle symbol 611c corresponds to the direction of the variable display of the left symbol 611a and the right symbol 611b before the temporary stop (that is, the circumferential direction around the axis). The change in the variation pattern of the left symbol 611a, the right symbol 611b, and the middle symbol 611c can surprise the player and enhance the interest of the game.

Similarly, in (A2), due to the rotation fluctuation of the middle symbol 611c, the central fluctuation display area 610C becomes smaller (narrower) than the left fluctuation display area 610A and the right fluctuation display area 610B. Therefore, it is possible to effectively secure an effect area for effects other than the variable display, and it becomes easy to visually recognize the variable display of the left symbol 611a, the right symbol 611b, and the middle symbol 611c, and the enjoyment of the game is improved.

[Reference table]
The table of FIG. 102A is a reference table that is referred to by the effect control device 300 in steps B2010 and B2013 of the variable effect setting process, for example. Such a reference table is stored in the storage unit (memory such as RAM 322 and FeRAM 323) of the effect control device 300. The effect control device 300 refers to the table in FIG. 102A and sets the configuration mode and the variation mode of the decorative special symbol as a part of the variation effect. The table of FIG. 102A corresponds to the configuration mode and variation mode of the decoration special symbol of FIG.

The effect control device 300 can determine from the variation pattern type (B1904, B2001) whether or not the decorative special figure variation display game to be executed has a reach. When there is a reach, that is, when a reach occurs, as shown in the table of FIG. 102A, the configuration mode and the variation mode of the decorative special symbol before the reach is established and after the reach is established are set. As a result, as shown in FIG. 100, when the reach is established, the left symbol 611a and the right symbol 611b are changed from the vertical scroll before the reach is established to the temporary stop state, but the configuration mode including the numbers and the characters is not changed. When the reach is established, the middle pattern 611c is changed from the rotation fluctuation before the reach is established to a vertical scroll, and the configuration mode is changed from one including only numbers to one including numbers and characters.

Note that, in the present embodiment, before the reach is established, the configuration mode and the variation mode of the decorative special symbol are not changed from the start of the decorative special figure variation display game to the establishment of the reach, but a configuration may be changed. That is, just before the reach is established, the configuration and variation before the reach as in the table of FIG. 102A may be set.

When there is no reach, that is, when the reach does not occur, as shown in the table of FIG. 102A, the configuration mode and the variation mode of the decorative special symbol are set so as not to change from the start to the end of the decorative special symbol variable display game. From the start to the end of the decorative special figure variation display game, the left symbol 611a and the right symbol 611b are variably displayed by vertical scrolling, and the middle symbol 611c is variably displayed by rotational variation.

The effect control device 300 may also be configured to determine the variation mode of the decoration identification symbol by lottery. For example, when there is no reach, the middle symbol 611c may be vertically scrolled with a high winning probability, and may be rotationally changed with a low winning probability (unlike FIG. 102A, the middle symbol 611c may also be vertically scrolled). On the contrary, if there is a reach, before the reach is established, the middle symbol 611c may be vertically scrolled with a low winning probability, and may be rotationally changed with a high winning probability (unlike FIG. 102A, the middle symbol 611c may also be vertically scrolled). .. In this way, when the decorative special figure variation display game is started, it is possible to notify the degree of expectation of reach and thus the degree of expectation of big hit by the rotational variation (variation mode) of the middle symbol 611c. That is, if there is a fluctuation in the rotation of the middle symbol 611c, the player can expect the occurrence of the reach and thus the big hit, and the interest of the game is improved.

In addition, it is also possible to set a configuration mode and a variation mode of the decorative special symbol according to a game state such as a normal game state or a time saving/probably changing state (specific game state). For example, in a time saving/probable variation state where the variation time is short, it is difficult to understand even if the configuration mode and the variation mode of the decoration special symbol change, so the configuration mode and the variation mode of the decoration special symbol from the start to the end of the decorative special symbol variation display game You may set so that it may not change. In addition, since the decoration special figure 2 variable display game frequently occurs in the time-shortened/probably variable state and the fluctuation time becomes short, the decoration special figure 2 variable display game starts the decoration special figure variable display game regardless of whether the reach is present or not. From the end to the end, the configuration mode and the variation mode of the decoration special symbol may be set not to change. That is, the configuration mode and the variation mode of the decorative special symbol may be changed before and after the reach is established only in the decorative special figure 1 variable display game.

Further, according to the reach system (N reach, SP reach, etc.) that is known from the variation pattern type (B1904, B2001), the configuration mode and the variation mode of the decorative special symbol after the reach is established may be set. By doing so, the expectation level of the big hit can be notified by the configuration mode and the variation mode of the decoration special symbol.

102B is a modification of the reference table corresponding to FIG. 101. With this reference table, as shown in FIG. 101, when the reach is established, the left symbol 611a and the right symbol 611b are changed from the rotation fluctuation before the reach is established to a temporary stop state, and the configuration mode includes only numbers. And changes to include the character. When the reach is established, the middle pattern 611c is changed from the vertical scroll before the reach is established to the rotational fluctuation, and the configuration mode is changed from one including numbers and characters to one including only numbers. When there is no reach (when the reach does not occur), as in the table of FIG. 102B, from the start to the end of the decorative special figure variation display game, the configuration mode and the variation mode of the decorative special symbol are set not to change.

In FIGS. 102A and 102B, one of the left symbol 611a and the right symbol 611b before the reach is established may have the same configuration mode and variation mode as the middle symbol 611c. In this case, the area other than the variable display area 610 is further expanded on the display screen before the reach is established.

〔Screen transition〕
103A and 103B are screen transition diagrams showing the display screens of the display device 41 in time series with respect to the eleventh embodiment.

(A) of FIG. 103A is a display screen when the decorative special figure variable display game is started. As the stop result of the previous decorative special figure variable display game, the left symbol 611a, the right symbol 611b, and the middle symbol 611c are displayed in the variable display area 610. Further, the out-of-stop symbols of the three small symbols are displayed in the small variable display area 615. Then, the hold display 633 displayed corresponding to the hold (here, the first start memory) is moved to the right (hold shift), and the hold display 633 at the right end of the hold display unit 630 is displayed in the hold exhaustion area 640 of the rectangular frame. Moves (hold shift). Further, in the special figure 1 hold number display 650, the number of special figure 1 hold (first starting memory) changes from “3” to “2”, and in the special figure 2 hold number display 660, the current special figure 2 hold The number "0" of (second starting memory) is displayed.

(A2) of FIG. 103A is the same as (A1) of FIG. 100, but the variation of the left symbol 611a, the right symbol 611b, and the middle symbol 611c as the decorative special symbol (large symbol) is in the variable display area 610. It is being executed, and the change of the small symbol as the decoration reduced symbol is being executed in the variable display area 615. The left symbol 611a and the right symbol 611b are enlarged in size and fluctuated by vertical scrolling compared to the stop symbol which is the stop result of the decorative special figure variable display game in which the reach of (C1) has occurred (configuration) The aspect does not change). In addition, the middle pattern 611c is changed from the configuration of the stop pattern (consisting of the character image 612c and the character image 613c), which is the stop result of the decorative special figure variable display game in which the reach of (C1) has occurred, and indicates a number. The rotation changes in a configuration mode including only the character image 613c.

(C3) (C4) After the fluctuation display is continued, reach is generated as in (C5) of FIG. 103A, and the left symbol 611a and the right symbol 611b are temporarily stopped (fluctuation fluctuation). Along with this, the configuration mode and the variation mode of the middle symbol 611c change. Note that (C5) in FIG. 103A is the same as (A2) in FIG. 100, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Subsequently, as in (C6), after the reach variation continues, as in (C7), in addition to the left symbol 611a and the right symbol 611b, the middle symbol 611c is also temporarily stopped (fluctuation variation) and 3 Two patterns are temporarily stopped (swing fluctuation). After that, as in (C8), the three symbols are completely stopped, and the stop symbols are displayed.

In addition, in the disengagement stop design of (C8), the size of the left design 611a and the right design 611b is enlarged from the decorative design at the time of the temporary stop (sway fluctuation) of (C7). In addition, the middle pattern 611c changes from the configuration mode (consisting of the character image 612c and the character image 613c) at the time of the temporary stop (sway fluctuation) of (C7), and changes to the configuration mode consisting of only the character image 613c indicating a numeral. To do.

After that, in (C9), the decorative special figure variation display game is executed again. Then, since the reach does not occur after the decorative special figure variable display game continues as in (C10), in (C11), the configuration mode and the variation mode of the left symbol 611a, the right symbol 611b, and the middle symbol 611c are The change-off stop pattern is displayed without changing.

As described above, the configuration mode and the variation mode of the decoration special symbol have been described, but when the pseudo continuous effect is executed, the left symbol 611a and the right symbol 611b are temporarily stopped even before the reach is established. Alternatively, the configuration mode and the variation mode of the middle symbol 611c may be changed. It should be noted that the pseudo continuous effect is a pseudo variation (sub-variation) in which the decorative special symbol that is variably displayed is temporarily stopped (pseudo stop) from the start to the end of one special figure variation display game. Is an effect that is continuously performed a predetermined number of times. In addition, at the time of temporary stop, a pseudo continuous symbol suggesting a pseudo continuous effect may be stopped and displayed as a middle symbol 611c.

Further, the configuration mode of the decorative special design is not limited to the mode consisting of only the character image or the character image and the character image, but the mode consisting of the character image and the frame image surrounding the character image, or the character image and the character image. A mode including a frame image (a character image and a character image surrounding the character image) may be included. Further, instead of the character image, another image such as a frame image may be used.

[Operation/Effect of Eleventh Embodiment]
According to the eleventh embodiment, the gaming machine 10 displays the first identification information (for example, the left symbol 611a), the second identification information (for example, the right symbol 611b), and the third identification information (for example, the middle symbol 611c). An effect control unit (effect control device 300) capable of displaying a variable display game to be variably displayed on the display device 41 is provided. The effect control means can display the first identification information or the second identification information in a configuration mode including a constituent element (character image) indicating a character and a constituent element (character image) indicating a number on the display device 41. .. The production control means, together with the first identification information and the second identification information, the third identification information in a configuration mode that includes a component (character image) indicating a number and does not include a component (character image) indicating a character. , Can be displayed on the display device 41.

According to such a gaming machine 10, since the third identification information (for example, the middle pattern 611c) has a configuration mode that includes a component element (character image) indicating a number and does not include a component element (character image) indicating a character, On the display screen of the display device 41, an area other than the variable display area 610 for displaying each piece of identification information is expanded. Therefore, in this expanded area, it is possible to effectively secure an effect area for effects other than the variable display, and the enjoyment of the game is improved. In addition, the third identification information (for example, the middle pattern 611c) is small because it is composed only of character images indicating numbers, so the first identification information (for example, the left pattern 611a) and the second identification information (for example, the right pattern 611b). , And the third identification information (for example, the middle pattern 611c) can be displayed without overlapping with each other, the player can easily visually recognize the variable display of the identification information, and the enjoyment of the game is improved. Therefore, in order for the player to recognize a character such as a character that is a motif of the effect of the gaming machine 10, the character image is the first identification information (for example, the left symbol 611a) or the second identification information (for example, the right symbol 611b). ), the variable display game can be surely executed on the display device 41.

Further, according to the eleventh embodiment, the effect control means (effect control device 300) changes and displays the configuration mode of the third identification information (for example, the middle pattern 611c) when the reach is established for the variable display game. It can be displayed on the device 41. Therefore, the player can be surprised and the enjoyment of the game can be enhanced. Further, since the player pays attention to the third identification information changed to the new configuration mode, the player can easily understand the progress of the game such as the establishment of the reach.

Further, according to the eleventh embodiment, the effect control means (effect control device 300) changes the third identification information (for example, the middle pattern 611c) as the change mode before the reach is established for the variable display game. The first identification information (for example, the left symbol 611a) and the second identification information (for example, the right symbol 611b) are made different from the aspect. Further, the effect control means (effect control device 300) temporarily stops the first identification information and the second identification information when the reach is established with respect to the variable display game, and changes the third identification information to the variation mode. This is made to correspond to the variation mode of the first identification information and the second identification information before the temporary stop.

Therefore, before the reach is established, the direction of the variable display of the third identification information (for example, the middle symbol 611c) is the first identification information (for example, the left symbol 611a) and the second identification information (for example, the right symbol 611b). The player's discomfort due to the fact that the direction is different from that of the variable display is reduced when the reach is established. Further, by changing the direction of the variable display of the third identification information (for example, the middle pattern 611c), it is possible to surprise the player and enhance the interest of the game.

[Twelfth Embodiment]
The twelfth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 104 to 108. The configurations other than those described below may be similar to those of the first to eleventh embodiments. Further, in the following embodiments, the same reference numerals are used for the configurations that perform the same functions as those of the first to eleventh embodiments, and the duplicate description will be appropriately omitted.

The twelfth embodiment relates to a hitting method notification for giving a recommendation (or instruction, guidance, notification) to the player about a specific hitting method such as left hitting or right hitting. As described above, the hitting method is a launching mode of the ball launching device, and corresponds to an area in the game area 32 where it is recommended to shoot and let the game ball flow down. In particular, in the hitting notification for notifying the hitting information, the hitting instruction display such as the right hitting instruction displays 657 and 658 and the left hitting instruction display 659 displayed on the display screen of the display device 41, or indirectly specified. A mode display 645 for recommending how to hit the player is included.

The right hitting notification of the hitting notifications recommends to the player to shoot the game ball to the right area (first game area) which is an area on the right side of the center case 40 in the game area 32. Among the hitting notifications, the left hitting notification (normal hitting notification) recommends to the player to shoot the game ball to the left area (second game area) which is an area on the left side of the center case 40 in the game area 32. ..

In the present embodiment, in the normal game state, it is recommended to shoot a game ball in the left area of the game area 32, and the player is informed of left hit information for recommending left hit. Further, in the special game state (big hit state, small hit state), which is more advantageous to the player than in the normal game state, and in the specific game state (time saving state or probability variation state), a game ball is shot to the right area of the game area 32. Is recommended, and the player is informed of right-handing information for recommending right-handing.

[Main processing (production control device)]
The main processing according to the twelfth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 104 is a flowchart showing a procedure of main processing executed by effect control device 300. The main processing of FIG. 104 is obtained by adding step B0014a to the main processing of FIG. The same steps as those in FIG. 36 are designated by the same step numbers, and description thereof will be omitted.

In step B0014a, based on the game state determined from the command received in the received command check process of step B0014, a hitting style notification process is executed to notify the player of how to hit left or right.

[How to hit]
FIG. 105 describes the details of the hitting method notification process (B0014a) in the above-described main process (FIG. 104). FIG. 105 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the hitting style notification process executed by the effect control device 300.

The effect control device 300 first determines whether or not the current game state is a special game state (a big hit state or the like) or a time saving/probability variation state (specific game state) (B3501). When the current gaming state is the normal gaming state (result of B3501 is “N”), the hitting style notification process is ended.

The effect control device 300, the information of the hit system command received most recently, the information of the symbol system command received most recently (special figure type of B1801, symbol type of B1802), the number of continuation of the probability variation state (for example, 50 times or Until next time), the current game state is the normal game state, the special game state (from the number of continuation of the time saving state (for example, 70 times), the number of times of execution of the special figure variation display game after the big hit, probability information (B1313), etc. It is possible to determine whether it is a big hit state, etc.), a probability variation state, or a time saving state. From the symbol type of B1802, it is possible to know whether it is a definite strange big hit that becomes a definite change state after the big hit ends or a normal big hit that becomes a time saving state after the big hit ends. Further, the current game state can be determined also from the effect mode (B1318) corresponding to the stop symbol pattern and the probability state.

When the current game state is the special game state (big hit state, etc.) or the time saving/probability variation state (specific game state) (the result of B3501 is “Y”), the production control device 300 gives the batting information. Of the way of striking instructions, the right-hand striking instruction display 657 (first display) in the normal mode is set to be displayed on the display device 41 (B3502). Next, it is determined whether or not it is currently after a predetermined timing (B3503). When it is not after the predetermined timing (result of B3503 is “N”), the hitting method informing process ends.

Here, the predetermined timing is the start of the big hit ending, the start of the time-shortening/probability changing state, or the timing in the middle of the time-shortening/probability changing state. The start of the big hit ending is when the ending command is received (B2111). The start of the time reduction/probability change state is the time when the variable system command (fluctuation command) is received for the first time after the ending command is received (B1206). It should be noted that in the present embodiment, either the time saving state or the probability variation state always occurs after the end of the big hit state. The timing in the middle of the time reduction/probability variation state is, for example, when a variation system command (variation command) is received a predetermined number of times (for example, 10 times) after the start of the time reduction/probability variation state.

On the other hand, the effect control device 300, when it is after the predetermined timing (result of B3503 is “Y”), displays a mode display (second display) corresponding to the current game state as the hitting notification as the display device 41. Is set (B3504), and the hitting method informing process ends. The mode of the mode display may correspond to the effect mode that reflects the probability change state.

With such a hitting notification process, a right hitting instruction display 657 (first display) is provided as a right hitting notification for recommending to the player to shoot a game ball in the right area (first game area) of the game area 32. The mode display (second display) can be displayed on the display device 41. If the current game state that can be seen from the mode display is a time saving/probability variation state (specific game state), the player can recognize that he should hit the right hand. Therefore, it is possible to surely execute the right-handed notification by both the right-handed instruction display 657 (first display) and the mode display (second display).

By the processes of steps B3501 and B3502, the right-handing instruction display 657 is continuously displayed in the special gaming state and the time saving/probably changing state (specific gaming state) that is shifted after the special gaming state. Therefore, by the right-handing instruction display 657, the right-handing notification can be continuously executed for a necessary period (special game state and time saving/probability variation state), and the player can overlook the right-handing notification. There is no.

Further, by the processing of steps B3503 and B3504, the mode display (second display) is after a predetermined timing (at the end of the special game state, at the start of the specific game state, or in the middle of the specific game state). Will be displayed. By displaying the mode display, the player can grasp the probability change state and the normal electric power support state and also recognize that the game ball is launched in the right area, so that the interest of the game is enhanced. In addition, if the predetermined timing is the end of the special game state or the start of the time saving/probability variation state, the mode display can be displayed in an appropriate period. In addition, if the predetermined timing is in the middle of the time saving/probability change state, avoiding the ending effect at the end of the special game state or the effect at the start of the specific game state, the mode display is not disturbed by other effects. Can be displayed.

[Single-shot command processing]
The single-shot system command processing (B1212) according to the twelfth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 106 is a flowchart showing a procedure of a one-shot system command process executed by the effect control device 300 in the received command analysis process (FIG. 38). The single-shot command processing of FIG. 106 is obtained by adding steps B1333 and B1334 to the single-shot command processing of FIG. Note that the same processing as that in FIG. 39 is assigned the same step number and description thereof is omitted.

Production control device 300, if the MODE part does not represent the command of the symbol stop (the result of B1329 is "N"), the MODE part determines whether or not the striking instruction command (B1333). The hitting instruction command is a right hitting instruction notification command (A2705) or a left hitting instruction notification command (A7703). When the MODE part does not represent the hitting direction command (result of B1333 is “N”), the single shot system command process is ended.

Rendering control device 300, when the MODE part represents the hitting instruction command (result of B1333 is “Y”), executes the hitting instruction reception time process which is the process when the hitting instruction command is received (B1334). ), the single-shot command processing ends.

[Processing at the time of receiving a hitting instruction]
FIG. 107 describes the details of the hitting instruction reception process (B1334) in the above-described single-shot system command process (FIG. 106). FIG. 107 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the hitting style notification process executed by the effect control device 300.

The production control device 300 first determines whether or not the command in the MODE section is a normal command (B3701). If the command of the MODE part is not a normal command (result of B3701 is “N”), the process at the time of receiving the hitting instruction is ended.

When the command of the MODE section is a normal command (result of B3701 is “Y”), the effect control device 300 determines whether or not the right-handing instruction notification command has been received among the hitting instruction commands, that is, the received hitting instruction. It is determined whether the direction instruction command is a right-handed instruction notification command (B3702). When the right-handing instruction notification command is received (the result of B3702 is "Y"), the right-handing instruction display 658 (first display) in the special mode is set to be displayed (B3703), and the hitting instruction reception process is ended.

When a left-handing instruction notification command is received among the hitting instruction commands (the result of B3702 is “N”), the left-handing instruction display 659 (third display) of the hitting instruction displays is set as the notification of the hitting instruction. (B3704), the process at the time of receiving the hitting instruction is ended.

〔Screen transition〕
108A to 108C are screen transition diagrams illustrating the display screen of the display device 41 in time series with respect to the twelfth embodiment.

In FIG. 108A, (D) is a display screen in the variable display area 610 during execution of the decorative special figure variable display game. Here, the special figure variable display game is the special figure 1 variable display game. A pending change display 633a indicating a pending state related to the special figure variation display game being executed is displayed in the pending digestion area 640. Further, one hold display 633 is displayed on the hold display portion 630a in correspondence with the hold (here, the first start memory) related to the special figure variation display game before execution. The hold display unit 630a displays a hold display 633 (starting memory display) corresponding to the first starting memory. Further, the special figure 1 pending number display 650 displays the number "1" of the current special figure 1 pending (first starting memory), and the special figure 2 pending number display 660 shows the current special figure 2 pending (second The number "0" of the starting memory) is displayed.

After that, in (2), the decorative special figure variation display game ends, and the big hit stop symbol “3, 3, 3” corresponding to the big hit result is derived. Here, the pending change display 633a has been deleted.

Then, in (D3), the big hit fanfare effect is executed, "Congratulations on big hit!!" is displayed in the center of the display screen, and the big hit stop symbol "3, 3, 3" is moved to the upper left corner. It is displayed small. The jackpot stop symbol here is a 6R probability variation jackpot symbol, and will be described below. In the present embodiment, the big hit state (special game state) starts when the effect control device 300 receives the big hit fanfare command and starts the big hit fanfare effect.

Further, in (D3), the right-hand hitting instruction display 657 (first display) in the normal mode is displayed in the upper right corner of the display device 41 by the processing in step B3502 of the hitting style notification processing (FIG. 105). In the right-handed instruction display 657 in the normal mode, a character image 657a "right-handed" (character display) indicating a character and a graphic image 657b "⇒" (graphic display) indicating a graphic (or symbol) of an arrow are collectively displayed. It is a thing. In the big hit state (special game state), it is advantageous to shoot a game ball to the right area of the game area 32 where the special variation winning device 39 exists. Therefore, the player is recommended (instruction, guidance) to shoot the game ball in the right area (first game area) by the right-handing instruction display 657 in the hitting notification.

The entire image of the right-handing instruction display 657 is a combination of a character image 657a and a graphic image 657b, and is stored in the image ROM 325 of the effect control device 300. Alternatively, when the right-handing instruction display 657 is displayed, the character image 657a and the graphic image 657b stored in the image ROM 325 may be combined and displayed as the right-handing instruction display 657.

Subsequently, in (D4) and (D5), the big hit round is started, and the big hit round effect is executed from the first round to the sixth round. Here, the big hit is a 6R probability variation big hit, and the big hit round is up to 6 rounds, but the right hitting instruction display 657 is continuously displayed from 1 round to 6 rounds.

After that, in (6), the big hit ending effect is executed. Here, too, the right-hand hitting instruction display 657 in the normal mode, which is composed of the character image 657a "right-handed" showing characters and the graphic image 657b "⇒" showing the figure of the arrow, is continuously displayed.

Next, in (D7) of FIG. 108B, the probable variation state of the time saving/probability variation states starts. Also in this case, the right-handing instruction display 657 in the normal mode is continuously displayed (B3502). In the probability change state (high probability state), the universal electric power support is executed, so it is advantageous to pass the game ball through the universal graphic starting gate 34 to execute the universal graphic variable display game. Therefore, it is advantageous to shoot the game ball to the right area of the game area 32 where the universal figure starting gate 34 exists. Therefore, the player recommends (instruction, guide) right-handed shooting of the game ball to the right area (first game area) by the right-handed instruction display 657 of the hitting instruction display.

Further, in (D7), since it is a predetermined timing (here, at the start of the specific game state), the probability variation state (probability) that is the current game state is determined by the processing in step B3504 of the batting informing process (FIG. 105). A mode display 645 indicating “change state” (probability change mode entry!!) (second display, character image) is displayed in large size in the center of the display screen together with the right-handing instruction display 657. The mode display 645 may simply be the character image “probability variation mode”.

Further, in (D7), one hold display 633 is displayed on the hold display portion 630b corresponding to the hold (here, the second starting memory) related to the special figure variation display game before the execution. The hold display unit 630b displays a hold display 633 (starting memory display) corresponding to the second starting memory. Further, the special figure 1 hold number display 650 displays the number "0" of the current special figure 1 hold (first starting memory), and the special figure 2 hold number display 660 shows the current special figure 2 hold (second). The number "1" of the starting memory) is displayed.

After that, in (d8), the holding shift is executed, the decorative special figure variation display game is started, and the changing pending display 633a showing the holding relating to the running special figure variation display game is displayed in the pending digestion area 640. It is displayed. Here, the special figure variable display game is the special figure 2 variable display game. Further, the mode display 645 "probability variation mode" (second display) showing the probability variation state is displayed small at the position of the upper left corner of the display screen together with the right hitting instruction display 657, and when the probability variation state (specific game state) is started. The form changes from. The mode display 645 recommends (indicates) right-handing to the player by indicating that it is in the probability change state. The right-handed instruction display 657 in the normal mode is displayed on the front side (upper layer) in preference to the decoration special design of the decoration special map variation display game.

Next, in (D9), the player is left-handing although the right-handing instruction display 657 recommends right-handing. For this reason, the rightward instruction notification command (A2705) from the game control device 100 causes the effect control device 300 to flow down the left region and the winning of the game ball to the starting winning opening 36 (second predetermined region). Is received (B1334 in FIG. 106). Then, by the processing of step B3703 of the processing at the time of receiving the hitting instruction (FIG. 107), the right hitting instruction display 658 (first display) of the special mode is displayed at the center position of the display screen for a predetermined period. The right-handing instruction display 658 in the special mode is displayed on the front side (upper layer) in preference to the decoration special pattern of the decoration special map variation display game.

The entire image of the right-handed instruction display 658 is a combination of a character image 658a "right-handed" indicating a character and a graphic image 658b "⇒" indicating a graphic (or symbol) of an arrow, and is an image of the effect control device 300. It is stored in the ROM 325. Alternatively, when the right-handing instruction display 658 is displayed, the character image 658a and the graphic image 658b stored in the image ROM 325 may be combined and displayed as the right-handing instruction display 658.

In this embodiment, the special right-handing instruction display 658 has a shape similar to the normal-hand right-handing instruction display 657 and is different only in size, but is not limited to this, and is not similar to the right-handing instruction display 657. It may have a different shape. Further, the right-handing instruction display 658 in the special mode may have the same shape as the right-handing instruction display 657 in the normal mode but may be different only in color.

In addition, when the player is left-handing even though right-handing is recommended (instruction), a right-handing is strongly recommended (instruction) to the player by the special right-handing instruction display 658. .. Therefore, the right-handing instruction display 658 in the special mode is displayed more conspicuously than the right-handing instruction display 657 in the normal mode. Further, both the normal hitting instruction display 657 (first image) and the special hitting right instruction display 658 (second image) larger than the normal hitting instruction display 657 make the player stronger. Can recommend (instruct) right-handedness.

Further, in (D9), there is no change in the mode display 645 “probability change mode” indicating the probability change state. Further, there is no change in the display mode (display position and form) of the right-handing instruction display 657, and both the character image 657a “right-handed” indicating a character and the graphic image 657b “⇒” indicating an arrow figure are in the same upper right position. It is continuously displayed in the corner position. However, under a predetermined condition (in a predetermined case) such that the special right-handing instruction display 658 is displayed, the normal-hand right-handing instruction display 657 does not disturb the display or the display area of the display screen. To ensure, only the graphic image 657b “⇒” showing the graphic of the arrow may be displayed on the display screen.

Next, in (10), the special right-handing instruction display 658 is erased after being displayed at the center position of the display screen for a predetermined period. In addition, here, a hold (second starting memory) is generated by winning the prize in the normal variable winning a prize device 37 (second starting winning opening), and a holding display 633 corresponding to the holding is generated, but the holding display 633 is displayed. On the other hand, the pending change notice (prefetch effect) is executed, and the pending display 633b that is changed from the normal mode (for example, white) to the suggestive mode (for example, green) that suggests that the expectation of the big hit is high is displayed. It should be noted that the pending change notice is executed by the process of step B1716 of the prefetching variable system command process (FIG. 41) when the expectation of the big hit in the special figure variation display game related to the holding is high.

Further, in (D10), in response to the change in the suggestion mode and the high degree of expectation (reliability) of holding, the effect control device 300 causes the mode display 645 "probability variation mode" to display (shape and shape). Although the size and color are changed from the normal mode to the special mode, the display mode (display position and mode) of the right-hand hitting instruction display 657 is maintained. In this way, the mode display 645 changes in accordance with the degree of expectation of a big hit, so that the interest of the game is enhanced.

Note that, instead of the expected degree of hold, the display mode of the mode display 645 “probability variation mode” may be changed in response to the high expectation degree of the big hit in the special figure variation display game currently being executed.

Then, in (d11), SP reach occurs and the SP reach effect (predetermined effect) is executed at the center position of the screen. The mode display 645 “probability change mode” is not displayed in order to secure the effect display area for the SP reach effect. As a result, the SP reach effect can be executed in a wide area of the display screen, which enhances the entertainment of the game.

After that, as the special figure variation display game is executed several times, in (D12), the special figure variation display game is executed for the number of continuation of the probability variation state (for example, 50 times) from the start of the probability variation state. , The probability change state ends, and “Probability change mode end” is displayed. In this example, the gaming machine 10 is an ST machine.

As described above, there is no change in the display mode (display position and form) of the right-handing instruction display 657 (first display) throughout the special game state and the subsequent time saving/probability change state (specific game state), and the display is always constant. It is continuously displayed in the form. On the other hand, the mode display 645 (second display) that recommends the player to hit the right by indicating that the state is the probability change state, the display mode changes according to the situation like (D7) and (D10). , (D), the display may be intermittently switched to a non-display state.

It should be noted that the right hitting instruction display 657 does not always have to be in a constant display mode through the special game state and the subsequent time reduction/probability variation state, and may be gradually displayed faintly or the display position may be changed over time. .. In addition, in order to prevent a situation where the player stops the game and takes a break in the time saving/probability variation state, when both the hold display 633 and the changing hold display 633a disappear, the mode display 645 (second display) You may remind you to play a game by blinking.

Then, in (D13) of FIG. 108C, the normal game state is started instead of the probability variation state, and the recommended hitting method changes from right hitting to left hitting. At the start of the normal gaming state, the game control device 100 may transmit a left-handed instruction command notification command. When production control device 300 receives the left-handing instruction notification command (B1334 in FIG. 106), left-handing instruction display 659 as the hitting instruction display is obtained by the processing in step B3704 of the processing for receiving the hitting instruction (FIG. 107). It is displayed at a central position on the display screen for a predetermined period. The left hitting instruction display 659 (third display, third image) is larger than the right hitting instruction display 657 (first image) in the normal mode, but the right hitting instruction display 658 (second image) in the special mode. It is almost the same size as. Therefore, the left-handed instruction display 659 is displayed in a large and conspicuous manner. The left-handed instruction display 659 is displayed on the front side in preference to the decoration special symbol of the decoration special symbol variation display game.

The entire image of the left-handing instruction display 659 is a combination of a character image 659a “left-handed” indicating a character and a graphic image 659b indicating an arrow graphic (or symbol), and is stored in the image ROM 325 of the effect control device 300. Has been done. Alternatively, when the left hitting instruction display 659 is displayed, the character image 659a and the graphic image 659b stored in the image ROM 325 may be combined and displayed as the left hitting instruction display 659.

Further, in (D13), one hold display 633 is displayed on the hold display portion 630a in correspondence with the hold related to the special figure variation display game before execution. The hold display unit 630a displays a hold display 633 (starting memory display) corresponding to the first starting memory. A pending change display 633a indicating a pending state related to the special figure variation display game being executed is displayed in the pending digestion area 640. Further, the special figure 1 pending number display 650 displays the number "1" of the current special figure 1 pending (first starting memory), and the special figure 2 pending number display 660 shows the current special figure 2 pending (second The number "0" of the starting memory) is displayed.

After that, in (14), the decorative special figure variation display game is being executed.

Then, in (D15), the player is making a right hit, despite the normal game state in which a left hit is recommended. Then, as the game ball passes through the universal figure starting gate 34 (first predetermined area) flowing down the right area, the left hitting instruction notification command (A7703) from the game control apparatus 100 causes the effect control apparatus 300. Is received (B1334 in FIG. 106). Then, the left hitting instruction display 659 is displayed at the center position of the display screen for a predetermined period by the processing of step B3704 of the hitting instruction reception processing (FIG. 107). Here again, the left-handing instruction display 659 (third display, third image) is larger than the right-handing instruction display 657 (first image) in the normal mode, but the right-handing instruction display 658 (second display) in the special mode. Image) is almost the same size. Therefore, the special right-hand hitting instruction display 658 is displayed so as to be largely conspicuous.

Next, in (d16), the left-hand hitting instruction display 659 (third display) displayed for a predetermined period is erased.

In the screen transition described above, at the start of the big hit state of (d3), the game control device 100 transmits a right-handing instruction notification command to the effect control device 300, and similarly to (d9), the effect control device. The 300 may display a special right-handing instruction display 658.

[Operation and effect of twelfth embodiment]
According to the twelfth embodiment, the gaming machine 10 includes effect control means (effect control device 300) capable of displaying a variable display game (decorative special figure variable display game) in which the identification information is variably displayed on the display device 41. The gaming machine 10 can generate a normal gaming state, a special gaming state (for example, a big hit state) and a specific gaming state (time saving/probability variation state) which are more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state. Also, the gaming machine 10 can shoot a first game area (a right area of the game area 32) in which it is recommended to shoot a game ball in a special game state and a specific game state, and a game ball in a normal game state. A recommended second game area (left area of the game area 32) is provided. The effect control means can display a first display (right hitting instruction display) and a second display (mode display) on the display device 41 as a display recommending to the player to shoot a game ball in the first game area. Is. The production control means continuously displays the first display (right-handing instruction display) in the special game state and the specific game state to which the special game state shifts after the special game state. The production control means displays the second display (mode display) from the end of the special game state, from the start of the specific game state, or from the middle of the specific game state.

According to such a gaming machine 10, by the first display (right-handed instruction display) and the second display (mode display), the right-handed notification can be surely executed, and at the end of the special gaming state, or the specific game. The second display (mode display) can be displayed at the start of the state or at an appropriate period after the specific game state. Therefore, the interest of the game can be improved.

Further, according to the twelfth embodiment, the effect control means (effect control device 300) uses the first image (the right-handed instruction display 657 in the normal mode) and the second image larger than the first image (special mode). The first display (right-handing instruction display) can be displayed on the display device 41 by the right-handing instruction display 658). Furthermore, the effect control means uses the third image larger than the first image to display the third display (left hitting instruction display) for recommending to the player to shoot a game ball in the second game area on the display device 41. Can be displayed.

Therefore, both the first image (the right-handed instruction display 657 in the normal mode) and the second image larger than the first image (the right-handed instruction display 658 in the special mode) are used to give the player a first game area ( The player can be strongly recommended (instructed) to shoot a game ball in the right area). Further, the third display (left-handing instruction display) can be displayed on the display device 41 so as to be conspicuous.

Further, according to the twelfth embodiment, the effect control means (effect control device 300) flows down the first game area (right area) in the normal game state to the first predetermined area (universal figure starting gate 34). When the ball has passed, the third display (left hitting instruction display) can be displayed on the display device 41. In the special game state or the specific game state, the effect control means (effect control device 300) flows down the second game area (left area) and the game ball passes through the second predetermined area (starting winning opening 36). In this case, the first display (right-handing instruction display) can be displayed on the display device 41. Therefore, when the game ball is shot toward the game area that is not recommended in the current game state among the first game area and the second game area, the first display (right-handed instruction display) or the third display as a warning (Left-handed instruction display) can be displayed.

[Thirteenth Embodiment]
The thirteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 109 to 117. The configurations other than those described below may be the same as those in the first to twelfth embodiments. Further, in the following embodiments, the same reference numerals are used for the configurations that perform the same functions as those of the first to twelfth embodiments, and the duplicate description will be appropriately omitted.

The thirteenth embodiment relates to a persistent notification effect for persistently reporting a piece of information. The persistent notification effect is executed on a display device such as the display device 41 (or a sub display device other than the display device 41) under the control of the effect control device 300. In the present embodiment, particularly, the hitting information of the twelfth embodiment described above will be described as an example of one piece of information, and a hitting style notification effect for notifying the hitting information will be described as an example of a persistent notification effect.

The batting method notification given as an example in the present embodiment is particularly a batting direction display (a (9) in FIG. 108B and FIG. 108C in FIG. 108B, which is displayed when the player performs a batting method different from the recommended batting method. (See (d) 15)), or a hitting instruction display (for example, see (d) in FIG. 108B) when the recommended hitting changes due to a change in the game state.

In the following, an obsessive notification effect of notifying right-handing information for recommending right-handing by means of a special right-handing instruction display 658 in the hitting instruction display will be described. As described below, the mode of persistent notification performance is characterized by a plurality of parameters.

[Form of image itself (first parameter)]
FIG. 109 is a diagram exemplifying the form of the image of the right-handing instruction display 658 as a first parameter (first factor) that defines and characterizes the presentation mode of the relentless notification production by the right-handing instruction display 658. Here, the form includes a shape, a pattern, and a color. The image of the entire right-hand hitting instruction display 658 can be impressed on the player by the form of the image itself as the first parameter.

(A), (B), and (C) of FIG. 109 each show an example of the image form of the right-handing instruction display 658. The shapes of (A), (B), and (C) are particularly different, but the colors and patterns may be different. In addition, the effect control device 300 does not only use the image (one of (A), (B), and (C)) of the right-hand hitting instruction display 658 stored in the image ROM 325, but also (A )(B)(C), a plurality of images of the right-hand hitting instruction display 658 having different forms may be stored in the image ROM 325 and appropriately selected.

As shown in FIG. 109, the image of the right-handing instruction display 658 includes a character image 658a indicating the character “right-handed” and a graphic image 658b indicating an arrow, and a frame image 658c indicating a frame graphic. The frame image 658c geometrically adapted to the graphic image 658b contacts the outer periphery of the graphic image 658b and surrounds the graphic image 658b. Therefore, the graphic image 658b and the frame image 658c are displayed integrally. Note that the frame image 658c is not limited to this, and may have another shape that surrounds the character image 658a and/or the graphic image 658b (see FIGS. 113(B1)-(B3) described later). The character image 658a, the graphic image 658b, and the frame image 658c may be referred to as a first image, a second image, and a third image, respectively.

The colors of the character image 658a, the graphic image 658b, and the frame image 658c may be multicolor (plural colors) or single color, but this embodiment shows the case of multicolor. In the case of multiple colors, each image is painted in multiple colors that vary from place to place. Further, the character image 658a, the graphic image 658b, and the frame image 658c may have a predetermined pattern.

[Color change (second parameter)]
FIG. 110 is a diagram exemplifying a color change inside the right-handing instruction display 658 as a second parameter (second factor) that defines and characterizes the presentation mode of the relentless notification production by the right-handing instruction display 658. Here, the color change is a change in color over time. The color change as the second parameter allows the player to be impressed with the image of the entire right-handing instruction display 658.

Although the effect control device 300 can temporally change the color inside the right-handing instruction display 658 on the display screen of the display device 41, the color inside the right-handing instruction display 658 as a moving image (movie, animation). May be changed with time.

(A1) to (A3) of FIG. 110A show the temporal change of the color of the character image 658a in the image of the right-handing instruction display 658, and as time elapses, (A1)→(A2)→(A3) The color of each part of the character image 658a changes. The inside of the character image 658a is painted in multiple colors (a plurality of colors), and is a blue area 661A indicated by vertical stripes, a green area 661B indicated by diagonal stripes, a yellow area 661C indicated by lattice stripes, and a red area indicated by mesh-like stripes. 661D is present. The color areas are arranged in the horizontal direction (horizontal direction) of the display screen, but may be arranged in the vertical direction (vertical direction) or diagonal direction.

In (A1) of FIG. 110A, a blue area 661A, a green area 661B, a yellow area 661C, and a red area 661D are arranged from the left, and in (A2), the blue area 661A spreads in the center, and the green area extends outward in the horizontal direction. A region 661B, a yellow region 661C, and a red region 661D are arranged, and in (A3), contrary to (A1), a red region 661D, a yellow region 661C, a green region 661B, and a blue region 661A are arranged from the left.

(B1) to (B3) of FIG. 110A show the time change of the color of the graphic image 658b in the image of the right-handing instruction display 658, and as time elapses, (B1)→(B2)→(B3) The color of each part of the graphic image 658b changes. The inside of the graphic image 658b is painted in multiple colors (a plurality of colors), and a blue area 661A indicated by vertical stripes, a green area 661B indicated by diagonal stripes, a yellow area 661C indicated by lattice stripes, and a red area indicated by mesh stripes. 661D is present.

In (B1) of FIG. 110A, a red area 663D, a yellow area 663C, a green area 663B, and a blue area 663A are arranged from the left, and in (B2), the blue area 663A spreads in the center, and the green area extends outward in the left-right direction. A region 663B, a yellow region 663C, and a red region 663D are arranged, and in (B3), contrary to (B1), a blue region 663A, a green region 663B, a yellow region 663C, and a red region 663D are arranged from the left.

In FIG. 110A, the color of each part of the character image 658a and the graphic image 658b temporally changes in various modes. For example, in the portion (hand-biased portion) on the left side of the character “stroke” in the character image 658a, green → blue → yellow, and in the portion on the right side of the character “stroke” (“cho”), yellow → blue → green in terms of time. Change.

In addition, more simply, as shown in (A1) to (A3) of FIG. 110B, the blue area 661A, the green area 661B, the yellow area 661C, and the red area 661D are moved to the right side so that the character image Right-handed information may be notified according to the direction in which the color of 658a flows. Further, similarly, as shown in (B1) to (B3) of FIG. 110B, the red area 661D, the yellow area 661C, the green area 661B, and the blue area 661A are moved rightward so as to flow, and the graphic image is displayed. Right-handed information may be notified according to the direction in which the color of 658b flows.

Note that, for convenience of illustration, in FIG. 110, the blue area 663A, the green area 663B, the yellow area 663C, and the red area 663D are arranged by being separated by a clear boundary, but as shown in FIG. It is also possible to gradually change in the left-right direction (spatial) in accordance with the hue circle without having. Note that (A1) to (A3) and (B1) to (B3) in FIG. 111 correspond to (A1) to (A3) and (B1) to (B3) in FIG. 110, respectively.

FIG. 111 shows an example in which the character image 658a and the graphic image 658b are arranged so that the colors gradually change in the left-right direction (spatial) in accordance with the hue circle. In FIG. 111, the dark portion is a reddish color and the light portion is a bluish color. For example, in FIG. 111, orange appears between yellow and red, and yellow-green appears between green and yellow. In FIG. 111, the color inside the character image 658a temporally changes as in (A1)→(A2)→(A3). Further, in FIG. 111, the color inside the graphic image 658b temporally changes as (B1)→(B2)→(B3).

Further, the temporal changes of the colors (A1) to (A3) and (B1) to (B3) in FIGS. 110 and 111 are merely examples, and the present invention is not limited thereto. For example, when the character image 658a and the graphic image 658b are painted in a single color instead of multicolor, the entire color (one color) of the character image 658a and the graphic image 658b is gradually changed according to the hue circle. May be.

Further, in the present embodiment, the color of the frame image 658c does not change with time, but it may change with time like the character image 658a and the graphic image 658b. For example, the portion of the frame image 658c and the portion of the graphic image 658b that opposes (contacts with) the frame image 658c may be different colors or the same color and may change with time. Further, in the present embodiment, the frame image 658c has a single color (for example, white), but may have multiple colors.

[Display position change (third parameter, movement)]
FIG. 112 shows a change in the display position of the right-handing instruction display 658 on the display screen of the display device 41, that is, as the third parameter (third factor) that defines and characterizes the presentation mode of the relentless notification production by the right-handing instruction display 658. FIG. 16 is a diagram illustrating an example of movement of a right-handing instruction display 658. By changing (moving) the display position as the third parameter, it is possible to impress the player with the image of the entire right-handing instruction display 658.

The effect control device 300 can change the display position of the right hitting instruction display 658 on the display screen of the display device 41 and move the right hitting instruction display 658. The effect control device 300 may move the right hitting instruction display 658 as a moving image (movie, animation).

In FIG. 112, the entire right-handing instruction display 658 composed of the character image 658a, the graphic image 658b, and the frame image 658c moves within the display screen of the display device 41, and the display position of the right-handing instruction display 658 is temporally changed. Change. The right-handing instruction display 658 is moved in the rightward direction to the right in order to inform (instruct, recommend, guide) right-handing.

The arrangement (relative position) of the character image 658a, the graphic image 658b, and the frame image 658c in the right-handing instruction display 658 is fixed even if the right-handing instruction display 658 moves. That is, the character image 658a, the graphic image 658b, and the frame image 658c move as a unit. In the right-handing instruction display 658, the character image 658a is arranged on the right side of the integrated graphic image 658b and frame image 658c. In order to improve the enjoyment of the game, the arrangement (relative position) of the character image 658a, the graphic image 658b, and the frame image 658c in the right-handing instruction display 658 changes with time, and the right-handing instruction display 658 is displayed. A configuration that changes with movement is also possible.

First, in (E1) of FIG. 112, first, the character image 658a “right hit” appears on the display screen from the left end position and moves to the right. The right hitting information is impressed to the player by the form (first parameter), color change (second parameter), and display position change (third parameter) of the image itself of the character image 658a (first image). Be informed.

Next, in (e2), the integrally combined graphic image 658b (second image) and frame image 658c (third image) appear from the left end position and move to the right. The right hitting information is impressed and notified to the player by the form, color change, and display position change of the image itself of the graphic image 658b. The right hitting information is given an impression to the player depending on the form of the image of the frame image 658c and the display position change. It should be noted that the player may be informed of the right-handed information by making an impression by changing the color of the frame image 658c.

If the player is informed of the right-handed information by the form, color change, and display position change of the image itself of the graphic image 658b (second image) or the frame image 658c (third image), the character information is displayed. In addition to the character image 658a, the right-handed information can be reliably notified by one arrow of the graphic image 658b and the frame image 658c that are integrally combined.

Next, in (e3), the character image 658a “right hit” that has moved to the right reaches the rightmost position on the display screen and disappears from the display screen. After that, the graphic image 658b and the frame image 658c that have moved to the right also reach the position at the right end and disappear from the display screen.

In addition, in (e1) to (e3), the effect control device 300 sets the right-handing instruction display 665 for notifying the right-handing information independent of the right-handing instruction display 658 as the persistent notification presentation. At the same time, it is displayed on the display device 41. The right-handing instruction display 665 (fourth image) notifies the player of right-handing information as one piece of information only by the form (first parameter) of the image itself. In FIG. 114, the right-handing instruction display 665 is a graphic image (fourth image) showing an arrow, but may be a character image showing a character (for example, “right-handed”).

Unlike the right-handing instruction display 658 (first right-handing instruction display), the right-handing instruction display 665 (second right-handing instruction display) has a fixed position that does not move and does not change color. The right-handing information is inconspicuously notified independently of the relentless notification effect by the plurality of parameters of the right-handing instruction display 658. Further, the right-handing instruction display 665 is smaller than the right-handing instruction display 658 and is therefore inconspicuous. The right hitting instruction display 665 continues in the special gaming state and/or the time saving/probably changing state (specific gaming state) that shifts after the special gaming state, like the right hitting instruction display 657 in the normal mode in the twelfth embodiment. It may be displayed as. That is, the right-handing instruction display 665 can be displayed not only at the same time as the right-handing instruction display 658 but also in a situation different from the right-handing instruction display 658. It can be displayed over the entire area, and is smaller than the right-hand hitting instruction display 658 and is less noticeable. The right-handing instruction display 665 may have a size similar to that of the right-handing instruction display 658 and may be displayed in a thin manner so as to be inconspicuous.

Further, in (e1) to (e3), an effect image 658d that is movable with respect to the graphic image 658b and the frame image 658c is added on the frame image 658c. The effect image 658d will be described later.

[Effect addition (4th parameter, emphasis)]
FIG. 113 shows the addition of the effect image 658d to the right-handing instruction display 658 (here, the frame image 658c) as the fourth parameter (fourth factor) that defines and characterizes the presentation mode of the relentless notification presentation by the right-handing instruction display 658. It is a figure which illustrates. By adding the effect as the fourth parameter (adding the effect image 658d), the right-hand hitting instruction display 658 can be impressed on the player.

The effect control device 300 can change and move the display position of the effect image 658d. The effect control device 300 may move the effect image 658d as a moving image (movie, animation).

Like (A1) to (A3) of FIG. 113, the effect image 658d is relatively relative to the graphic image 658b and the frame image 658c as (A1)→(A2)→(A3) over time. By moving to the right, the right-handed information is notified. Further, by moving the effect image 658d, the integrated arrow of the graphic image 658b and the frame image 658c can be emphasized, and the right-handed information by the graphic image 658b and the frame image 658c can be emphasized. The effect image 658d may move on the frame image 658c, move to the right end of the frame image 658c, and then start moving from the left end to the right again.

Further, as another example of the effect image 658d, the effect image 658d is moved rightward on the frame image 658c surrounding the character image 658a with a gap as shown in (B1) to (B3) of FIG. You can The shape of the effect image 658d is not constant and may change with time. The effect image 658d moves to the right relative to the character image 658a and the frame image 658c as shown in (B1)→(B2)→(B3) with the lapse of time, thereby notifying the right-handed information. To do.

[Example of presence or absence of each parameter]
FIG. 114 is a diagram illustrating the presence or absence of each parameter (each factor) that defines and characterizes the presentation mode of the notification production by the right-handing instruction display. With each parameter (each factor), the player can be impressed with the notification effect.

As described above, the first notification effect by the right hitting instruction display 658 including a plurality of images of the first image (character image 658a), the second image (graphic image 658b), and the third image (frame image 658c) ( That is, the relentless notification effect is right-handed by the first parameter (form of the image itself), the second parameter (color change), the third parameter (display position change), and the fourth parameter (effect addition) of each image. It is possible to relentlessly inform the player of right-handed information for recommending. The first notification effect (that is, the persistent notification effect) is characterized by at least two or more parameters. On the other hand, the second notification effect by the right hitting instruction display 665 consisting of only the fourth image (graphic image) notifies the player of right hitting information only by the first parameter (the form of the image itself).

In the example of FIG. 114, as described above, the effects of the first image (character image 658a) and the second image (graphic image 658b) are characterized by the first parameter, the second parameter, and the third parameter. The effect of the third image (frame image 658c) is characterized by the first parameter, the third parameter, and the fourth parameter.

The effect of the first image and the second image may be characterized by the fourth parameter (addition of effect), and the effect of the third image may be characterized by the second parameter (color change). Good.

In another example of FIG. 115, the effect of the first image (character image 658a) is characterized by the first parameter, the second parameter, and the fourth parameter. The effect of the second image (graphic image 658b) is characterized by the first parameter and the third parameter. The effect of the third image (frame image 658c) is characterized by the first parameter, the second parameter, the third parameter, and the fourth parameter. The first notification effect (that is, the persistent notification effect) is characterized by at least two or more parameters.

In addition to the first to fourth parameters described in FIG. 114 and FIG. 115, as a fifth parameter, addition of voice from a speaker (“right strike”) to parameters that characterize the rendition mode of relentless notification performance Etc.), as a sixth parameter, light emission of a light emitting member (LED of the board effect device 44) arranged on the right side of the game board 30, etc., as a seventh parameter, temporal change of shading of each image, and as an eighth parameter. , The shape of each image may change with time (for example, the change of (A)→(B)→(C) of FIG. 109). Further, the spatial variation of the color of each image and the spatial variation of the shading can also be regarded as parameters.

[Modified example of persistent notification production]
FIG. 116 is a screen transition diagram showing a modified example of the presentation mode of the persistent notification presentation by the right-handed instruction display 658. In FIG. 116, the colors of the respective portions of the character image 658a and the graphic image 658b may be temporally changed in the same direction of the hue circle. For example, the color of each part of the character image 658a and the graphic image 658b changes with time in one direction of the hue circle (... red→blue→green→yellow→red→blue→green→...). May be.

In FIG. 116, the display screen of the display device 41 is divided into the blue region 41A, the green region 41B, the yellow region 41C, and the red region 41D in the horizontal direction (left-right direction) and set. Then, in the moving character image 658a and the graphic image 658b, a portion overlapping with the blue area 41A is a blue area 661A painted with blue, a portion overlapping with the green area 41B is a green area 661B painted with green, and overlaps with a yellow area 41C. A portion is made a yellow area 661C painted in yellow, and a portion overlapping the red area 41D is made a red area 661D painted in red. In this way, the color of each part of the character image 658a and the graphic image 658b is changed in one direction of the hue circle (... red→blue→green→yellow→red→blue→) by moving the character image 658a and the graphic image 658b. It changes with time like green →.

Further, the effect image 658d may always be displayed at the position of the vertical center line on the display screen. Even in this case, the effect image 658d is moved relative to the graphic image 658b and the frame image 658c by moving the frame image 658c, and the right-handed information of the graphic image 658b and the frame image 658c is emphasized. Can be displayed. However, the effect image 658d itself moves to the left relative to the graphic image 658b and the frame image 658c, and therefore right-handed information cannot be notified.

[Display left-handed instruction]
109 to 113, the production mode of the relentless notification effect by the right-handing instruction display 658 has been described. However, as in the screen transition diagram of FIG. 117, as with the right-handing instruction display 658, the left-handing instruction display 659 is left. You may perform relentless notification production of hit information.

117 (key 1) to (key 3), a left-handing instruction including a plurality of images of a first image (character image 659a), a second image (graphic image 659b), and a third image (frame image 659c) The first notification effect (that is, persistent notification effect) by the display 659 is the first parameter (form of the image itself) of each image, the second parameter (color change), the third parameter (display position change), and the fourth parameter. By (effect addition), it is possible to relentlessly inform the player of left-handing information for recommending left-handing. On the other hand, the second notification effect by the left hitting instruction display 667 consisting only of the fourth image (graphic image) notifies the player of left hitting information only by the first parameter (the form of the image itself).

Since the left-handed state (normal game state) is more disadvantageous to the player than the right-handed state (probably changed state), the left-handing instruction display 659 is different from the right-handing instruction display 658. Good. For example, the left hitting instruction display 659 may be different in color from the right hitting instruction display 658. The left-handed instruction display 659 may be spatially and temporally changed with a plain color such as gray, or may be a single color so as not to be spatially and temporally changed (no second parameter). In addition, in the left-handed instruction display 659, addition of an effect may be eliminated (no fourth parameter).

Although the persistent notification effect has been described above, the persistent notification effect of the present embodiment is also applicable to a case of notifying information other than how to hit. As notification of information other than how to hit, for example, notification of operation instruction of the effect button 25, notification of temporary stop of decorative special symbol (reach notification), notification of big hit occurrence (fanfare), notification of round during big hit and so on. The notification of the operation instruction of the effect button 25 is, for example, notification by a character image such as "press the button" and a graphic image simulating the operation button. The notification of the temporary stop of the decoration special symbol is, for example, a notification of a character image of “reach”. The notification of occurrence of a big hit is, for example, a notification of a character image of "big hit". The notification of the round is a notification by a character image such as "1 round" or "3 round".

[Operation/Effect of Thirteenth Embodiment]
According to the thirteenth embodiment, the gaming machine 10 includes effect control means (effect control device 300) capable of displaying a variable display game (decorative special figure variable display game) in which the identification information is variably displayed on the display device 41. The effect control means includes a first image (for example, a character image 658a), a second image (for example, a graphic image 658b), and a third image (for example, a frame image 658c) characterized by at least a first parameter (for example, the form of the image itself). ) Is displayed on the display device 41, it is possible to execute a relentless notification effect that relentlessly notifies one piece of information (for example, right-handed information). At least one of the first image, the second image, and the third image is characterized by a second parameter (for example, color change) and a third parameter (for example, display position change) in addition to the first parameter. The player can be notified of one piece of information (for example, right-handed information) by the first parameter, the second parameter, and the third parameter.

According to such a gaming machine 10, it is possible to impress the player by displaying (notifying) one piece of information on the display device 41 in an easy-to-understand manner by the persistent notification effect using three images and three parameters. For example, even if one piece of information is displayed preferentially on the front side (upper layer), there is a possibility that it may be difficult to see if the background is switched abruptly, but such a situation can be prevented. Further, even for a player who is a beginner or a player whose native language is not a predetermined language (Japanese), one piece of information is displayed on the display device 41 in an easy-to-understand manner by the persistent notification effect using three images and three parameters. It can be displayed (notified) to give an impression. In addition, the three images and the three parameters make the relentless notification effect lively and enhance the interest of the game.

According to the thirteenth embodiment, the effect control means (effect control device 300) notifies the player of one piece of information by the first parameter, the second parameter, and the third parameter of the first image, and then the second parameter. It is possible to notify the player of one piece of information by the first parameter, the second parameter, and the third parameter of the image or the third image. Therefore, the three parameters can impress the persistent notification effect many times.

According to the thirteenth embodiment, the effect control unit (effect control device 300) uses the fourth image (for example, the image of the right-handing instruction display 665) that notifies one piece of information independently of the persistent notification effect as the persistent notification effect. At the same time, it can be displayed on the display device 41. The fourth image informs the player of one piece of information according to the first parameter (for example, the form of the image itself). Therefore, by displaying the fourth image in addition to the persistent notification effect, one piece of information can be displayed (notified) on the display device 41 in an easy-to-understand manner to impress the player. In addition, in a special situation in which one piece of information (for example, right-handed information) is always notified by the fourth image, and there is an increased need for notifying it (for example, a situation where a player left-handed in a gaming state where right-handedness is recommended). ), a flexible notification can be performed such that a persistent notification effect is executed and one piece of information (for example, right-handed information) is emphasized and notified.

According to the thirteenth embodiment, at least one of the first image, the second image, and the third image has a fourth parameter (for example, an effect parameter) in addition to the first parameter, the second parameter, and the third parameter. Addition). The effect control means can notify the player of one piece of information by the first parameter, the second parameter, the third parameter, and the fourth parameter. Therefore, the relentless notification effect that further emphasizes one piece of information can be executed, the relentless notification effect becomes more lively, and the enjoyment of the game is improved.

According to the thirteenth embodiment, the first parameter is the form of each image itself, the second parameter is the color change of each image, the third parameter is the change of the display position of each image on the display device 41, The four parameters are the addition of effects. Therefore, the appearance of the relentless notification production itself becomes lively, and the enjoyment of the game is improved.

The present invention is not limited to the embodiments described above, and various modifications and changes can be made within the scope of the technical idea thereof, and it is obvious that they are also included in the technical scope of the present invention. Is. For example, it is possible to combine a plurality of embodiments. Further, for example, the present invention can be applied to other types of gaming machines (slot machines, etc.). The scope of the present invention is shown by the claims, and is intended to include all modifications within the meaning and scope of equivalency of the claims.

10 Gaming Machine 12 Front Frame (Game Frame)
25 production button 30 game board 32 game area 36 first start winning opening (first start winning area)
36b LED
37 Ordinary variation prize winning device (second starting prize area)
39 special variation winning device 40 center case 41 display device 42 setting change device 44 board production device 44c, 44d internal accessory (movable body)
46 board decoration device 50 collective display device (LED)
51 1st special map fluctuation display section (1st special display)
52 Second special map change display section (Special map 2 display)
93 setting key switch 95a external accessory (outer movable member)
102 setting value change switch 143 probability setting value display device 150 driver 152 status display device 153 LED driver 100 game control device (main board)
200 payout control device 300 production control device (sub-board)
341 Error code 342 Error code 343 Character information 344 Underline 345 Notification information 400 Power supply device 510 Parts 513 Identification board 516 Parallel-serial conversion unit 519 Wiring (electric wire)
630 Hold display section 640 Hold digestion area 815 I2CI/O expander

Claims (1)

In a gaming machine provided with a game control means capable of executing a game, an effect control means capable of executing an effect associated with the game, and a decoration device performing a light emission effect,
Configured as part of the decorating device, including removable parts,
The effect control means,
A variable display game in which the first identification information and the second identification information displayed in a size smaller than the first identification information are variably displayed can be displayed on a predetermined display device,
When it is determined whether or not the part is a standard product of the gaming machine, and when it is determined that the part is not a standard product of the gaming machine, a component abnormality notification image that can specify that the part is not the standard product of the gaming machine is displayed. Can be displayed on the display device,
When the gaming machine is initialized, it is possible to display an initialization notification image capable of specifying that the gaming machine has been initialized on the display device,
A gaming machine, characterized in that the component abnormality notification image is displayed with priority over the initialization notification image, and is displayed at a position not overlapping the second identification information .